CCNA1-ITN, SLM, Student Lab Manual

Lab - Initializing and Reloading a Router and Switch
Topology
Objectives
Part 1: Set Up Devices in the Network as Shown in the Topology
Part 2: Initialize the Router and Reload
Part 3: Initialize the Switch and Reload
Background / Scenario
Before starting a CCNA hands-on lab that makes use of either a Cisco router or switch, ensure that the
devices in use have been erased and have no startup configurations present. Otherwise, the results of your
lab may be unpredictable. This lab provides a detail procedure for initializing and reloading a Cisco router and
a Cisco switch.
Note: The routers used with CCNA hands-on labs are Cisco 1941 Integrated Services Routers (ISRs) with
Cisco IOS Release 15.2(4)M3 (universalk9 image). The switches used are Cisco Catalyst 2960s with Cisco
IOS Release 15.0(2) (lanbasek9 image). Other routers, switches, and Cisco IOS versions can be used.
Depending on the model and Cisco IOS version, the commands available and output produced might vary
from what is shown in the labs.
Required Resources
1 Router (Cisco 1941 with Cisco IOS software, Release 15.2(4)M3 universal image or comparable)
1 Switch (Cisco 2960 with Cisco IOS Release 15.0(2) lanbasek9 image or comparable)
2 PCs (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with terminal emulation program, such as Tera Term)
Console cables to configure the Cisco IOS devices via the console ports
Part 1:
Set Up Devices in the Network as Shown in the Topology
Step 1: Cable the network as shown in the topology.

Attach console cables to the devices shown in the topology diagram.
Step 2: Power on all the devices in the topology.

Wait for all devices to finish the software load process before moving to Part 2.
2013 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public.
Page 1 of 4
Initializing and Reloading a Router and Switch
Part 2:
Initialize the Router and Reload
Step 1: Connect to the router.

Console into the router and enter privileged EXEC mode using the enable command.
Router> enable
Router#
Step 2: Erase the startup configuration file from NVRAM.

Type the erase startup-config command to remove the startup configuration from nonvolatile randomaccess memory (NVRAM).
Router# erase startup-config
Erasing the nvram filesystem will remove all configuration files! Continue? [confirm]
[OK]
Erase of nvram: complete
Router#
Step 3: Reload the router.

Issue the reload command to remove an old configuration from memory. When prompted to Proceed with
reload, press Enter to confirm the reload. Pressing any other key will abort the reload.
Router# reload
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
*Nov 29 18:28:09.923: %SYS-5-RELOAD: Reload requested by console. Reload Reason:
Reload Command.
Note: You may receive a prompt to save the running configuration prior to reloading the router. Respond
by typing no and press Enter.
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: no
Step 4: Bypass the initial configuration dialog.

After the router reloads, you are prompted to enter the initial configuration dialog. Enter no and press Enter.
Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes/no]: no
Step 5: Terminate the autoinstall program.

You will be prompted to terminate the autoinstall program. Respond yes and then press Enter.
Would you like to terminate autoinstall? [yes]: yes
Router>
Part 3:
Initialize the Switch and Reload
Step 1: Connect to the switch.

Console into the switch and enter privileged EXEC mode.
Switch> enable
Switch#
Page 2 of 4
Step 2: Determine if there have been any virtual local-area networks (VLANs) created.
Use the show flash command to determine if any VLANs have been created on the switch.
Switch# show flash
Directory of flash:/
2
3
4
5
6
-rwx
-rwx
-rwx
-rwx
-rwx
1919
1632
13336
11607161
616
Mar
Mar
Mar
Mar
Mar
1
1
1
1
1
1993
1993
1993
1993
1993
00:06:33
00:06:33
00:06:33
02:37:06
00:07:13
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
private-config.text
config.text
multiple-fs
c2960-lanbasek9-mz.150-2.SE.bin
vlan.dat
32514048 bytes total (20886528 bytes free)

Switch#
Step 3: Delete the VLAN file.

a. If the vlan.dat file was found in flash, then delete this file.
Switch# delete vlan.dat
Delete filename [vlan.dat]?
You will be prompted to verify the file name. At this point, you can change the file name or just press
Enter if you have entered the name correctly.
b. When you are prompted to delete this file, press Enter to confirm the deletion. (Pressing any other key will
abort the deletion.)
Delete flash:/vlan.dat? [confirm]
Switch#
Step 4: Erase the startup configuration file.

Use the erase startup-config command to erase the startup configuration file from NVRAM. When you are
prompted to remove the configuration file, press Enter to confirm the erase. (Pressing any other key will abort
the operation.)
Switch# erase startup-config
[OK]
Switch#
Step 5: Reload the switch.

Reload the switch to remove any old configuration information from memory. When you are prompted to
reload the switch, press Enter to proceed with the reload. (Pressing any other key will abort the reload.)
Switch# reload
Note: You may receive a prompt to save the running configuration prior to reloading the switch. Type no
and press Enter.
Page 3 of 4

After the switch reloads, you should see a prompt to enter the initial configuration dialog. Type no at the
prompt and press Enter.
Switch>
Reflection
1. Why is it necessary to erase the startup configuration before reloading the router?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. You find a couple configurations issues after saving the running configuration to the startup configuration, so
you make the necessary changes to fix those issues. If you were to reload the device now, what configuration
would be restored to the device after the reload?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 4
Lab - Installing the IPv6 Protocol and Assigning Host Addresses

with Windows XP
Objectives
Part 1: Install the IPv6 Protocol on a Windows XP PC
Install the IPv6 protocol.
Examine IPv6 address information.
Part 2: Use the Network Shell (netsh) Utility
Work inside the netsh utility.
Configure a static IPv6 address on the local-area network (LAN) interface.
Exit the netsh utility.
Display IPv6 address information using netsh.
Issue netsh instructions from the command prompt.
The Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) is not enabled by default in Windows XP. Windows XP includes IPv6
implementation, but the IPv6 protocol must be installed. XP does not provide a way to configure IPv6 static
addresses from the Graphical User Interface (GUI), so all IPv6 static address assignments must be done
using the Network Shell (netsh) utility.
In this lab, you will install the IPv6 protocol on a Windows XP PC. You will then assign a static IPv6 address
to the LAN interface.
Required Resources
1 Windows XP PC
Part 1: Install the IPv6 Protocol on a Windows XP PC

In Part 1, you will install the IPv6 protocol on a PC running Windows XP. You will also use two commands to
view the IPv6 addresses assigned to the PC.
Step 1: Install the IPv6 protocol.

From the command prompt window, type ipv6 install to install the IPv6 protocol.
Step 2: Examine IPv6 Address Information.

Use the ipconfig /all command to view IPv6 address information.
Page 1 of 5
Installing the IPv6 Protocol and Assigning Host Addresses with Windows XP
Part 2: Use the Network Shell (netsh) Utility

Network Shell (netsh) is a command-line utility included with Windows XP and newer Windows operating
systems, such as Vista and Windows 7. It allows you to configure the IPv6 address information on your LAN.
In Part 2, you will use the netsh utility to configure static IPv6 address information on a Windows XP PC LAN
interface. You will also use the netsh utility to display the PC LAN interface IPv6 address information.
Step 1: Work inside the Network Shell utility.

a. From the command prompt window, type netsh and press Enter to start the netsh utility. The command
prompt changes from C:\> to netsh>.
b. At the prompt, enter a question mark (?) and press Enter to provide the list of available parameters.
Page 2 of 5
c.
Type interface ? and press Enter to provide the list of interface commands.
Note: You can use the question mark (?) at any level in the netsh utility to list the available options. The
up arrow can be used to scroll through previous netsh commands. The netsh utility also allows you to
abbreviate commands, as long as the abbreviation is unique.
Page 3 of 5
Step 2: Configure a static IPv6 address on the LAN interface.

To add a static IPv6 address to the LAN interface, issue the interface ipv6 add address command from
inside the netsh utility.
Step 3: Display IPv6 address information using the netsh utility.

You can display IPv6 address information using the interface ipv6 show address command.
Step 4: Exit the netsh utility.

Use the exit command to exit from the netsh utility.
Step 5: Issue netsh instructions from the command prompt.

All netsh instructions can be entered from the command prompt, outside the netsh utility, by preceding the
instruction with the netsh command.
Page 4 of 5
Reflection
1. How would you renew your LAN interface address information from the netsh utility?
Hint: Use the question mark (?) for help in obtaining the parameter sequence.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 5
Draw Your Concept of the Internet

Objectives
Networks are made of many different components
In this activity, you will visualize how you are connected, through the Internet, to those places, people, or
businesses with whom (or which) you interact on a daily basis. After reflection and sketching your homes or
schools topology, you can draw conclusions about the Internet that you may not have thought of prior to this
activity.
Draw and label a map of the Internet as you interpret it now. Include your home or school/university location
and its respective cabling, equipment, devices, etc. Some items you may want to include:
Devices or equipment
Media (cabling)
Link addresses or names
Sources and destinations
Internet service providers
Upon completion, save your work in a hard-copy format, it will be used for future reference at the end of this
chapter. If it is an electronic document, save it to a server location provided by your instructor. Be prepared to
share and explain your work in class.
For an example to get you started, please visit: http://www.kk.org/internet-mapping
Required Resources
Internet access
Paper and pencils or pens (if students are creating a hard copy)
Reflection
1. After reviewing your classmates drawings, were there computer devices that you could have included on your
diagram? If so, which ones and why?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. After reviewing your classmates drawings, how were some of the model designs the same or different?
What modifications would you make to your drawing after reviewing the other drawings?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3. In what way could icons on a network drawing provide a streamlined thought process and facilitate your
learning? Explain your answer.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 1
Lab - Researching Network Collaboration Tools

Objectives
Part 1: Use Collaboration Tools
Identify current awareness of collaboration tools.
Identify key reasons for using collaboration tools.
Part 2: Share Documents with Google Drive

Part 3: Explore Conferencing and Web Meetings
Part 4: Create Wiki Pages
Network collaboration tools give people the opportunity to work together efficiently and productively without
the constraints of location or time zone. Collaborative tool types include document sharing, web meetings,
and wikis.
In Part 1, you will identify collaboration tools that you currently use. You will also research some popular
collaborative tools used today. In Part 2, you will work with Google Drive. In Part 3, you will investigate
Conferencing and Web meeting tools and, in Part 4, you will work with wikis.
Required Resources
Device with Internet access
Part 1: Use Collaboration Tools

Step 1: List some collaboration tools that you currently use today.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: List some reasons for using collaboration tools.

____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Part 2: Share Documents with Google Drive

In Part 2, you will explore the document sharing functions by using Google Drive to set up document sharing.
Google Drive, formally Google Docs, is a web-based office suite and data storage service that allows users to
create and edit documents online while collaborating in real-time with other users. Google Drive provides 5
GB of storage with every free Google account. You can purchase additional storage, if needed.
Step 1: Create a Google account.

To use any of Googles services, you must first create a Google account. This account can be used with any
of Googles services, including Gmail.
Page 1 of 17

a. Browse to www.google.com and click Sign in (located at the top-right corner of the web page).
b. On the Google Accounts web page, if you already have a Google account, you can sign in now;
otherwise, click SIGN UP.
Page 2 of 17

c.
On the Create a new Google Account web page, fill out the form to the right. The name you enter in the
Choose your username field becomes the account name. It is not necessary to supply your mobile
phone or current email address. You must agree to the Google Terms of Service and Privacy Policy
before clicking Next step.
Page 3 of 17

d. The next web page allows you to add a profile photo if you would like. Click Next Step to complete the
account creation process.
Step 2: Create a new document.

a. Sign in to Google using the access credentials you created in Step 1. Type http://drive.google.com in
your browser and press Enter. This navigates you to Google Drive.
b. Click the CREATE button to display a drop-down menu that allows you to select the type of document to
create. Choose Document.
Page 4 of 17

The new document displays. Many of the functions of the Google editor work similarly to Microsoft Word.
Step 3: Share a Google document.

a. After the blank Google document opens, you can share it with others by clicking the Share button (at the
top-right corner of the web page).
b. Name your new document, then click the Save button.
Page 5 of 17

c.
Here on the Sharing settings web page, in the Add people text field, you can enter Google email names,
email addresses, or groups with whom to share this document.
d. As soon as you start entering information into the Add people box, the box provides more options. The
Can edit drop-down menu allows you to choose the document privileges (Can edit, Can comment, Can
view) for the people you add. You can also specify how to notify these people of this document (Send a
copy to myself or Paste the item itself into the email). Click Share & save.
Page 6 of 17

e. Click the Done button. This will navigate you back to the open document.
f.
All users with share privileges can view this document at the same time. Users with edit privileges can
edit this document while others view it.
g. If the document is being viewed by someone while you are in it, you can see who they are by clicking the
other viewer(s) drop-down menu (in the upper-right corner of the document).
Step 4: Close a Google document.

To close a Google document, move your cursor to the document name at the top of the screen and a left
arrow will appear to the left of the name. Click that arrow to return to your Google Drive home page. The
document is automatically saved.
The new document will appear at the top of your documents list under My Drive.
Step 5: Additional Information

Google has developed apps for PCs and Smart phones. For more information about Google Drive, go to
http://drive.google.com. YouTube is also a viable source of Google Drive tutorials.
Part 3: Explore Conferencing and Web Meetings

Web meetings combine file and presentation sharing with voice, video, and desktop sharing. Cisco WebEx
Meeting Center is one of the leading web meeting products available today.
In Part 3 of this lab, you will watch a video produced by Cisco that reviews the features contained within
WebEx Meeting Center. The video is located on YouTube at the following link:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fyaWHEF_aWg
Page 7 of 17
Part 4: Create Wiki Pages

Wiki is a Hawaiian-language word that means fast. In networking terms, a wiki is a web-based collaboration
tool that permits almost anyone to immediately post information, files, or graphics to a common site for other
users to read and modify. A wiki provides access to a home page that has a search tool to assist you in
locating the articles that interest you. A wiki can be installed for the Internet community or behind a corporate
firewall for employee use. The user not only reads wiki contents, but also participates by creating content
within a web browser.
Although many different wiki servers are available, the following common features have been formalized into
every wiki:
Any web browser can be used to view or edit pages or create new content.
Edit and auto links are available to edit a page and automatically link pages. Text formatting is similar to
creating an email.
A search engine is used for quick content location.
Access control can be set by the topic creator, defining who is permitted to edit content.
A wiki is a grouping of web pages with different collaboration groups.
In this part of the lab, you will use the Google account that you created in Part 2 and create a wiki page in
Google Sites.
Step 1: Sign in to Google Sites.

Go to http://sites.google.com and sign in using the Google account that you created in Part 2 of this lab.
Page 8 of 17
Step 2: Click CREATE.
Step 3: Name your new wiki site.

In the Name your site field, type in a name for your new wiki site. You will need to come up with a unique
name for your site that has not been used by any other Google user. Google also requires that you enter the
code (displayed at the bottom of the screen) to prevent automated scripts, called web robots, from creating
multiple sites. After you have entered your site name, click the CREATE button. If someone has used your
site name already, you are prompted to enter another name.
Page 9 of 17
Page 10 of 17
Step 4: Edit the look of your new wiki site.

a. Google has provided templates for you to change the look of your new wiki site. Click the More dropdown menu, and then click Manage site.
Page 11 of 17

b. Click Themes at the bottom of the left sidebar.
c.
Select a theme that appeals to you and click SAVE.
Page 12 of 17

d. After you have saved your theme selection, click your site name under Manage Site.
Step 5: Update the Home page.

a. The Home page is the first page that everyone sees when they come to your wiki site. You can edit the
content of this page by clicking the edit button. From here, you can add text, pictures, or anything else to
show on this page.
b. Click Save after you make your changes. This takes you out of page edit mode.
Page 13 of 17
Step 6: Create a wiki page.

a. To create a new page that you and your visitors can use to make posts, click the new page icon.
b. In the Name your page field, enter a page name. In the example below, the name Routers is used as the
topic for this page.
c.
Click the Web Page drop-down menu and select Announcements. Google uses this term to indicate a
wiki page.
Page 14 of 17

d. Click CREATE to create your new wiki page.
e. Your new wiki page, called Routers, displays and has a New post menu option that allows information to
be added to the page. (Notice that the left sidebar has a new link to allow your site visitors access to this
page.)
Step 7: Share your web site.

A wiki site is not really a wiki site unless other people can contribute. There are a number of ways to share
your new site. In this example, we will show you how to share your site to designated people who have Gmail
accounts.
a. On your wiki site, click Share.
Page 15 of 17

b. Add a name, email address, or group who you grant access to this site.
c.
As soon as you start entering information into the Add people box, the box provides more options. The
Can edit drop-down menu allows you to choose the document privileges (Can edit, Can comment, Can
view) for the people you add. You can also specify how to notify these people of this document (Send a
copy to myself or Paste the item itself into the email). Click Share & save.
d. Click Share & save to save your sharing settings.
Page 16 of 17

e. The Manage Site page displays the people who have access to your site. Click your site name to return
to your home page.
Step 8: Provide the URL of your site.

You can provide your URL to your new site by adding your site name to the end of the Google site URL, as
shown here: http://sites.google.com/site/(sitename).
Step 9: Find additional information.

You can find a quick overview of how a wiki works at http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-dnL00TdmLY.
Other examples of wikis and their web sites include:
Wikipedia http://www.wikipedia.org/
Atlassian Confluence (a popular business wiki) http://www.atlassian.com/software/confluence/
Wikispaces (another free wiki) http://www.wikispaces.com/
Reflection
1. Can you think of other collaboration tools used in the business world today?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. What collaboration tools do you see as useful to a network administrator?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 17 of 17
Lab - Researching Converged Network Services

Objectives
Part 1: Survey Your Understanding of Convergence
Part 2: Research ISPs Offering Converged Services
Part 3: Research Local ISPs Offering Converged Services
Part 4: Select Best Local ISP Converged Service
Part 5: Research Local Company or Public Institution Using Convergence Technologies
Convergence in the context of networking is a term used to describe the process of combining voice, video,
and data communications over a common network infrastructure. Converged networks have existed for some
time, but were only feasible in large enterprise organizations because of the network infrastructure
requirements and complex management required to make them work seamlessly. Technology advances have
made convergence readily available to large, medium, and small businesses, as well as for the home
consumer.
In Part 1, you will describe your current understanding of convergence and any experience you have with it.
In Part 2, you will research which providers have this service, regardless of geographical location, using the
predefined form included in the lab.
In Part 3, you will research which local ISPs in your area offer converged services for end-user consumers,
using the predefined form included in the lab.
In Part 4, you will select the ISP you like best for home use and list the reasons why.
In Part 5, you will find a local company or public institution using convergence technologies in their business,
using the predefined form included in the lab.
Required Resources
Part 1: Survey Your Understanding on Convergence

Step 1: Describe convergence as you understand it and give examples of its use in the home.
Write a definition of convergence and list some examples.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 3
Part 2: Research ISPs Offering Converged Services

In Part 2, you research and find two or three ISPs who offer converged services for the home, regardless of
geographical location.
Step 1: Research various ISPs that offer converged services.

List some of the ISPs that you found in your search.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Fill in the following form for the ISPs selected.

Internet Service Provider
Product Name of Converged Service
Part 3: Researching Local ISPs Offering Converged Services

In Part 3, you research and find two or three local ISPs who offer converged services for the home in your
geographic area.
Step 1: Research various ISPs that offer converged services.

List some of the ISPs that you found in your search.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Fill in the following form for the ISPs selected.

Internet Service
Provider
Product Name of
Converged Service
Cost per Month
Download Speed
Part 4: Select Best Local ISP Converged Service Offering

Select your top choice from the list of local ISPs that you selected and give reasons why you chose that
particular one.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 3
Part 5: Research Local Company or Public Institution Using Convergence

Technologies
In Part 5, you research and locate a company in your area that currently uses convergence technologies in
their business.
Step 1: Research and find a local company using convergence.

In the following table, list the company, industry, and convergence technologies used.
Name of Company
Industry
Convergence Technologies
Reflection
1. What are some of the advantages of using convergence technologies?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. What are some of the disadvantages of using convergence technologies?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 3
Lab - Mapping the Internet

Objectives
Part 1: Test Network Connectivity Using Ping
Part 2: Trace a Route to a Remote Server Using Windows Tracert
Part 3: Trace a Route to a Remote Server Using Web-Based and Software Tools
Part 4: Compare Traceroute Results
Background
Route tracing computer software is a utility that lists the networks data has to traverse from the user's
originating end device to a distant destination network.
This network tool is typically executed at the command line as:
tracert <destination network name or end device address>
(Microsoft Windows systems)
or
traceroute <destination network name or end device address>
(Unix and similar systems)
Route tracing utilities allow a user to determine the path or routes as well as the delay across an IP network.
Several tools exist to perform this function.
The traceroute (or tracert) tool is often used for network troubleshooting. By showing a list of routers
traversed, it allows the user to identify the path taken to reach a particular destination on the network or
across internetworks. Each router represents a point where one network connects to another network and
through which the data packet was forwarded. The number of routers is known as the number of "hops" the
data traveled from source to destination.
The displayed list can help identify data flow problems when trying to access a service such as a website. It
can also be useful when performing tasks such as downloading data. If there are multiple websites (mirrors)
available for the same data file, one can trace each mirror to get a good idea of which mirror would be the
fastest to use.
Two trace routes between the same source and destination conducted some time apart may produce different
results. This is due to the "meshed" nature of the interconnected networks that comprise the Internet and the
Internet Protocols ability to select different pathways over which to send packets.
Command-line-based route tracing tools are usually embedded with the operating system of the end device.
Other tools, such as VisualRoute, are proprietary programs that provide extra information. VisualRoute
uses available online information to graphically display the route.
This lab assumes the installation of VisualRoute. If the computer you are using does not have VisualRoute
installed, you can download the program using the following link:
http://www.visualroute.com/download.html
If you have any trouble downloading or installing VisualRoute, ask your instructor for assistance. Ensure that
you download the Lite Edition.
Page 1 of 11
Scenario
Using an Internet connection, you will use three route tracing utilities to examine the Internet pathway to
destination networks. This activity should be performed on a computer that has Internet access and access to
the command line. First, you will use the Windows embedded tracert utility. Second, you will use a web-based
traceroute tool (http://www.subnetonline.com/pages/network-tools/online-traceroute.php). Finally, you will use
the VisualRoute traceroute program.
Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with Internet access)
Part 1: Test Network Connectivity Using Ping

Step 1: Determine whether the remote server is reachable.
To trace the route to a distant network, the PC used must have a working connection to the Internet.
a. The first tool we will use is ping. Ping is a tool used to test whether a host is reachable. Packets of
information are sent to the remote host with instructions to reply. Your local PC measures whether a
response is received to each packet, and how long it takes for those packets to cross the network. The
name ping comes from active sonar technology in which a pulse of sound is sent underwater and
bounced off of terrain or other ships.
b. From your PC, click the Windows Start icon, type cmd in the Search programs and files box, and then
press Enter.
c.
At the command-line prompt, type ping www.cisco.com.
Page 2 of 11

d. The first output line displays the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) e144.dscb.akamaiedge.net. This
is followed by the IP address 23.1.48.170. Cisco hosts the same web content on different servers
throughout the world (known as mirrors). Therefore, depending upon where you are geographically, the
FQDN and the IP address will be different.
e. From this portion of the output:
Four pings were sent and a reply was received from each ping. Because each ping was responded to,
there was 0% packet loss. On average, it took 54 ms (54 milliseconds) for the packets to cross the
network. A millisecond is 1/1,000th of a second.
Streaming video and online games are two applications that suffer when there is packet loss, or a slow
network connection. A more accurate determination of an Internet connection speed can be determined
by sending 100 pings, instead of the default 4. Here is how to do that:
And here is what the output from that looks like:
f.
Now ping Regional Internet Registry (RIR) websites located in different parts of the world:
For Africa:
C:\> ping www.afrinic.net
For Australia:
C:\> ping www.apnic.net
Page 3 of 11
For Europe:
C:\> ping www.ripe.net
For South America:

C:\> ping lacnic.net
All these pings were run from a computer located in the U.S. What happens to the average ping time in
milliseconds when data is traveling within the same continent (North America) as compared to data from
North America traveling to different continents?
____________________________________________________________________________________
What is interesting about the pings that were sent to the European website?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 11
Part 2: Trace a Route to a Remote Server Using Tracert

Step 1: Determine what route across the Internet traffic takes to the remote server.
Now that basic reachability has been verified by using the ping tool, it is helpful to look more closely at each
network segment that is crossed. To do this, the tracert tool will be used.
a. At the command-line prompt, type tracert www.cisco.com.
b. Save the tracert output in a text file as follows:

1) Right-click the title bar of the Command Prompt window and choose Edit > Select All.
2) Right-click the title bar of the Command Prompt window again and choose Edit > Copy.
3) Open the Windows Notepad program: Windows Start icon > All Programs > Accessories >
Notepad.
4) To paste the output into Notepad, choose Edit > Paste.
5) Choose File > Save As and save the Notepad file to your desktop as tracert1.txt.
c.
Run tracert for each destination website and save the output in sequentially numbered files.
C:\> tracert www.afrinic.net
C:\> tracert www.lacnic.net
d. Interpreting tracert outputs.

Routes traced can go through many hops and a number of different Internet Service Providers (ISPs),
depending on the size of your ISP and the location of the source and destination hosts. Each hop
represents a router. A router is a specialized type of computer used to direct traffic across the Internet.
Imagine taking an automobile trip across several countries using many highways. At different points in the
trip you come to a fork in the road in which you have the option to select from several different highways.
Now further imagine that there is a device at each fork in the road that directs you to take the correct
highway to your final destination. That is what a router does for packets on a network.
Page 5 of 11

Because computers talk in numbers, rather than words, routers are uniquely identified using IP addresses
(numbers with the format x.x.x.x). The tracert tool shows you what path through the network a packet of
information takes to reach its final destination. The tracert tool also gives you an idea of how fast traffic is
going on each segment of the network. Three packets are sent to each router in the path, and the return
time is measured in milliseconds. Now use this information to analyze the tracert results to
www.cisco.com. Below is the entire traceroute:
Below is the breakdown:
In the example output shown above, the tracert packets travel from the source PC to the local router
default gateway (hop 1: 192.168.1.1) to the ISPs Point of Presence (POP) router (hop 2: 10.18.20.1).
Every ISP has numerous POP routers. These POP routers are at the edge of the ISPs network and are
the means by which customers connect to the Internet. The packets travel along the Verizon network for
two hops and then jump to a router that belongs to alter.net. This could mean that the packets have
traveled to another ISP. This is significant because sometimes there is packet loss in the transition
between ISPs, or sometimes one ISP is slower than another. How could we determine if alter.net is
another ISP or the same ISP?
Page 6 of 11

e. There is an Internet tool known as whois. The whois tool allows us to determine who owns a domain
name. A web-based whois tool is found at http://whois.domaintools.com/. This domain is also owned by
Verizon according to the web-based whois tool.
To summarize, Internet traffic starts at a home PC and travels through the home router (hop 1). It then
connects to the ISP and travels through its network (hops 2-7) until it arrives at the remote server (hop 8).
This is a relatively unusual example in which there is only one ISP involved from start to finish. It is typical
to have two or more ISP involved as displayed in the following examples.
Page 7 of 11

f. Now examine an example that involves Internet traffic crossing multiple ISPs. Below is the tracert for
www.afrinic.net:
What happens at hop 7? Is level3.net the same ISP as hops 2-6, or a different ISP? Use the whois tool to
answer this question.
____________________________________________________________________________________
What happens in hop 10 to the amount of time it takes for a packet to travel between Washington D.C.
and Paris, as compared with the earlier hops 1-9?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
What happens in hop 18? Do a whois lookup on 168.209.201.74 using the whois tool. Who owns this
network?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 8 of 11

g. Type tracert www.lacnic.net.
What happens in hop 7?

____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Part 3: Trace a Route to a Remote Server Using Web-Based and

SoftwareTools
Step 1: Use a web-based traceroute tool.
a. Using http://www.subnetonline.com/pages/network-tools/online-tracepath.php to trace the route to the
following websites:
www.cisco.com
www.afrinic.net
Capture and save the output in Notepad.
How is the traceroute different when going to www.cisco.com from the command prompt (see Part 1)
rather than from the online website? (Your results may vary depending upon where you are located
geographically, and which ISP is providing connectivity to your school.)
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 9 of 11

Compare the tracert from Part 1 that goes to Africa with the tracert that goes to Africa from the web
interface. What difference do you notice?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Some of the traceroutes have the abbreviation asymm in them. Any guesses as to what this means?
What is its significance?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Use VisualRoute Lite Edition

VisualRoute is a proprietary traceroute program that can display the tracing path results graphically.
a. Please download the VisualRoute Lite Edition from the following link if it is not already installed:
http://www.visualroute.com/download.html
If you have any trouble downloading or installing VisualRoute, ask your instructor for assistance. Ensure
that you download the Lite Edition.
b. Using VisualRoute 2010 Lite Edition, trace the routes to www.cisco.com.
c.
Record the IP addresses in the path in Notepad.
Page 10 of 11
Part 4: Compare Traceroute Results

Compare the traceroute results to www.cisco.com from Parts 2 and 3.
Step 1: List the path to www.cisco.com using tracert.

____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: List the path to www.cisco.com using the web-based tool on subnetonline.com.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 3: List the path to www.cisco.com using VisualRoute Lite edition.

____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Did all the traceroute utilities use the same paths to www.cisco.com? Why or Why not?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Reflection
Having now viewed traceroute through three different tools (tracert, web interface, and VisualRoute), are
there any insights that using VisualRoute provided that the other two tools did not?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 11 of 11
Lab - Researching IT and Networking Job Opportunities

Objectives
Part 1: Research Job Opportunities
Identify the current networking jobs that are in demand.
Explain the value of Cisco certifications in the job market.
Part 2: Reflect on Research
Identify current hiring trends in IT/networking.
Identify future networking career certifications and skills.
Identify additional networking career paths.
Jobs in Information Technology (IT) and computer networking continue to grow. Most employers require some
form of industry standard certification, degree, or other qualifications from their potential employees,
especially those with limited experience. The Cisco CCNA certification is a known and established entry level
networking certification that is respected in the industry. There are additional levels and kinds of Cisco
certifications that one can attain, and each certification may enhance employment opportunities as well as
salary range.
In this lab, you will do some targeted job searching on the web, to find what types of IT and computer
networking jobs are available; what kinds of skills and certifications you will need; and the salary ranges
associated with the various job titles.
Required Resources
Part 1: Research Job Opportunities

In Part 1, you will use a web browser to visit the popular job listing web sites monster.com and salary.com.
Step 1: Open a web browser and go to a job listing website.

In the URL address bar type in http://monster.com and press Enter.
Note: For job listings outside of the US, use the following link to search for your country:
http://www.monster.com/geo/siteselection/
Page 1 of 6
Step 2: Search for networking related jobs.

a. Type the word Network in the Job title box. Notice that the website offers context sensitive suggestions
based on the keywords provided. Either click on, or finish typing the words, Network Administrator and
click the SEARCH button (see image below).
b. Notice the search results:
Page 2 of 6
c.
Now focus your search by adding terms to the keywords field box. Try terms like Cisco CCNA, CCNP,
CCNA Security, CCNA Voice, etc.
d. Now try refining your search by adding in different geographical locations. Did you find jobs in the
locations you entered?
____________________________________________________________________________________
e. Try searching a different website. Go to http://salary.com and click the Job Search menu bar button.
Note: For salary listings outside of the US, use the following link to search for your country:
http://www.payscale.com/rccountries.aspx
Page 3 of 6
f.
Now add a search term like Information Technology to the job title field box and click Submit.
Page 4 of 6

g. In the image below, note the large number of matching search results. There are also easy to use tools
for refining your search, in the column to the left.
h. Spend some time searching for jobs and looking through the search results. Take note of what skills are
required for different job titles and the range of starting salaries.
Part 2: Reflect on Research

In Part 2, you answer questions based on your research findings.
a. What job titles did you search for?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. What skills or certifications were required?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
Did you find any jobs that you previously did not know existed? If so, what were they?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 6

d. Did you find any jobs that you are interested in? If so, which ones and what skills or certifications do they
require?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 6
Draw Your Concept of the Internet Now

Objectives
Identify the common components of a network.
In this activity, you will illustrate how concepts from Chapter 1 are applied to show how network devices
connect to and throughout the Internet. After reflecting on your home or small-business topology, you will
become familiar with using the device icons and knowledge needed to visualize network connectivity through
the remaining network courses.
In this activity, you will use the knowledge you have acquired throughout Chapter 1, and the modeling activity
document that you prepared at the beginning of this chapter. You may also refer to the other activities
completed in this chapter, including Packet Tracer activities.
Draw a map of the Internet as you see it now. Use the icons presented in the chapter for media, end devices,
and intermediary devices.
In your revised drawing, you may want to include some of the following:
WANs
LANs
Cloud computing
Internet Service Providers (tiers)
Save your drawing in hard-copy format. If it is an electronic document, save it to a server location provided by
your instructor. Be prepared to share and explain your revised work in class.
Required Resources
Beginning of chapter modeling activity drawing
Packet Tracer (may be optional if students sketch their own drawing)
Paper and pencils or pens
Reflection
1. After completing Chapter 1, are you more aware of the devices, cabling, and physical components of a smallto-medium size network? Explain your answer.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Modeling Activity Graphic Representation
Page 1 of 1
It Is Just an Operating System!

Objectives
Describe the command structure of Cisco IOS software
In this activity, you will recognize that text commands used in command line interfaces are intentionally
chosen from spoken language. Text commands are often abbreviated, or otherwise simplified in their syntax,
to keep the resulting command set concise. They may be grouped into context modes that simplify their
usage. Configuring a device using written commands is similar to giving out short orders verbally. The
commands are executed by the operating system and the actual process is performed by the device.
Background/Scenario
Imagine that you are employed as an engineer for a car manufacturing company. The company is currently
working on a new car model. This model will have selected functions that can be controlled by the driver
giving specific voice commands.
You must design the set of commands used by this voice-activated control system.
The functions of the car that can be controlled by voice commands are:
Lights
Wipers
Radio
Telephone set
Air conditioning
Ignition
Your task is to devise a simple set of spoken commands that will be used to control these systems and
identify how they are going to be executed.
Required Resources
Paper and pencils or pens, or computer
Reflection
1. How can devising a set of voice commands assist in operating a vehicle? How could these same commands
be used on a computer or network operating system?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 1
Lab - Establishing a Console Session with Tera Term

Topology
Objectives
Part 1: Access a Cisco Switch through the Serial Console Port
Connect to a Cisco switch using a serial console cable.
Establish a console session using a terminal emulator, such as Tera Term.
Part 2: Display and Configure Basic Device Settings
Use show commands to display device settings.
Configure the clock on the switch.
Part 3: (Optional) Access a Cisco Router Using a Mini-USB Console Cable

Note: Users on Netlab or other remote access equipment should complete only Part 2.
Various models of Cisco routers and switches are used in networks of all types. These devices are managed
using a local console connection or a remote connection. Nearly all Cisco devices have a serial console port
to which you can connect. Some newer models, such as the 1941 Integrated Services Router (ISR) G2 used
in this lab, also have a USB console port.
In this lab, you will learn how to access a Cisco device via a direct local connection to the console port, using
a terminal emulation program, Tera Term. You will also learn how to configure the serial port settings for the
Tera Term console connection. After you have established a console connection with the Cisco device, you
can display or configure device settings. You will only display settings and configure the clock with this lab.
Note: The routers used with CCNA hands-on labs are Cisco 1941 ISRs with Cisco IOS Release 15.2(4)M3
(universalk9 image). The switches used are Cisco Catalyst 2960s with Cisco IOS Release 15.0(2) (lanbasek9
image). Other routers, switches, and Cisco IOS versions can be used. Depending on the model and Cisco
IOS version, the commands available and output produced might vary from what is shown in the labs. Refer
to the Router Interface Summary Table at the end of the lab for the correct interface identifiers.
Note: Make sure that the switch and router have been erased and have no startup configuration. If you are
unsure, contact your instructor.
Required Resources
1 Router (Cisco 1941 with Cisco IOS software, release 15.2(4)M3 universal image or comparable)
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with terminal emulation program, such as Tera Term)
Rollover (DB-9 to RJ-45) console cable to configure the switch or router via the RJ-45 console port
Mini-USB cable to configure the router via the USB console port
Page 1 of 11
Part 1: Access a Cisco Switch through the Serial Console Port

You will connect a PC to a Cisco switch using a rollover console cable. This connection will allow you to
access the command line interface (CLI) and display settings or configure the switch.
Step 1: Connect a Cisco switch and computer using a rollover console cable.
a. Connect the rollover console cable to the RJ-45 console port of the switch.
b. Connect the other cable end to the serial COM port on the computer.
Note: Serial COM ports are no longer available on most computers today. A USB-to-DB9 adapter can be
used with the rollover console cable for console connection between the computer and a Cisco device.
These USB-to-DB9 adapters can be purchased at any computer electronics store.
Note: If using a USB-to-DB9 adapter to connect to the COM port, you may be required to install a driver
for the adapter provided by the manufacturer on your computer. To determine the COM port used by the
adapter, please see Part 3 Step 4. The correct COM port number is required to connect to the Cisco IOS
device using a terminal emulator in Step 2.
c.
Power up the Cisco switch and computer if these devices are not already on.
Step 2: Configure Tera Term to establish a console session with the switch.
Tera Term is a terminal emulation program. This program allows you to access the terminal output of the
switch. It also allows you to configure the switch.
a. Start Tera Term by clicking the Windows Start button located in the task bar. Locate Tera Term under
All Programs.
Note: If the program is not installed on the system, Tera Term can be downloaded from the following link
by selecting Tera Term:
http://logmett.com/index.php?/download/free-downloads.html
Page 2 of 11

b. In the New Connection dialog box, click the Serial radio button. Verify that the correct COM port is
selected and click OK to continue.
c.
From the Tera Term Setup menu, choose the Serial port to verify the serial settings. The default
parameters for the console port are 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, and no flow control. The
Tera Term default settings match the console port settings for communications with the Cisco IOS switch.
Page 3 of 11

d. When you can see the terminal output, you are ready to configure a Cisco switch. The following console
example displays the terminal output of the switch while it is loading.
Part 2: Display and Configure Basic Device Settings

In this section, you are introduced to the user and privileged executive modes. You will determine the
Internetwork Operating System (IOS) version, display the clock settings, and configure the clock on the
switch.
Step 1: Display the switch IOS image version.

a. After the switch has completed its startup process, the following message displays. Enter n to continue.
Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes/no]: n
Note: If you do not see the above message, please contact your instructor to reset your switch to the
initial configuration.
b. While you are in the user EXEC mode, display the IOS version for your switch.
Switch> show version
Cisco IOS Software, C2960 Software (C2960-LANBASEK9-M), Version 15.0(2)SE, RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc1)
Technical Support: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport
Copyright (c) 1986-2012 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Sat 28-Jul-12 00:29 by prod_rel_team
ROM: Bootstrap program is C2960 boot loader
BOOTLDR: C2960 Boot Loader (C2960-HBOOT-M) Version 12.2(53r)SEY3, RELEASE SOFTWARE
(fc1)
Switch uptime is 2 minutes
System returned to ROM by power-on
System image file is "flash://c2960-lanbasek9-mz.150-2.SE.bin"
<output omitted>
Which IOS image version is currently in use by your switch?

____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 11
Step 2: Configure the clock.

As you learn more about networking, you will see that configuring the correct time on a Cisco switch can be
helpful when you are troubleshooting problems. The following steps manually configure the internal clock of
the switch.
a. Display the current clock settings.
Switch> show clock
*00:30:05.261 UTC Mon Mar 1 1993
b. The clock setting is changed in the privileged EXEC mode. Enter the privileged EXEC mode by typing
enable at the user EXEC mode prompt.
Switch> enable
c.
Configure the clock setting. The question mark (?) provides help and allows you to determine the
expected input for configuring the current time, date, and year. Press Enter to complete the clock
configuration.
Switch# clock set ?
hh:mm:ss
Current Time
Switch# clock set 15:08:00 ?

<1-31>
MONTH
Day of the month

Month of the year
Switch# clock set 15:08:00 Oct 26 ?

<1993-2035>
Year
Switch# clock set 15:08:00 Oct 26 2012

Switch#
*Oct 26 15:08:00.000: %SYS-6-CLOCKUPDATE: System clock has been updated from 00:31:43
UTC Mon Mar 1 1993 to 15:08:00 UTC Fri Oct 26 2012, configured from console by
console.
d. Enter the show clock command to verify that the clock setting was updated.
Switch# show clock
15:08:07.205 UTC Fri Oct 26 2012
Part 3: (Optional) Access a Cisco Router Using a Mini-USB Console Cable

If you are using a Cisco 1941 router or other Cisco IOS devices with a mini-USB console port, you can access
the device console port using a mini-USB cable connected to the USB port on your computer.
Note: The mini-USB console cable is the same type of mini-USB cables that are used with other electronics
devices, such as USB hard drives, USB printers, or USB hubs. These mini-USB cables can be purchased
through Cisco Systems, Inc. or other third-party vendors. Please verify that you are using a mini-USB cable,
not a micro-USB cable, to connect to the mini-USB console port on a Cisco IOS device.
Page 5 of 11

Note: You must use either the USB port or the RJ-45 port, and not both simultaneously. When the USB port
is used, it takes priority over the RJ-45 console port used in Part 1.
Step 1: Set up the physical connection with a mini-USB cable.

a. Connect the mini-USB cable to the mini-USB console port of the router.
b. Connect the other cable end to a USB port on the computer.
c.
Power up the Cisco router and computer, if these devices are not already on.
Step 2: Verify that the USB console is ready.

If you are using a Microsoft Windows-based PC and the USB console port LED indicator (labeled EN) does
not turn green, please install the Cisco USB console driver.
For a Microsoft Windows-based PC connecting to a Cisco IOS device with a USB cable, a USB driver must
be installed prior to use. The driver can be found on www.cisco.com with the related Cisco IOS device. The
USB driver can be downloaded from the following link:
http://www.cisco.com/cisco/software/release.html?mdfid=282774238&flowid=714&softwareid=282855122&rel
ease=3.1&relind=AVAILABLE&rellifecycle=&reltype=latest
Note: You must have a valid Cisco Connection Online (CCO) account to download this file.
Note: This link is related to the Cisco 1941 router; however, the USB console driver is not Cisco IOS devicemodel specific. This USB console driver only works with Cisco routers and switches. The computer requires a
reboot after finishing the installation of the USB driver.
Page 6 of 11

Note: After the files are extracted, the folder contains instructions for installation and removal and necessary
drivers for different operating systems and architectures. Please choose the appropriate version for your
system.
When the LED indicator for the USB console port has turned green, the USB console port is ready for access.
Step 3: (Optional) Enable the COM port for the Windows 7 PC.
If you are using a Microsoft Windows 7 PC, you may need to perform the following steps to enable the COM
port:
a. Click the Windows Start icon to access the Control Panel.
b. Open the Device Manager.
c.
Click the Ports (COM & LPT) tree link to expand it. The Cisco Virtual Comm Port00 icon displays with a
yellow exclamation point attached.
Page 7 of 11

d. To resolve the issue, right-click the Cisco Virtual Comm Port00 icon and choose Update Driver
Software.
e. Choose Browse my computer for driver software.
f.
Choose Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer and click Next.
Page 8 of 11

g. Choose the Cisco Serial driver and click Next.
h. The device driver is installed successfully. Take note of the port number assigned at the top of the
window. In this sample, COM 6 is used for communication with the router. Click Close.
Page 9 of 11
Step 4: (Optional) Determine the COM port number.

a. If you need to determine the COM port number, open the Control Panel and select the Device Manager.
Search for the Ports (COM & LPT) heading, expand it, and determine the COM port number currently in
use. In this example, Cisco Serial (COM 6) was selected for connection to the router because a Cisco
USB console driver is in use. If you use a rollover console cable, or an adapter from a different
manufacturer, the naming convention reflects this information.
b. Open Tera Term. Click the Serial radio button and choose Port COM6: Cisco Serial (COM 6). This port
should now be available for communication with the router. Click OK.
Page 10 of 11
Reflection
1. How do you prevent unauthorized personnel from accessing your Cisco device through the console port?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
2. What are the advantages and disadvantages of using the serial console connection as compared to the USB
console connection to a Cisco router or switch?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Router Interface Summary Table

Router Interface Summary
Router Model
Ethernet Interface #1
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900
Gigabit Ethernet 0/0

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Note: To find out how the router is configured, look at the interfaces to identify the type of router and how many
interfaces the router has. There is no way to effectively list all the combinations of configurations for each router
class. This table includes identifiers for the possible combinations of Ethernet and Serial interfaces in the device.
The table does not include any other type of interface, even though a specific router may contain one. An
example of this might be an ISDN BRI interface. The string in parenthesis is the legal abbreviation that can be
used in Cisco IOS commands to represent the interface.
Page 11 of 11
Lab - Building a Simple Network

Topology
Addressing Table
Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
S1
VLAN 1
N/A
N/A
N/A
S2
VLAN 1
N/A
N/A
N/A
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.10
255.255.255.0
N/A
PC-B
NIC
192.168.1.11
255.255.255.0
N/A
Objectives
Part 1: Set Up the Network Topology (Ethernet only)
Identify cables and ports for use in the network.
Cable a physical lab topology.
Part 2: Configure PC Hosts
Enter static IP address information on the LAN interface of the hosts.
Verify that PCs can communicate using the ping utility.
Part 3: Configure and Verify Basic Switch Settings
Configure each switch with hostname, local passwords, and login banner.
Save the running configurations.
Display the running switch configuration.
Display the IOS version for the running switch.
Display the status of the interfaces.
Networks are constructed of three major components: hosts, switches, and routers. In this lab, you will build a
simple network with two hosts and two switches. You will also configure basic settings including hostname,
Page 1 of 14

local passwords, and login banner. Use show commands to display the running configuration, IOS version,
and interface status. Use the copy command to save device configurations.
You will apply IP addressing for this lab to the PCs to enable communication between these two devices. Use
the ping utility to verify connectivity.
Note: The switches used are Cisco Catalyst 2960s with Cisco IOS Release 15.0(2) (lanbasek9 image). Other
switches and Cisco IOS versions can be used. Depending on the model and Cisco IOS version, the
commands available and output produced might vary from what is shown in the labs.
Note: Make sure that the switches have been erased and have no startup configurations. Refer to Appendix A
for the procedure to initialize and reload a switch.
Required Resources
2 Switches (Cisco 2960 with Cisco IOS Release 15.0(2) lanbasek9 image or comparable)
Ethernet cables as shown in the topology
Part 1: Set Up the Network Topology (Ethernet only)

In Part 1, you will cable the devices together according to the network topology.
Step 1: Power on the devices.

Power on all devices in the topology. The switches do not have a power switch; they will power on as soon as
you plug in the power cord.
Step 2: Connect the two switches.

Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to F0/1 on S1 and the other end of the cable to F0/1 on S2. You should
see the lights for F0/1 on both switches turn amber and then green. This indicates that the switches have
been connected correctly.
Step 3: Connect the PCs to their respective switches.

a. Connect one end of the second Ethernet cable to the NIC port on PC-A. Connect the other end of the
cable to F0/6 on S1. After connecting the PC to the switch, you should see the light for F0/6 turn amber
and then green, indicating that PC-A has been connected correctly.
b. Connect one end of the last Ethernet cable to the NIC port on PC-B. Connect the other end of the cable
to F0/18 on S2. After connecting the PC to the switch, you should see the light for F0/18 turn amber and
then green, indicating that the PC-B has been connected correctly.
Step 4: Visually inspect network connections.

After cabling the network devices, take a moment to carefully verify the connections to minimize the time
required to troubleshoot network connectivity issues later.
Page 2 of 14
Part 2: Configure PC Hosts

Step 1: Configure static IP address information on the PCs.
a. Click the Windows Start icon and then select Control Panel.
b. In the Network and Internet section, click the View network status and tasks link.
Note: If the Control Panel displays a list of icons, click the drop-down option next to the View by: and
change this option to display by Category.
Page 3 of 14

c.
In the left pane of the Network and Sharing Center window, click the Change adapter settings link.
d. The Network Connections window displays the available interfaces on the PC. Right-click the Local Area
Connection interface and select Properties.
Page 4 of 14

e. Select the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) option and then click Properties.
Note: You can also double-click Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) to display the Properties
window.
Page 5 of 14

f.
Click the Use the following IP address radio button to manually enter an IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway.
Note: In the above example, the IP address and subnet mask have been entered for PC-A. The default
gateway has not been entered, because there is no router attached to the network. Refer to the
Addressing Table on page 1 for PC-Bs IP address information.
g. After all the IP information has been entered, click OK. Click OK on the Local Area Connection Properties
window to assign the IP address to the LAN adapter.
h. Repeat the previous steps to enter the IP address information for PC-B.
Step 2: Verify PC settings and connectivity.

Use the command prompt (cmd.exe) window to verify the PC settings and connectivity.
a. From PC-A, click the Windows Start icon, type cmd in the Search programs and files box, and then
press Enter.
Page 6 of 14

b. The cmd.exe window is where you can enter commands directly to the PC and view the results of those
commands. Verify your PC settings by using the ipconfig /all command. This command displays the PC
hostname and the IPv4 address information.
c.
Type ping 192.168.1.11 and press Enter.
Were the ping results successful? ______________________

If not, troubleshoot as necessary.
Note: If you did not get a reply from PC-B, try to ping PC-B again. If you still do not get a reply from PC-B,
try to ping PC-A from PC-B. If you are unable to get a reply from the remote PC, then have your instructor
help you troubleshoot the problem.
Page 7 of 14
Part 3: Configure and Verify Basic Switch Settings

Step 1: Console into the switch.
Using Tera Term, establish a console connection to the switch from PC-A.
Step 2: Enter privileged EXEC mode.

You can access all switch commands in privileged EXEC mode. The privileged EXEC command set includes
those commands contained in user EXEC mode, as well as the configure command through which access to
the remaining command modes are gained. Enter privileged EXEC mode by entering the enable command.
Switch> enable
Switch#
The prompt changed from Switch> to Switch# which indicates privileged EXEC mode.
Step 3: Enter configuration mode.

Use the configuration terminal command to enter configuration mode.
Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)#
The prompt changed to reflect global configuration mode.
Step 4: Give the switch a name.

Use the hostname command to change the switch name to S1.
Switch(config)# hostname S1
S1(config)#
Step 5: Prevent unwanted DNS lookups.

To prevent the switch from attempting to translate incorrectly entered commands as though they were
hostnames, disable the Domain Name System (DNS) lookup.
S1(config)# no ip domain-lookup
S1(config)#
Step 6: Enter local passwords.

To prevent unauthorized access to the switch, passwords must be configured.
S1(config)# enable secret class
S1(config)# line con 0
S1(config-line)# password cisco
S1(config-line)# login
S1(config-line)# exit
S1(config)#
Step 7: Enter a login MOTD banner.

A login banner, known as the message of the day (MOTD) banner, should be configured to warn anyone
accessing the switch that unauthorized access will not be tolerated.
Page 8 of 14

The banner motd command requires the use of delimiters to identify the content of the banner message. The
delimiting character can be any character as long as it does not occur in the message. For this reason,
symbols, such as the #, are often used.
S1(config)# banner motd #
Enter TEXT message. End with the character '#'.
Unauthorized access is strictly prohibited and prosecuted to the full extent

of the law. #
S1(config)# exit
S1#
Step 8: Save the configuration.

Use the copy command to save the running configuration to the startup file on non-volatile random access
memory (NVRAM).
S1# copy running-config startup-config
Destination filename [startup-config]? [Enter]
Building configuration...
[OK]
S1#
Step 9: Display the current configuration.

The show running-config command displays the entire running configuration, one page at a time. Use the
spacebar to advance paging. The commands configured in Steps 1 8 are highlighted below.
S1# show running-config
Current configuration : 1409 bytes
!
! Last configuration change at 03:49:17 UTC Mon Mar 1 1993
!
version 15.0
no service pad
service timestamps debug datetime msec
service timestamps log datetime msec
no service password-encryption
!
hostname S1
!
boot-start-marker
boot-end-marker
!
enable secret 4 06YFDUHH61wAE/kLkDq9BGho1QM5EnRtoyr8cHAUg.2
!
no aaa new-model
system mtu routing 1500
!
!
no ip domain-lookup
Page 9 of 14

!
<output omitted>
!
banner motd ^C
Unauthorized access is strictly prohibited and prosecuted to the full extent of the
law. ^C
!
line con 0
password cisco
login
line vty 0 4
login
line vty 5 15
login
!
end
S1#
Step 10: Display the IOS version and other useful switch information.
Use the show version command to display the IOS version that the switch is running, along with other useful
information. Again, you will need to use the spacebar to advance through the displayed information.
S1# show version
Cisco IOS Software, C2960 Software (C2960-LANBASEK9-M), Version 15.0(2)SE, RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc1)
Compiled Sat 28-Jul-12 00:29 by prod_rel_team
ROM: Bootstrap program is C2960 boot loader
BOOTLDR: C2960 Boot Loader (C2960-HBOOT-M) Version 12.2(53r)SEY3, RELEASE SOFTWARE
(fc1)
S1 uptime is 1 hour, 38 minutes
System image file is "flash:/c2960-lanbasek9-mz.150-2.SE.bin"
This product contains cryptographic features and is subject to United

States and local country laws governing import, export, transfer and
use. Delivery of Cisco cryptographic products does not imply
third-party authority to import, export, distribute or use encryption.
Importers, exporters, distributors and users are responsible for
compliance with U.S. and local country laws. By using this product you
agree to comply with applicable laws and regulations. If you are unable
to comply with U.S. and local laws, return this product immediately.
Page 10 of 14

A summary of U.S. laws governing Cisco cryptographic products may be found at:
http://www.cisco.com/wwl/export/crypto/tool/stqrg.html
If you require further assistance please contact us by sending email to
[email protected].
cisco WS-C2960-24TT-L (PowerPC405) processor (revision R0) with 65536K bytes of
memory.
Processor board ID FCQ1628Y5LE
Last reset from power-on
1 Virtual Ethernet interface
24 FastEthernet interfaces
2 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces
The password-recovery mechanism is enabled.
64K bytes of flash-simulated non-volatile configuration memory.
Base ethernet MAC Address
: 0C:D9:96:E2:3D:00
Motherboard assembly number
: 73-12600-06
Power supply part number
: 341-0097-03
Motherboard serial number
: FCQ16270N5G
Power supply serial number
: DCA1616884D
Model revision number
: R0
Motherboard revision number
: A0
Model number
: WS-C2960-24TT-L
System serial number
: FCQ1628Y5LE
Top Assembly Part Number
: 800-32797-02
Top Assembly Revision Number
: A0
Version ID
: V11
CLEI Code Number
: COM3L00BRF
Hardware Board Revision Number : 0x0A
Switch Ports Model

------ ----- ----*
1 26
WS-C2960-24TT-L
SW Version
---------15.0(2)SE
SW Image
---------C2960-LANBASEK9-M
Configuration register is 0xF

S1#
Step 11: Display the status of the connected interfaces on the switch.
To check the status of the connected interfaces, use the show ip interface brief command. Press the
spacebar to advance to the end of the list.
S1# show ip interface brief
Interface
Vlan1
FastEthernet0/1
FastEthernet0/2
FastEthernet0/3
IP-Address
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
OK?
YES
YES
YES
YES
Method
unset
unset
unset
unset
Status
up
up
down
down
Protocol
up
up
down
down
Page 11 of 14

FastEthernet0/4
FastEthernet0/5
FastEthernet0/6
FastEthernet0/7
FastEthernet0/8
FastEthernet0/9
FastEthernet0/10
FastEthernet0/11
FastEthernet0/12
FastEthernet0/13
FastEthernet0/14
FastEthernet0/15
FastEthernet0/16
FastEthernet0/17
FastEthernet0/18
FastEthernet0/19
FastEthernet0/20
FastEthernet0/21
FastEthernet0/22
FastEthernet0/23
FastEthernet0/24
GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/2
S1#
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
down
down
up
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
up
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
Step 12: Repeat Steps 1 to 12 to configure switch S2.

The only difference for this step is to change the hostname to S2.
Step 13: Record the interface status for the following interfaces.
S1
Interface
Status
S2
Protocol
Status
Protocol
F0/1
F0/6
F0/18
VLAN 1
Why are some FastEthernet ports on the switches are up and others are down?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 12 of 14
Reflection
What could prevent a ping from being sent between the PCs?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Note: It may be necessary to disable the PC firewall to ping between PCs.
Appendix A: Initializing and Reloading a Switch

Switch> enable
Switch#
Switch# show flash
2
3
4
5
6
-rwx
-rwx
-rwx
-rwx
-rwx
1919
1632
13336
11607161
616
Mar
Mar
Mar
Mar
Mar
1
1
1
1
1
1993
1993
1993
1993
1993
00:06:33
00:06:33
00:06:33
02:37:06
00:07:13
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
private-config.text
config.text
multiple-fs
vlan.dat

Switch#

Switch#

the operation.)
[OK]
Page 13 of 14

Switch#

Switch# reload
and press Enter.

Switch>
Page 14 of 14
Lab - Configuring a Switch Management Address

Topology
Addressing Table
Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
S1
VLAN 1
192.168.1.2
255.255.255.0
N/A
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.10
255.255.255.0
N/A
Objectives
Part 1: Configure a Basic Network Device
Cable the network as shown in the topology.
Configure basic switch settings including hostname, management address, and Telnet access.
Configure an IP address on the PC.
Part 2: Verify and Test Network Connectivity
Display device configuration.
Test end-to-end connectivity with ping.
Test remote management capability with Telnet.
Save the switch running configuration file.
Cisco switches have a special interface, known as a switch virtual interface (SVI). The SVI can be configured
with an IP address, commonly referred to as the management address that is used for remote access to the
switch to display or configure settings.
In this lab, you will build a simple network using Ethernet LAN cabling and access a Cisco switch using the
console and remote access methods. You will configure basic switch settings and IP addressing, and
demonstrate the use of a management IP address for remote switch management. The topology consists of
one switch and one host using only Ethernet and console ports.
Note: The switches used are Cisco Catalyst 2960s with Cisco IOS Release 15.0(2) (lanbasek9 image). Other
switches and Cisco IOS versions can be used. Depending on the model and Cisco IOS version, the available
commands and output produced might vary from what is shown in the labs.
Note: Make sure that the switch has been erased and has no startup configuration. If you are unsure, contact
your instructor.
Required Resources
Page 1 of 8
Part 1: Configure a Basic Network Device

In Part 1, you will set up the network and configure basic settings, such as hostnames, interface IP
addresses, and passwords.
Step 1: Cable the network.

a. Cable the network as shown in the topology.
b. Establish a console connection to the switch from PC-A.
Step 2: Configure basic switch settings.

In this step, you will configure basic switch settings, such as hostname and configuring an IP address for the
SVI. Assigning an IP address on the switch is only the first step. As the network administrator, you must
specify how the switch will be managed. Telnet and Secure Shell (SSH) are two of the most common
management methods; however, Telnet is a very insecure protocol. All information flowing between the two
devices is sent in plain text. Passwords and other sensitive information can be easily looked at if captured by
a packet sniffer.
a. Assuming the switch had no configuration file stored in nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM),
you will be at the user EXEC mode prompt on the switch with a prompt of Switch>. Enter privileged
EXEC mode.
Switch> enable
Switch#
b. Verify a clean configuration file with the show running-config privileged EXEC command. If a
configuration file was previously saved, it will have to be removed. Depending on the switch model and
IOS version, your configuration may look slightly different. However, there should be no configured
passwords or IP address set. If your switch does not have a default configuration, ask your instructor for
help.
c.
Enter global configuration mode and assign the switch hostname.

Switch# configure terminal
S1(config)#
d. Configure the switch password access.

S1(config)#
e. Prevent unwanted Domain Name System (DNS) lookups.
S1(config)#
f.
Configure a login message-of-the-day (MOTD) banner.

S1(config)# banner motd #
Enter Text message. End with the character #.
Unauthorized access is strictly prohibited. #
Page 2 of 8

g. Verify your access setting by moving between modes.
S1(config)# exit
S1#
S1# exit
Unauthorized access is strictly prohibited.
S1>
What shortcut keys are used to go directly from global configuration mode to privileged EXEC mode?
____________________________________________________________________________________
h. Return to privileged EXEC mode from user EXEC mode.
S1> enable
Password: class
S1#
Note: Password will not show up on screen when entering.
i.
Enter global configuration mode to set the SVI IP address to allow remote switch management.
S1# config t
S1#(config)# interface vlan 1
S1(config-if)# ip address 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0
S1(config-if)# no shut
S1(config-if)# exit
S1(config)#
j.
Restrict console port access. The default configuration is to allow all console connections with no
password needed.
S1(config)# line
S1(config-line)#
S1(config-line)#
S1(config-line)#
S1(config)#
k.
con 0
password cisco
login
exit
Configure the virtual terminal (VTY) line for the switch to allow Telnet access. If you do not configure a
VTY password, you will not be able to Telnet to the switch.
S1(config)# line vty 0 4
S1(config-line)# end
S1#
*Mar 1 00:06:11.590: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
Page 3 of 8
Step 3: Configure an IP address on PC-A.

a. Assign the IP address and subnet mask to the PC, as shown in the Addressing Table on page 1. The
procedure for assigning an IP address on a PC running Windows 7 is described below:
1) Click the Windows Start icon > Control Panel.
2) Click View By: > Category.
3) Choose View network status and tasks > Change adapter settings.
4) Right-click Local Area Network Connection and select Properties.
5) Choose Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4), click Properties > OK.
6) Click the Use the following IP address radio button and enter the IP address and subnet mask.
Part 2: Verify and Test Network Connectivity

You will now verify and document the switch configuration, test end-to-end connectivity between PC-A and
S1, and test the remote management capability of the switch.
Step 1: Display the S1 device configuration.

a. Return to your console connection using Tera Term on PC-A to display and verify your switch
configuration by issuing the show run command. A sample configuration is shown below. The settings
you configured are highlighted in yellow. The other configuration settings are IOS defaults.
S1# show run
!
!
version 15.0
no service pad
!
hostname S1
!
boot-start-marker
boot-end-marker
!
!
no aaa new-model
system mtu routing 1500
!
!
no ip domain-lookup
!
spanning-tree mode pvst
Page 4 of 8

spanning-tree extend system-id
!
vlan internal allocation policy ascending
!
!
interface FastEthernet0/1
!
<output omitted>
!
interface GigabitEthernet0/1
!
!
interface Vlan1
ip address 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0
!
ip http server
ip http secure-server
!
banner motd ^C
Unauthorized access is strictly prohibited. ^C
!
line con 0
password cisco
login
line vty 0 4
password cisco
login
line vty 5 15
login
!
end
b. Verify the status of your SVI management interface. Your VLAN 1 interface should be up/up and have an
IP address assigned. Notice that switch port F0/6 is also up because PC-A is connected to it. Because all
switch ports are initially in VLAN 1, by default, you can communicate with the switch using the IP address
you configured for VLAN 1.
Interface
Vlan1
FastEthernet0/1
FastEthernet0/2
FastEthernet0/3
FastEthernet0/4
FastEthernet0/5
FastEthernet0/6
IP-Address
192.168.1.2
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
OK?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Method
manual
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
Status
up
down
down
down
down
down
up
Protocol
up
down
down
down
down
down
up
Page 5 of 8

FastEthernet0/7
FastEthernet0/8
FastEthernet0/9
FastEthernet0/10
FastEthernet0/11
FastEthernet0/12
FastEthernet0/13
FastEthernet0/14
FastEthernet0/15
FastEthernet0/16
FastEthernet0/17
FastEthernet0/18
FastEthernet0/19
FastEthernet0/20
FastEthernet0/21
FastEthernet0/22
FastEthernet0/23
FastEthernet0/24
GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/2
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
Step 2: Test end-to-end connectivity.

Open a command prompt window (cmd.exe) on PC-A by clicking the Windows Start icon and enter cmd into
the Search for programs and files field. Verify the IP address of PC-A by using the ipconfig /all command.
This command displays the PC hostname and the IPv4 address information. Ping PC-As own address and
the management address of S1.
a. Ping your own PC-A address first.
C:\Users\NetAcad> ping 192.168.1.10
Your output should be similar to the following screen:
Page 6 of 8

b. Ping the SVI management address of S1.
C:\Users\NetAcad> ping 192.168.1.2
Your output should be similar to the following screen. If ping results are not successful, troubleshoot the
basic device configurations. You should check both the physical cabling and IP addressing, if necessary.
Step 3: Test and verify remote management of S1.

You will now use Telnet to remotely access the switch S1 using the SVI management address. In this lab,
PC-A and S1 reside side by side. In a production network, the switch could be in a wiring closet on the top
floor while your management PC is located on the ground floor. Telnet is not a secure protocol. However, you
will use it in this lab to test remote access. All information sent by Telnet, including passwords and
commands, is sent across the session in plain text. In subsequent labs, you will use Secure Shell (SSH) to
remotely access network devices.
Note: Windows 7 does not natively support Telnet. The administrator must enable this protocol. To install the
Telnet client, open a command prompt window and type pkgmgr /iu:TelnetClient.
C:\Users\NetAcad> pkgmgr /iu:TelnetClient
a. With the command prompt window still open on PC-A, issue a Telnet command to connect to S1 via the
SVI management address. The password is cisco.
C:\Users\NetAcad> telnet 192.168.1.2
Your output should be similar to the following screen:
Page 7 of 8
b. After entering the cisco password, you will be at the user EXEC mode prompt. Type enable at the
prompt. Enter the class password to enter privileged EXEC mode and issue a show run command.
Step 4: Save the configuration file.

a. From your Telnet session, issue the copy run start command at the prompt.
S1# copy run start
Destination filename [startup-config]? [Enter]
Building configuration ..
S1#
b. Exit the Telnet session by typing quit. You will be returned to the Windows 7 command prompt.
Reflection
Why must you use a console connection to initially configure the switch? Why not connect to the switch via
Telnet or SSH?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 8 of 8
Tutor me!
Objectives
Configure initial settings on a network device using the Cisco IOS software.
In this activity, you will use and reinforce your knowledge of the Cisco Internetwork Operating System (IOS)
command-line interface (CLI) by explaining it to other students. You will look for different ways to explain the
meaning of individual commands. You will also find the optimal grouping of commands to be used when
configuring a device to minimize the necessary count of mode changes.
Background/Scenario
(Students will work in pairs. Packet Tracer is required to be used with this activity.)
Assume that a new colleague has asked you for an orientation to the Cisco IOS CLI. This colleague has
never worked with Cisco devices before.
You explain the basic CLI commands and structure, because you want your colleague to understand that the
CLI is a simple, yet powerful, command language that can be easily understood and navigated.
Use Packet Tracer and one of the activities available in this chapter as a simple network model (for example,
Lab Activity 2.3.3.5 LAB Configuring a Switch Management Address). Focus on these areas:
While the commands are technical, do they resemble any statements from plain English?
How is the set of commands organized into subgroups or modes? How does an administrator know
which mode he or she is currently using?
What are the individual commands to configure the basic settings of a Cisco device? How would you
explain this command in laymens terms? Use parallels to real life whenever appropriate.
Suggest how to group different commands together according to their modes so that a minimum number of
moves between modes will be needed.
Required Resources
Packet Tracer
Any simple network model activity available from Chapter 2
Reflection
1. After completing Chapter 2, do you feel as though you have a concrete understanding of what the Cisco IOS
does and how it operates? What were some of the difficulties you encountered when explaining the basic CLI
commands and structure to your colleague? If you were the new colleague, what would be some of the
difficulties that you would have learning the basic CLI commands and structure?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Answer the following questions, and discuss your answers with the entire class:
a) While the commands are technical, do they resemble any statements from plain English?
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 3
Tutor me!
b) How is the set of commands organized into subgroups or modes? How does an administrator know
which mode he or she is currently using?
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
c) What are the individual commands to configure the basic settings of a Cisco device? How would you
explain this command in laymens terms? Use parallels to real life whenever appropriate.
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 3
Tutor me!
d) With the help of your colleague, try to suggest how to group different commands together according
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 3
Lets just talk about this

Objectives
Explain the role of protocols and standards organizations in facilitating interoperability in network
communications.
In this activity, you will determine ways to communicate when standards are not present or agreed upon. You
will also resolve a communication issue by establishing standards for communication.
Background/Scenario
You have just purchased a new automobile for your personal use. After driving the car for a week or so, you
find that it is not properly functioning.
After discussing the problem with several of your peers, you decide to take it to a highly recommended
automotive repair facility. It is the only repair facility located in close proximity to you.
When you arrive at the repair facility, you find that all of the mechanics speak another language. You are
having difficulty explaining the automobiles performance problems, but the repairs really need to be done.
You are not sure you can drive it back home to research other options.
You must find a way to work with the repair facility to ensure your automobile is properly repaired.
How will you communicate with the mechanics in this firm? Design a communications model to ensure that
the car is properly repaired.
Reflection
1. What steps did you identify as important to communicating your repair request? Justify your answer.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 1
Lab - Researching Networking Standards

Objectives
Part 1: Research Networking Standards Organizations
Gather information about the major networking standards organizations by going on a web surfing
treasure hunt.
Identify important characteristics of some of the organizations.
Part 2: Reflect on Internet and Computer Networking Experiences
Reflect on how the various networking standards organizations enhance our experience of the Internet
and computer networking.
Using web search engines like Google, research the non-profit organizations that are responsible for
establishing international standards for the Internet and the development of Internet technologies.
Required Resources
Part 1: Research Networking Standards Organizations

In Part 1, you will identify some of the major standards organizations and important characteristics, such as
the number of years in existence, the size of their membership, the important historical figures, some of the
responsibilities and duties, organizational oversight role, and the location of the organizations headquarters.
Use a web browser or websites for various organizations to research information about the following
organizations and the people who have been instrumental in maintaining them.
You can find answers to the questions below by searching the following organizational acronyms and terms:
ISO, ITU, ICANN, IANA, IEEE, EIA, TIA, ISOC, IAB, IETF, W3C, RFC, and Wi-Fi Alliance.
1. Who is Jonathan B. Postel and what is he known for?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Which two related organizations are responsible for managing the top-level domain name space and the root
Domain Name System (DNS) name servers on the Internet?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3. Vinton Cerf has been called one of main fathers of the Internet. What Internet organizations did he chair or
help found? What Internet technologies did he help to develop?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4. What organization is responsible for publishing Request for Comments (RFC)?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 3

5. What do RFC 349 and RFC 1700 have in common?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6. What RFC number is the ARPAWOCKY? What is it?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
7. Who founded the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
8. Name 10 World Wide Web (WWW) standards that the W3C develops and maintains?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
9. Where is the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) headquarters located and what is the
significance of its logo?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
10. What is the IEEE standard for the Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2) security protocol?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
11. Is the Wi-Fi Alliance a non-profit standards organization? What is their goal?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
12. Who is Hamadoun Tour?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
13. What is the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) and where is it headquartered?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
14. Name the three ITU sectors?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
15. What does the RS in RS-232 stand for and which organization introduced it?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
16. What is SpaceWire?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
17. What is the mission of the ISOC and where are its headquarters located?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 3

18. What organizations does the IAB oversee?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
19. What organization oversees the IAB?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
20. When was the ISO founded and where are its headquarters located?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Part 2: Reflect on Internet and Computer Networking Experiences

Take a moment to think about the Internet today in relation to the organizations and technologies you have
just researched. Then answer the following questions.
1. How do the Internet standards allow for greater commerce? What potential problems could we have if we did
not have the IEEE?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. What potential problems could we have if we did not have the W3C?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3. What can we learn from the example of the Wi-Fi Alliance with regard to the necessity of networking
standards?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 3
Lab - Researching RFCs

Objectives
Part 1: RFC Editor
Navigate to the RFC Editor.
Search for RFCs using keywords.
Find RFCs by status.
Search for humorous RFCs.
Part 2: Publishing RFCs
Request for Comments (RFCs) were created by Steve Crocker to help record notes on development of
Advanced Research Projects Agency Network (ARPANET) in 1969 and eventually evolved into an official
collection of memorandum that describes topics that are mainly related to the Internet and the TCP/IP
protocol suite. Today the RFCs are managed by the IETF. There are currently over 6,000 RFCs, and the
complete list is available at http://www.ietf.org/download/rfc-index.txt.
In this lab, you will learn how an RFC is published today by IETF. Additionally, you will also identify a few wellknown RFCs that are used in your network. You can also find a few non-technical RFCs that can provide
information or engineering humor.
Required Resources
Part 1: RFC Editor

RFCs started as a collection of memorandum on the development of the first Internet (ARPANET). In this
collection, only a few RFCs are considered as Internet standards. Most of the RFCs describe experimental
protocols. Some of the RFCs are only informational. The main purpose of RFCs is to stimulate comment and
discussion.
Step 1: Navigate to the RFC Editor.

All the published RFCs are available for access at http://www.rfc-editor.org. The RFC Editor is an RFC
repository maintained by the IETF.
At the top banner of this page, you can click any of the links, and these links direct you to the different
searches, databases, and information. A link to IETF HOME is also included within this blue banner.
After an RFC is located, you have access to the full text of the document.
Page 1 of 6
Step 2: Search for RFCs using keywords.

a. Open a browser and navigate to http://www.rfc-editor.org. On the RFC Editor Homepage, you can search
and retrieve RFCs and other information related to the Internet.
Page 2 of 6

b. In the Finding and Retrieving RFCs, etc. pane, these links can help you search for RFCs using different
methods. The Search for an RFC and its meta-data link displays a list of RFCs after inputting your
search parameters, such as number, author, title, or keyword. The word, pop, is used in the following
example.
Look for Post Office Protocol Version 3 in the list. The associated RFC number is RFC 1939. This
RFC is also an Internet standard, as indicated by the STD number in the Number column.
After an RFC is published and assigned a number, it cannot be changed and the RFC number is never
used again for a newer RFC. For example, in the More Info column, RFC 1939 has made the previous
RFC 1725 obsolete. The information in RFC 1725 has not been modified, but it has been replaced with
the information from RFC 1939. RFC 1939 has been updated by RFC 1957, RFC 2449, and RFC 6186,
as indicated in the More Info column. If you click any of these links, the full text of the RFC displays.
Refer to the Status column and locate the Proposed Standard status. They may be technically sound,
but require further testing and validation.
Refer to the Status column and locate the Informational status. Informational RFCs can be anything
from technical to humorous. For example, RFC 0035 (Network Meeting) provides an insight into the
development of a network protocol in the early days of the Internet.
Page 3 of 6
Step 3: Find RFCs by status.

To find a list of RFCs that are either Internet Standards (STD) or by their status, perform the following tasks:
a. Navigate back to the RFC Editor Homepage.
b. Click the Official Internet Protocol Standard RFCs link in the left column. You will find a list of official
standard RFCs followed by other RFC status lists. Each RFC link leads to the full RFC text.
Step 4: Search for humorous RFCs.

Engineering humor can also be found in the RFCs, such as RFC 1300 (Remembrances of Things Past). An
Internet search engine can be used to find information on RFCs.
a. Search the Internet for engineering humor rfc to see more examples of whimsical RFCs. What did you
find?
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. Search for RFC 2795. What is the subject of this RFC? _______________________________________
What company does the author of this RFC work for? _________________________________________
Page 4 of 6
Part 2: Publishing RFCs

The late Dr. Jonathan Postel maintained and managed the archiving of RFCs for 28 years (RFC 2468).
Today, RFCs are a collection of documents published and managed by IETF. IETF is a large, open,
international community of network designers, operators, vendors, and researchers related to the Internet and
the Internet protocol suite.
Anyone can submit a proposal to the RFC Editor for possible publication. The proposal is initially published as
an Internet-Draft (I-D). After review by the community and if it is approved by an RFC Editor, it will enter the
same publishing process as IETF submission. For more details regarding independent submission,
see http://www.rfc-editor.org/indsubs.html.
For proposals that may become Internet Standard or Best Current Practice and some Experimental or
Informational RFCs, these submissions are published as Internet-Drafts. The Internet-Drafts are made
available for informal review and comments. The Internet-Drafts have no formal status, and they are subject
to change or removal at any time. They can be found at http://www.rfc-editor.org/.
a. Navigate to http://www.rfc-editor.org.
b. Click I-D SEARCH at the top of the Homepage, and then click SEARCH. This will display a list of the
current Internet-Drafts.
The list of results provides links to the full text of the I-Ds and other useful information. The Source
column lists the Working Group with IETF that is responsible for the draft. As an example, 6man is a
Working Group that submitted multiple drafts. To find out more information about this Working Group,
click IETF HOME at the top of the results page.
c.
After arriving at the IETF Homepage, click WG Charters in the left column, listed under Working Groups.
The Active IETF Working Groups page displays. The IETF Working Groups (WG) primary function is to
develop IETF specifications and guidelines. Many of these specifications and guidelines are intended to
become standards or recommendations. By scrolling the page, you see a list of Active Working Groups in
different development areas for technology related to networking. The 6man Working Group can be found
listed in the Internet Area. This working group is responsible for maintenance and advancement of the
IPv6 protocol specifications and addressing architecture.
Page 5 of 6

d. Click 6man to view the complete list of current proposals and other information for this Working Group.
After the I-D has received significant community review and is considered useful, stable, and wellunderstood by the community, it should become a Proposed Standard. The full text of the Proposed
Standard can be found by searching in the RFC-Editor. The Proposed Standard may become an Internet
Standard after significant implementation and successful operational experience.
Note: Only a few RFCs published by IETF will become Internet standards.
Reflection
1. Why are RFCs important for Internet standards and history?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. What are the advantages of RFCs as a collaborative effort?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 6
Lab - Using Wireshark to View Network Traffic

Topology
Objectives
Part 1: (Optional) Download and Install Wireshark
Part 2: Capture and Analyze Local ICMP Data in Wireshark
Start and stop data capture of ping traffic to local hosts.
Locate the IP and MAC address information in captured PDUs.
Part 3: Capture and Analyze Remote ICMP Data in Wireshark
Start and stop data capture of ping traffic to remote hosts.
Locate the IP and MAC address information in captured PDUs.
Explain why MAC addresses for remote hosts are different than the MAC addresses of local hosts.
Wireshark is a software protocol analyzer, or "packet sniffer" application, used for network troubleshooting,
analysis, software and protocol development, and education. As data streams travel back and forth over the
network, the sniffer "captures" each protocol data unit (PDU) and can decode and analyze its content
according to the appropriate RFC or other specifications.
Wireshark is a useful tool for anyone working with networks and can be used with most labs in the CCNA
courses for data analysis and troubleshooting. This lab provides instructions for downloading and installing
Wireshark, although it may already be installed. In this lab, you will use Wireshark to capture ICMP data
packet IP addresses and Ethernet frame MAC addresses.
Page 1 of 20
Required Resources
Additional PC(s) on a local-area network (LAN) will be used to reply to ping requests.
Part 1:
(Optional) Download and Install Wireshark
Wireshark has become the industry standard packet-sniffer program used by network engineers. This open
source software is available for many different operating systems, including Windows, Mac, and Linux. In Part
1 of this lab, you will download and install the Wireshark software program on your PC.
Note: If Wireshark is already installed on your PC, you can skip Part 1 and go directly to Part 2. If Wireshark
is not installed on your PC, check with your instructor about your academys software download policy.
Step 1: Download Wireshark.

a. Wireshark can be downloaded from www.wireshark.org.
b. Click Download Wireshark.
c.
Choose the software version you need based on your PCs architecture and operating system. For
instance, if you have a 64-bit PC running Windows, choose Windows Installer (64-bit).
Page 2 of 20

After making a selection, the download should start. The location of the downloaded file depends on the
browser and operating system that you use. For Windows users, the default location is the Downloads
folder.
Step 2: Install Wireshark.

a. The downloaded file is named Wireshark-win64-x.x.x.exe, where x represents the version number.
Double-click the file to start the installation process.
b. Respond to any security messages that may display on your screen. If you already have a copy of
Wireshark on your PC, you will be prompted to uninstall the old version before installing the new version.
It is recommended that you remove the old version of Wireshark prior to installing another version. Click
Yes to uninstall the previous version of Wireshark.
c.
If this is the first time to install Wireshark, or after you have completed the uninstall process, you will
navigate to the Wireshark Setup wizard. Click Next.
Page 3 of 20

d. Continue advancing through the installation process. Click I Agree when the License Agreement window
displays.
e. Keep the default settings on the Choose Components window and click Next.
Page 4 of 20

f.
Choose your desired shortcut options and click Next.
g. You can change the installation location of Wireshark, but unless you have limited disk space, it is
recommended that you keep the default location.
Page 5 of 20

h. To capture live network data, WinPcap must be installed on your PC. If WinPcap is already installed on
your PC, the Install check box will be unchecked. If your installed version of WinPcap is older than the
version that comes with Wireshark, it is recommend that you allow the newer version to be installed by
clicking the Install WinPcap x.x.x (version number) check box.
i.
Finish the WinPcap Setup Wizard if installing WinPcap.
j.
Wireshark starts installing its files and a separate window displays with the status of the installation. Click
Next when the installation is complete.
Page 6 of 20

k.
Click Finish to complete the Wireshark install process.
Part 2: Capture and Analyze Local ICMP Data in Wireshark

In Part 2 of this lab, you will ping another PC on the LAN and capture ICMP requests and replies in
Wireshark. You will also look inside the frames captured for specific information. This analysis should help to
clarify how packet headers are used to transport data to their destination.
Step 1: Retrieve your PCs interface addresses.

For this lab, you will need to retrieve your PCs IP address and its network interface card (NIC) physical
address, also called the MAC address.
Page 7 of 20

a. Open a command window, type ipconfig /all, and then press Enter.
b. Note your PC interfaces IP address and MAC (physical) address.
c.
Ask a team member for their PCs IP address and provide your PCs IP address to them. Do not provide
them with your MAC address at this time.
Step 2: Start Wireshark and begin capturing data.

a. On your PC, click the Windows Start button to see Wireshark listed as one of the programs on the pop-up
menu. Double-click Wireshark.
b. After Wireshark starts, click Interface List.
Note: Clicking the first interface icon in the row of icons also opens the Interface List.
Page 8 of 20

c.
On the Wireshark: Capture Interfaces window, click the check box next to the interface connected to your
LAN.
Note: If multiple interfaces are listed and you are unsure which interface to check, click the Details
button, and then click the 802.3 (Ethernet) tab. Verify that the MAC address matches what you noted in
Step 1b. Close the Interface Details window after verifying the correct interface.
d. After you have checked the correct interface, click Start to start the data capture.
Page 9 of 20

Information will start scrolling down the top section in Wireshark. The data lines will appear in different
colors based on protocol.
e. This information can scroll by very quickly depending on what communication is taking place between
your PC and the LAN. We can apply a filter to make it easier to view and work with the data that is being
captured by Wireshark. For this lab, we are only interested in displaying ICMP (ping) PDUs. Type icmp in
the Filter box at the top of Wireshark and press Enter or click on the Apply button to view only ICMP
(ping) PDUs.
Page 10 of 20

f.
This filter causes all data in the top window to disappear, but you are still capturing the traffic on the
interface. Bring up the command prompt window that you opened earlier and ping the IP address that you
received from your team member. Notice that you start seeing data appear in the top window of
Wireshark again.
Note: If your team members PC does not reply to your pings, this may be because their PC firewall is
blocking these requests. Please see Appendix A: Allowing ICMP Traffic Through a Firewall for information
on how to allow ICMP traffic through the firewall using Windows 7.
g. Stop capturing data by clicking the Stop Capture icon.
Page 11 of 20
Step 3: Examine the captured data.

In Step 3, examine the data that was generated by the ping requests of your team members PC. Wireshark
data is displayed in three sections: 1) The top section displays the list of PDU frames captured with a
summary of the IP packet information listed, 2) the middle section lists PDU information for the frame selected
in the top part of the screen and separates a captured PDU frame by its protocol layers, and 3) the bottom
section displays the raw data of each layer. The raw data is displayed in both hexadecimal and decimal form.
a. Click the first ICMP request PDU frames in the top section of Wireshark. Notice that the Source column
has your PCs IP address, and the Destination contains the IP address of the teammates PC you pinged.
Page 12 of 20

b. With this PDU frame still selected in the top section, navigate to the middle section. Click the plus sign to
the left of the Ethernet II row to view the Destination and Source MAC addresses.
Does the Source MAC address match your PCs interface? ______
Does the Destination MAC address in Wireshark match the MAC address that of your team members?
_____
How is the MAC address of the pinged PC obtained by your PC?
___________________________________________________________________________________
Note: In the preceding example of a captured ICMP request, ICMP data is encapsulated inside an IPv4
packet PDU (IPv4 header) which is then encapsulated in an Ethernet II frame PDU (Ethernet II header)
for transmission on the LAN.
Part 3: Capture and Analyze Remote ICMP Data in Wireshark

In Part 3, you will ping remote hosts (hosts not on the LAN) and examine the generated data from those
pings. You will then determine what is different about this data from the data examined in Part 2.
Step 1: Start capturing data on interface.

a. Click the Interface List icon to bring up the list PC interfaces again.
Page 13 of 20

b. Make sure the check box next to the LAN interface is checked, and then click Start.
c.
A window prompts to save the previously captured data before starting another capture. It is not
necessary to save this data. Click Continue without Saving.
Page 14 of 20

d. With the capture active, ping the following three website URLs:
1) www.yahoo.com
2) www.cisco.com
3) www.google.com
Note: When you ping the URLs listed, notice that the Domain Name Server (DNS) translates the URL to
an IP address. Note the IP address received for each URL.
e. You can stop capturing data by clicking the Stop Capture icon.
Step 2: Examining and analyzing the data from the remote hosts.
a. Review the captured data in Wireshark, examine the IP and MAC addresses of the three locations that
you pinged. List the destination IP and MAC addresses for all three locations in the space provided.
1st Location:
IP: _____._____._____._____ MAC: ____:____:____:____:____:____
2nd
Location:
IP: _____._____._____._____ MAC: ____:____:____:____:____:____
3rd Location:
IP: _____._____._____._____ MAC: ____:____:____:____:____:____
Page 15 of 20

b. What is significant about this information?
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
How does this information differ from the local ping information you received in Part 2?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Reflection
Why does Wireshark show the actual MAC address of the local hosts, but not the actual MAC address for the
remote hosts?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Appendix A: Allowing ICMP Traffic Through a Firewall

If the members of your team are unable to ping your PC, the firewall may be blocking those requests. This
appendix describes how to create a rule in the firewall to allow ping requests. It also describes how to disable
the new ICMP rule after you have completed the lab.
Step 1: Create a new inbound rule allowing ICMP traffic through the firewall.
a. From the Control Panel, click the System and Security option.
b. From the System and Security window, click Windows Firewall.
Page 16 of 20

c.
In the left pane of the Windows Firewall window, click Advanced settings.
d. On the Advanced Security window, choose the Inbound Rules option on the left sidebar and then click
New Rule on the right sidebar.
Page 17 of 20

e. This launches the New Inbound Rule wizard. On the Rule Type screen, click the Custom radio button
and click Next
f.
In the left pane, click the Protocol and Ports option and using the Protocol type drop-down menu, select
ICMPv4, and then click Next.
Page 18 of 20

g. In the left pane, click the Name option and in the Name field, type Allow ICMP Requests. Click Finish.
This new rule should allow your team members to receive ping replies from your PC.
Step 2: Disabling or deleting the new ICMP rule.

After the lab is complete, you may want to disable or even delete the new rule you created in Step 1. Using
the Disable Rule option allows you to enable the rule again at a later date. Deleting the rule permanently
deletes it from the list of Inbound Rules.
a. On the Advanced Security window, in the left pane, click Inbound Rules and then locate the rule you
created in Step 1.
Page 19 of 20

b. To disable the rule, click the Disable Rule option. When you choose this option, you will see this option
change to Enable Rule. You can toggle back and forth between Disable Rule and Enable Rule; the
status of the rule also shows in the Enabled column of the Inbound Rules list.
c.
To permanently delete the ICMP rule, click Delete. If you choose this option, you must re-create the rule
again to allow ICMP replies.
Page 20 of 20
Guaranteed to work!
Objectives
Explain the role of protocols and standards organizations in facilitating interoperability in network
communications.
In this activity, you will demonstrate how network communications can be compared to everyday activities
using established procedures and standards.
Background/Scenario
You have just completed the Chapter 3 content regarding network protocols and standards.
Assuming you resolved the beginning of this chapters modeling activity, how would you compare the
following steps taken to design a communications system to the networking models used for
communications?
Steps to Communicate
Possible Answers
Associated
TCP/IP Model Layer
Establish a language to communicate

Divide the message into small steps, delivered a
little at a time, to facilitate understanding of the
problem
Verify that the message has been delivered
correctly to the mechanic who will perform the
repairs
Deliver the automobile and identify wait time for
repairs
Required Resources
Blank Steps to Communicate table (above) for students to record their answers based upon their Chapter 3
content knowledge.
Reflection
1. How does your network model in developing an automotive repair communications plan compare to a
network communications interoperability plan?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 2
Guaranteed to work!
Steps to Communicate
Possible Answers
Associated
TCP/IP Model Layer
Page 2 of 2
Let me tell you what I heard at a conference

Objectives
Describe the purpose and function of the data link layer in preparing communication for transmission
on specific media.
In this activity, you will discuss how communication within a single data-link layer domain can be
performed immediately by addressing the intended node directly. You will also consider the increasing
difficulty of communication if multiple nodes in a single domain need to communicate.
Background/Scenario
You and your colleague are attending a networking conference. There are many lectures and
presentations held during this event, and because they overlap, each of you can attend only a limited set
of sessions. Therefore, you decide to split up, each of you attending a separate set of presentations, and
after the event ends, you share the slides and the knowledge each of you gained during the event.
Answer the following questions:
How would you personally organize a conference where multiple sessions are held at the same
time? Would you put all of them into a single conference room, or would you use multiple rooms?
Explain your answer.
Assume that the conference room is properly fitted with audiovisual equipment to display largesize video and amplify the speakers voice. If a person wanted to attend a specific session, does
it matter which seat the person takes, or is it sufficient for the person to sit anywhere as long as it
is in an appropriate conference room?
What are the potential consequences or benefits if the speech from one conference room
somehow leaked into another?
If questions or inquiries arise during a presentation, should an attendee simply shout out a
question, or should there be some process of assuring that attendees are given an opportunity to
ask questions that everyone can hear? What would happen without this process?
Can a session run out of time without going through the entire intended content if an interesting
topic elicits a larger discussion where many attendees have questions? If you did not want this to
happen, what would be the best way to ensure that it does not occur?
Imagine that the session is in a panel format, which allows more free discussion of attendees with
the panelists and among themselves. If a person wants to address another person within the
same room, can it be done directly? If so, how is this possible? How would a panelist invite
another person to join who is not presently in the room?
What benefit, if any, was achieved by the isolation of multiple sessions into separate conference
rooms if, after the event, people could meet and share the information?
Required Resources
Recording capabilities (paper, tablet, etc.) for reflective comments to be shared with the class.
Reflection
1. How would you personally organize a conference where multiple sessions are held at the same time?
Would you put all of them into a single conference room, or would you use multiple rooms? What would
be the reason? Explain your answer.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 3

____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
2. Assume that the conference room is properly fitted with audiovisual equipment to display large-size video
and amplify the speakers voice. If a person wanted to attend a specific session, does it matter which seat
will the person takes, or is it sufficient for the person to sit anywhere as long as it is in appropriate
conference room?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
3. What are the potential consequences or benefits if the speech from one conference room somehow
leaked into another?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
4. If questions or inquiries arise during a presentation, should an attendee simply shout out his/her question,
or should there be some process of assuring that attendees are given an opportunity to ask questions
that everyone can hear? What would happen without this process?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
5. Can a session run out of time without going through the entire intended content if an interesting topic
elicits a larger discussion where many attendees have questions? If you did not want this to happen, what
would be the best way to ensure that it does not occur?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 3

6. Imagine that the session is in a panel format, which allows more free discussion of attendees with the
panelists and among themselves. If a person wants to address another person within the same room, can
he/she do it directly? If so, how is this possible? How would a panelist invite another person to join who is
not presently in the room?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
7. What benefit, if any, was achieved by the isolation of multiple sessions into separate conference rooms if,
after the event, people could meet and share the information?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 3
Lab A - Identifying Network Devices and Cabling

Objectives
Part 1: Identify Network Devices
Describe the functions and physical characteristics of the network device.
Part 2: Identify Network Media
Describe the functions and physical characteristics of the media.
As a member of the networking support staff, you must be able to identify different networking equipment.
You must also understand the function of equipment in the appropriate part of the network. In this lab, you will
have access to network devices and media. You will identify the type and characteristics of the network
equipment and media.
Part 1: Identify Network Devices

Your instructor will provide various network devices for identification. Each will be tagged with an ID number.
Fill in the table below with the device tag ID number, manufacturer, device model, type (hub, switch, and
router), functionality (wireless, router, switch, or combination), and other physical characteristics, such as
number of interface types. The first line is filled out as a reference.
Page 1 of 3
ID
Manufacturer
Cisco
Model
1941
Type
Router
Functionality
Router
Physical Characteristics
2 GigabitEthernet Ports
2 EHWIC slots
2 CompactFlash slots
1 ISM slot
2 Console ports: USB, RJ-45
Part 2: Identify Network Media

Your instructor will provide various network media for identification. You will name the network media, identify
the media type (copper, fiber optic, or wireless), and provide a short media description including what device
types it connects. Use the table below to record your findings. The first line in the table has been filled out as
a reference.
Page 2 of 3
ID
Network Media
UTP
Type
Copper
Description and to What It Connects

Connect wired NIC and Ethernet ports on network devices
Cat 5 straight-through wired. Connects PCs and routers to
switches and wiring panels.
Reflection
After you have identified the network equipment, where would you find more information about the
equipment?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 3
Lab - Building an Ethernet Crossover Cable

Topology
Addressing Table
Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
PC-A
NIC
192.168.10.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
PC-B
NIC
192.168.10.2
255.255.255.0
N/A
Objectives
Part 1: Analyze Ethernet Cabling Standards and Pinouts
Analyze diagrams and tables for the TIA/EIA 568-A standard Ethernet cable.
Analyze diagrams and tables for the TIA/EIA 568-B standard Ethernet cable.
Part 2: Build an Ethernet Crossover Cable
Build and terminate a TIA/EIA 568-A cable end.
Build and terminate a TIA/EIA 568-B cable end.
Part 3: Test an Ethernet Crossover Cable
Test an Ethernet crossover cable with a cable tester.
Connect two PCs together using an Ethernet crossover cable.
In this lab, you will build and terminate an Ethernet crossover cable and test it by connecting two PCs
together and pinging between them. You will first analyze the Telecommunications Industry
Association/Electronic Industries Association (TIA/EIA) 568-A and 568-B standards and how they apply to
Ethernet cables. You will then construct an Ethernet crossover cable and test it. Finally, you will use the cable
you just constructed to connect two PCs together and test it by pinging between them.
Note: With autosensing capabilities available on many devices, such as the Cisco 1941 Integrated Services
Router (ISR) switch, you may see straight-through cables connecting like devices.
Required Resources
One length of cable, either Category 5 or 5e. Cable length should be 0.6 to 0.9m (2 to 3 ft.)
2 RJ-45 connectors
RJ-45 crimping tool
Wire cutter
Wire stripper
Page 1 of 6
Ethernet cable tester (optional)
2 PCs (Windows 7, Vista, or XP)
Part 1: Analyze Ethernet Cabling Standards and Pinouts

The TIA/EIA has specified unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cabling standards for use in LAN cabling
environments. TIA/EIA 568-A and 568-B stipulates the commercial cabling standards for LAN installations;
these are the standards most commonly used in LAN cabling for organizations and they determine which
color wire is used on each pin.
With a crossover cable, the second and third pairs on the RJ-45 connector at one end of the cable are
reversed at the other end, which reverses the send and receive pairs. The cable pinouts are the 568-A
standard on one end and the 568-B standard on the other end. Crossover cables are normally used to
connect hubs to hubs or switches to switches, but they can also be used to directly connect two hosts to
create a simple network.
Note: With modern networking devices, a straight-through cable can often be used even when connecting like
devices because of their autosensing feature. With autosensing, the interfaces detect whether the send and
receive circuit pairs are correctly connected. If they are not, the interfaces reverse one end of the connection.
Autosensing also alters the speed of the interfaces to match the slowest one. For example, if connecting a
Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mb/s) router interface to a Fast Ethernet (100 Mb/s) switch interface, the connection
uses Fast Ethernet.
The Cisco 2960 switch has autosensing turned on, by default; therefore, connecting two 2960 switches
together works with either a crossover or a straight-through cable. With some older switches, this is not the
case and a crossover cable must be used.
In addition, the Cisco 1941 router Gigabit Ethernet interfaces are autosensing and a straight-through cable
may be used to connect a PC directly to the router interface (bypassing the switch). With some older routers,
this is not the case and a crossover cable must be used.
When directly connecting two hosts, it is generally advisable to use a crossover cable.
Step 1: Analyze diagrams and tables for the TIA/EIA 568-A standard Ethernet cable.
The following table and diagrams display the color scheme and pinouts, as well as the function of the four
pairs of wires used for the 568-A standard.
Note: In LAN installations using 100Base-T (100 Mb/s), only two pairs out of the four are used.
Page 2 of 6

568-A 10/100/1000Base-TX Ethernet
Pin Number
Pair Number
Wire Color
10Base-T Signal
100Base-TX Signal
1000Base-T Signal
White/Green
Transmit
BI_DA+
Green
Transmit
BI_DA-
White/Orange
Receive
BI_DB+
Blue
Not Used
BI_DC+
White/Blue
Not Used
BI_DC-
Orange
Receive
BI_DB-
White/Brown
Not Used
BI_DD+
Brown
Not Used
BI_DD-
The following diagrams display how the wire color and pinouts align with an RJ-45 jack for the 568-A
standard.
Page 3 of 6
Step 2: Analyze diagrams and tables for the TIA/EIA 568-B standard Ethernet cable.
The following table and diagram display the color scheme and pinouts for the 568-B standard.
568-B 10/100/1000-BaseTX Ethernet
Pin Number
Pair Number
Wire Color
10Base-T Signal
100Base-TX Signal
1000Base-T Signal
White/Orange
Transmit
BI_DA+
Orange
Transmit
BI_DA-
White/Green
Receive
BI_DB+
Blue
Not Used
BI_DC+
White/Blue
Not Used
BI_DC-
Green
Receive
BI_DB-
White/Brown
Not Used
BI_DD+
Brown
Not Used
BI_DD-
Page 4 of 6
Part 2: Build an Ethernet Crossover Cable

A crossover cable has the second and third pairs on the RJ-45 connector at one end, reversed at the other
end (refer to the table in Part 1, Step 2). The cable pinouts are the 568-A standard on one end and the 568-B
standard on the other end. The two following diagrams illustrate this concept.
Step 1: Build and terminate a TIA/EIA 568-A cable end.

a. Determine the cable length required. (Your instructor will let you know the cable length you should make.)
Note: If you were making a cable in a production environment, the general guideline is to add another 12
in. (30.48 cm) to the length.
b. Cut off a piece of cable to the desired length and using your wire stripper, remove 5.08 cm (2 in.) of the
cable jacket from both ends.
c.
Hold the four pairs of twisted cables tightly where the jacket was cut away. Reorganize the cable pairs
into the order of the 568-A wiring standard. Refer to the diagrams, if necessary. Take as much care as
possible to maintain the twists in the cable; this provides noise cancellation.
d. Flatten, straighten, and line up the wires using your thumb and forefinger.
e. Ensure that the cable wires are still in the correct order for the 568-A standard. Using your wire cutters,
trim the four pairs in a straight line to within 1.25 to 1.9 cm (1/2 to 3/4 in.).
f.
Place an RJ-45 connector on the end of your cable, with the prong on the underside pointing downward.
Firmly insert the wires into the RJ-45 connector. All wires should be seen at the end of the connector in
their proper positions. If the wires are not extending to the end of the connector, take the cable out,
rearrange the wires as necessary, and reinsert the wires back into the RJ-45 connector.
g. If everything is correct, insert the RJ-45 connector with cable into the crimper. Crimp down hard enough
to force the contacts on the RJ-45 connector through the insulation on the wires, thus completing the
conducting path. See the following diagram for an example.
Page 5 of 6
Step 2: Build and terminate a TIA/EIA 568-B cable end.

Repeat steps 1a to 1g using the 568-B color wiring scheme for the other end.
Part 3: Test an Ethernet Crossover Cable

Step 1: Test the cable.
Many cable testers will test for length and mapping of wires. If the cable tester has a wire map feature, it
verifies which pins on one end of the cable are connected to which pins on the other end.
If your instructor has a cable tester, test the crossover cable for functionality. If it fails, check with your
instructor first as to whether you should re-cable the ends and re-test.
Step 2: Connect two PCs together via NICs using your Ethernet crossover cable.
a. Working with a lab partner, set your PC to one of the IP addresses shown in the Addressing Table (see
page 1). For example, if your PC is PC-A, your IP address should be set to 192.168.10.1 with a 24-bit
subnet mask. You partners IP address should be 192.168.10.2. The default gateway address can be left
empty.
b. Using the crossover cable you made, connect the two PCs together via their NICs.
c.
On the PC-A command prompt, ping the PC-B IP address.
Note: The Windows firewall may have to be temporarily disabled for pings to be successful. If the firewall is
disabled, make sure you re-enable it at the conclusion of this lab.
d. Repeat the process and ping from PC-B to PC-A.
Assuming IP addressing and firewall are not issues, your pings should be successful if the cables were
properly made.
Reflection
1. Which part of making cables did you find the most difficult?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why do you have to learn how to make a cable if you can easily buy pre-made cables?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 6
Lab Viewing Wireless and Wired NIC Information

Objectives
Part 1: Identify and Work with PC NICs
Part 2: Identify and Use the System Tray Network Icons
This lab requires you to determine the availability and status of the network interface cards (NICs) on the PC
that you use. Windows provides a number of ways to view and work with your NICs.
In this lab, you will access the NIC information of your PC and change the status of these cards.
Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with two NICs, wired and wireless, and a wireless connection)
Note: At the start of this lab, the wired Ethernet NIC in the PC was cabled to one of the integrated switch
ports on a wireless router and the Local Area Connection (wired) was enabled. The wireless NIC was
disabled initially. If the wired and wireless NICs are both enabled the PC will receive two different IP
addresses and the wireless NIC will take precedence.
Part 1: Identify and Work with PC NICs

In Part 1, you will identify the NIC types in the PC that you are using. You will explore different ways to extract
information about these NICs and how to activate and deactivate them.
Note: This lab was performed using a PC running on the Windows 7 operating system. You should be able to
perform the lab with one of the other Windows operating systems listed; however, menu selections and
screens may vary.
Step 1: Use the Network and Sharing Center.

a. Open the Network and Sharing Center by clicking the Windows Start button > Control Panel > View
network status and tasks under Network and Internet heading in the Category View.
b. In the left pane, click the Change adapter settings link.
c.
The Network Connections window displays, which provides the list of NICs available on this PC. Look for
your Local Area Connection and Wireless Network Connection adapters in this window.
Note: Virtual Private Network (VPN) adapters and other types of network connections may also be
displayed in this window.
Page 1 of 12
Step 2: Work with your wireless NIC.

a. Select the Wireless Network Connection option and right-click it to bring up a drop-down list. If your
wireless NIC is disabled, you will have an option to Enable it. If your NIC was already enabled, then
Disable would be the first option on this drop-down menu. If your Wireless Network Connection is
currently disabled, then click Enable.
b. Right-click the Wireless Network Connection, and then click Status.
c.
The Wireless Network Connection Status window displays where you can view information about your
wireless connection.
Page 2 of 12
What is the Service Set Identifier (SSID) for the wireless router of your connection?
________________________________________________________________
What is the speed of your wireless connection? __________________________
d. Click Details to display the Network Connection Details window.
Page 3 of 12
What is the MAC address of your wireless NIC? _____________________________________________

Do you have multiple IPv4 DNS Servers listed? ______________________________________________
Why would multiple DNS Servers be listed?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
e. When you have reviewed the network connection details, click Close.
f.
Open a command window prompt and type ipconfig /all.
Notice that the information displayed here is the same information that was displayed in the Network
Connection Details window in Step d.
Page 4 of 12

g. Close the command window and the Network Connection Details windows. This should bring you back to
the Wireless Network Connection Status window. Click Wireless Properties.
h. In the Wireless Network Properties window, click the Security tab.
i.
The type of security the connected wireless router has implemented displays. Click the Show characters
check box to display the actual Network security key, instead of the hidden characters, and then click OK.
Page 5 of 12
j.
Close the Wireless Network Properties and the Network Connection Status windows. Select and rightclick the Wireless Network Connection option > Connect/Disconnect. A pop-up window should appear
at the bottom right corner of your desktop that displays your current connections, along with a list of
SSIDs that are in range of the wireless NIC of your PC. If a scrollbar appears on the right side of this
window, you can use it to display additional SSIDs.
Page 6 of 12
k.
To join one of the other wireless network SSIDs listed, click the SSID that you want to join, and then click
Connect.
l.
If you have selected a secure SSID, you are prompted to enter the Security key for the SSID. Type the
security key for that SSID and click OK. You can click the Hide characters check box to prevent people
from seeing what you type in the Security key field.
Page 7 of 12
Step 3: Work with your wired NIC.

a. On the Network Connections window, select and right-click the Local Area Connection option to display
the drop-down list. If the NIC is disabled, enable it, and then click the Status option.
Note: You must have an Ethernet cable attaching your PC NIC to a switch or similar device to see the
status. Many wireless routers have a small 4-port Ethernet switch built-in. You can connect to one of the
ports using a straight-through Ethernet patch cable.
b. The Local Area Connection Status window will open. This window displays information about your wired
connection to the LAN.
Page 8 of 12
Click Details to view the address information for your LAN connection.
c.
Open a command window prompt and type ipconfig /all. Find your Local Area Connection information
and compare this with the information displayed in the Network Connection Details window.
Page 9 of 12
d. Close all windows on your desktop.
Part 2: Identify and Use the System Tray Network Icons

In Part 2, you will use the network icons in your system tray to determine and control the NICs on your PC.
Step 1: Use the Wireless Network icon.

a. Click the system tray Wireless Network icon to view the pop-up window that displays the SSIDs that are
in-range of your wireless NIC. When the system tray displays the Wireless Network icon, the wireless NIC
is active.
b. Click the Open Network and Sharing Center link. Note: This is a shortcut way to bring up this window.
c.
In the left pane, click the Change adapter settings link to display the Network Connections window.
d. Select and right-click the Wireless Network Connection, and then click Disable to disable your wireless
NIC.
Page 10 of 12
e. Examine your system tray. The Wireless Network Connection icon should be replaced by the Wired
Network icon, which indicates that you are using your wired NIC for network connectivity.
Note: If both NICs are active, the Wireless Network icon is the one that is displayed.
Step 2: Use the Wired Network icon.

a. Click the Wired Network icon. Notice that the Wireless SSIDs are no longer displayed in this pop-up
window, but you still have the ability to get to the Network and Sharing Center window from here.
b. Click the Open Network and Sharing Center link > Change adapter settings and Enable your
Wireless Network Connection. The Wireless Network icon should replace the Wired Network icon in
your system tray.
Step 3: Identify the Network Problem icon.

a. On the Network Connections window, disable both the Wireless Network Connection and the Local
Area Connection.
Page 11 of 12

b. The system tray now displays the Network Disabled icon, which indicates that network connectivity has
been disabled.
c.
You can click this icon to return to the Network and Sharing Center window (examine the network
diagram at the top).
You can click the red X to have the PC troubleshoot the problem with the network connection.
Troubleshooting attempts to resolve the network issue for you.
d. If troubleshooting did not enable one of your NICs, then you should do this manually to restore the
network connectivity of your PC.
Note: If a network adapter is enabled and the NIC is unable to establish network connectivity, then the
Network Problem icon appears in the system tray.
If this icon appears, you can troubleshoot this issue just like you did in Step 3c.
Reflection
Why would you activate more than one NIC on a PC?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 12 of 12
Linked In!
Objectives
Connect devices using wired and wireless media.
In this activity, you will map your network cabling or technology type ideas to a physical topology.
Because this chapter focuses on the network access layer, you should be able to prepare a basic
physical model. No logical (IP addressing) schemes are required for this activity.
Physical Topology
Background/Scenario
Note: This activity is best completed in groups of 2-3 students.
Your small business is moving to a new location! Your building is brand new and you must come up with
a physical topology so that network port installation can begin.
Page 1 of 2
Linked In!
Your instructor will provide you with a blueprint created for this activity. The area on the blueprint,
indicated by Number 1, is the reception area and the area labeled RR is the restroom area.
All rooms are within Category 6 UTP specifications (328 ft. [100 m]), so you have no concerns about
hard-wiring the building to code. Each room in the diagram must have at least one network connection
available for users/intermediary devices.
With your teammate(s), indicate on the drawing:
Where would you locate your network main distribution facility, while keeping security in mind?
How many intermediary devices would you use and where would you place them?
What kind of cabling you would use (UTP, STP, wireless, fiber optics, etc.) and where would the
ports be placed?
What types of end devices you would use (wired, wireless, laptops, desktops, tablets, etc.)?
Do not go into excessive detail on your design. Just use the content from the chapter to be able to justify
your decisions to the class.
Required Resources
Packet Tracer software
Reflection
1. Where would you locate your network main distribution facility, while keeping security in mind?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
2. How many intermediary devices would you use and where would you place them?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
3. What kind of cabling you would use (UTP, STP, wireless, fiber optics, etc.) and where would the ports be
placed?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
4. What types of end devices you would use (wired, wireless, laptops, desktops, tablets, etc.)?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 2
Join my social circle!

Objectives
Describe the impact of ARP requests on network and host performance.
In this activity, you will discuss the ways in which local addressing (source and destination) is critical to data
communication identification when using messaging, conferencing, emailing, and even gaming.
Background/Scenario
Note: This activity can be completed individually in class or outside of class.
Much of our network communication takes the form of email, messaging (text or instant), video contact, and
social media postings.
For this activity, choose one of the following types of network communications:
Text or instant messaging
Audio/video conferencing
Emailing
Online gaming
Now that you have selected a network communication type, record your answers to the following questions:
1. Is there a procedure you must follow to register others and yourself so that you form a
communications account? Why do you think that a procedure is needed?
2. How do you initiate contact with the person or people with whom you wish to communicate?
3. How do you ensure that your conversations are received only by those with whom you wish to
communicate? Be prepared to discuss your answers in class.
Required Resources
Recording capabilities (paper, tablet, etc.) for reflective comments to be shared with the class
Reflection
1. Is there a procedure you must follow to register others and yourself so that you form a communications
account? Why do you think that a procedure is needed?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 2
Join my social circle!

2. How do you initiate contact with the person or people with whom you wish to communicate?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
3. How do you ensure that your conversations are received only by those with whom you wish to
communicate?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 2
Lab Viewing Network Device MAC Addresses

Topology
Addressing Table
Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
R1
G0/1
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
N/A
N/A
N/A
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
Objectives
Part 1: Set Up the Topology and Initialize Devices
Set up equipment to match the network topology.
Initialize and restart (if necessary) the router and switch.
Part 2: Configure Devices and Verify Connectivity
Assign static IP address to PC-A NIC.
Configure basic information on R1.
Assign a static IP address to R1.
Verify network connectivity.
Part 3: Display, Describe, and Analyze Ethernet MAC Addresses
Analyze MAC address for PC-A.
Analyze MAC addresses for router R1.
Display the MAC address table on switch S1.
Every device on an Ethernet LAN is identified by a Layer-2 MAC address. This address is burned into the
NIC. This lab will explore and analyze the components that make up a MAC address, and how you can find
this information on various networking devices, such as a router, switch, and PC.
You will cable the equipment as shown in the topology. You will then configure the router and PC to match the
addressing table. You will verify your configurations by testing for network connectivity.
After the devices have been configured and network connectivity has been verified, you will use various
commands to retrieve information from the devices to answer questions about your network equipment.
Page 1 of 8

from what is shown in the labs. Refer to the Router Interface Summary Table at the end of this lab for the
correct interface identifiers.
Note: Make sure that the routers and switches have been erased and have no startup configurations. If you
are unsure, contact your instructor.
Required Resources
1 Router (Cisco 1941 with Cisco IOS Release 15.2(4)M3 universal image or comparable)

In Part 1, you will set up the network topology, clear any configurations, if necessary, and configure basic
settings, such as the interface IP addresses on the router and PC.

a. Attach the devices shown in the topology and cable as necessary.
b. Power on all the devices in the topology.
Step 2: Initialize and reload the router and switch.

In Part 2, you will set up the network topology and configure basic settings, such as the interface IP
addresses and device access. For device names and address information, refer to the Topology and
Addressing Table.
Step 1: Configure the IPv4 address for the PC.

a. Configure the IPv4 address, subnet mask, and default gateway address for PC-A.
b. Ping the default gateway address from a PC-A command prompt.
Were the pings successful? Why or why not?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Configure the router.

The configuration of a Cisco router is similar to configuring a Cisco switch. In this step, you will configure the
device name and the IP address and disable DNS lookup on the router.
a. Console into the router and enter global configuration mode.
Router> enable
Router# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line.
Router(config)#
End with CNTL/Z.
Page 2 of 8

b. Assign a hostname to the router based on the Addressing Table.
Router(config)# hostname R1
c.
Disable DNS lookup.

R1(config)# no ip domain-lookup
d. Configure and enable the G0/1 interface on the router.

R1(config)# interface GigabitEthernet0/1
R1(config-if)# ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
R1(config-if)# no shutdown
R1(config-if)# end
*Feb 23 09:06:01.927: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface GigabitEthernet0/1, changed state to
down
*Feb 23 09:06:05.279: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface GigabitEthernet0/1, changed state to
up
*Feb 23 09:06:06.279: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface
GigabitEthernet0/1, changed state to up
Step 3: Verify network connectivity.

Ping the default gateway address of R1 from PC-A.
Were the pings successful?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Part 3: Display, Describe, and Analyze Ethernet MAC Addresses

Every device on an Ethernet LAN has a Media Access Control (MAC) address that is burned into the Network
Interface Card (NIC). Ethernet MAC addresses are 48-bits long. They are displayed using six sets of
hexadecimal digits usually separated by dashes, colons, or periods. The following example shows the same
MAC address using the three different notation methods:
00-05-9A-3C-78-00
00:05:9A:3C:78:00
0005.9A3C.7800
Note: MAC addresses are also called physical addresses, hardware addresses, or Ethernet hardware
addresses.
In Part 3, you will issue commands to display the MAC addresses on a PC, router, and switch, and you will
analyze the properties of each one.
Step 1: Analyze the MAC address for the PC-A NIC.

Before you analyze the MAC address on PC-A, look at an example from a different PC NIC. You can issue
the ipconfig /all command to view the MAC address of your NICs. An example screen output is shown
below. When using the ipconfig /all command, notice that MAC addresses are referred to as physical
addresses. Reading the MAC address from left to right, the first six hex digits refer to the vendor
(manufacturer) of this device. These first six hex digits (3 bytes) are also known as the organizationally unique
identifier (OUI). This 3-byte code is assigned to the vendor by the IEEE organization. To find the
manufacturer, you can use a tool such as www.macvendorlookup.com or go to the IEEE web site to find the
registered OUI vendor codes. The IEEE web site address for OUI information
is http://standards.ieee.org/develop/regauth/oui/public.html. The last six digits are the NIC serial number
assigned by the manufacturer.
a. Using the output from the ipconfig /all command, answer the following questions.
Page 3 of 8
What is the OUI portion of the MAC address for this device?
________________________________________________________________________________
What is the serial number portion of the MAC address for this device?
________________________________________________________________________________
Using the example above, find the name of the vendor that manufactured this NIC.
________________________________________________________________________________
b. From the command prompt on PC-A, issue the ipconfig /all command and identify the OUI portion of the
MAC address for the NIC of PC-A.
________________________________________________________________________________
Identify the serial number portion of the MAC address for the NIC of PC-A.
________________________________________________________________________________
Identify the name of the vendor that manufactured the NIC of PC-A.
________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Analyze the MAC address for the R1 G0/1 interface.

You can use a variety of commands to display MAC addresses on the router.
a. Console into R1 and use the show interfaces g0/1 command to find the MAC address information. A
sample is shown below. Use output generated by your router to answer the questions.
R1# show interfaces g0/1
GigabitEthernet0/1 is up, line protocol is up
Hardware is CN Gigabit Ethernet, address is 30f7.0da3.1821 (bia 30f7.0da3.1821)
Internet address is 192.168.1.1/24
MTU 1500 bytes, BW 100000 Kbit/sec, DLY 100 usec,
reliability 255/255, txload 1/255, rxload 1/255
Encapsulation ARPA, loopback not set
Keepalive set (10 sec)
Full Duplex, 100Mbps, media type is RJ45
output flow-control is unsupported, input flow-control is unsupported
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last input 00:00:00, output 00:00:00, output hang never
Last clearing of "show interface" counters never
Input queue: 0/75/0/0 (size/max/drops/flushes); Total output drops: 0
Queueing strategy: fifo
Output queue: 0/40 (size/max)
5 minute input rate 3000 bits/sec, 4 packets/sec
Page 4 of 8

5 minute output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
15183 packets input, 971564 bytes, 0 no buffer
Received 13559 broadcasts (0 IP multicasts)
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored
0 watchdog, 301 multicast, 0 pause input
1396 packets output, 126546 bytes, 0 underruns
0 output errors, 0 collisions, 1 interface resets
195 unknown protocol drops
0 babbles, 0 late collision, 0 deferred
0 lost carrier, 0 no carrier, 0 pause output
0 output buffer failures, 0 output buffers swapped out
What is the MAC address for G0/1 on R1?

____________________________________________________________________________________
What is the MAC serial number for G0/1?
____________________________________________________________________________________
What is the OUI for G0/1?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Based on this OUI, what is the name of the vendor?
____________________________________________________________________________________
What does bia stand for?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Why does the output show the same MAC address twice?
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. Another way to display the MAC addresses on the router is to use the show arp command. Use the
show arp command to display MAC address information. This command maps the Layer 2 address to its
corresponding Layer 3 address. A sample is shown below. Use output generated by your router to
answer the questions.
R1# show arp
Protocol
Internet
Internet
Address
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.3
Age (min)
0
Hardware Addr
30f7.0da3.1821
c80a.a9fa.de0d
Type
ARPA
ARPA
Interface
GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/1
What Layer 2 addresses are displayed on R1?

____________________________________________________________________________________
What Layer 3 addresses are displayed on R1?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Why do you think there is no information showing for the switch with the show arp command?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 3: View the MAC addresses on the switch.

a. Console into the switch and use the show interfaces command for ports 5 and 6 to display MAC address
information. A sample is shown below. Use output generated by your switch to answer the questions.
Page 5 of 8

Switch> show interfaces f0/5
FastEthernet0/5 is up, line protocol is up (connected)
Hardware is Fast Ethernet, address is 0cd9.96e8.7285 (bia 0cd9.96e8.7285)
MTU 1500 bytes, BW 100000 Kbit, DLY 100 usec,
Full-duplex, 100Mb/s, media type is 10/100BaseTX
input flow-control is off, output flow-control is unsupported
Last input 00:00:45, output 00:00:00, output hang never
Received 265 broadcasts (241 multicasts)
0 input packets with dribble condition detected
0 lost carrier, 0 no carrier, 0 PAUSE output
What is the MAC address for F0/5 on your switch?

____________________________________________________________________________________
Issue the same command and write down the MAC address for F0/6.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Are the OUIs shown on the switch the same as those that were displayed on the router?
____________________________________________________________________________________
The switch keeps track of devices by their Layer 2 MAC addresses. In our topology, the switch has
knowledge of both MAC address of R1 and the MAC address of PC-A.
b. Issue the show mac address-table command on the switch. A sample is shown below. Use output
generated by your switch to answer the questions.
Switch> show mac address-table
Mac Address Table
------------------------------------------Vlan
---All
All
Mac Address
----------0100.0ccc.cccc
0100.0ccc.cccd
Type
-------STATIC
STATIC
Ports
----CPU
CPU
Page 6 of 8

All
0180.c200.0000
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.0001
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.0002
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.0003
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.0004
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.0005
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.0006
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.0007
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.0008
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.0009
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.000a
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.000b
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.000c
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.000d
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.000e
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.000f
STATIC
CPU
All
0180.c200.0010
STATIC
CPU
All
ffff.ffff.ffff
STATIC
CPU
1
30f7.0da3.1821
DYNAMIC
Fa0/5
1
c80a.a9fa.de0d
DYNAMIC
Fa0/6
Total Mac Addresses for this criterion: 22
Did the switch display the MAC address of PC-A? If you answered yes, what port was it on?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Did the switch display the MAC address of R1? If you answered yes, what port was it on?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Reflection
1. Can you have broadcasts at the Layer 2 level? If so, what would the MAC address be?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why would you need to know the MAC address of a device?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 7 of 8

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Page 8 of 8
Lab Using Wireshark to Examine Ethernet Frames

Topology
Objectives
Part 1: Examine the Header Fields in an Ethernet II Frame
Part 2: Use Wireshark to Capture and Analyze Ethernet Frames
When upper layer protocols communicate with each other, data flows down the Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI) layers and is encapsulated into a Layer 2 frame. The frame composition is dependent
on the media access type. For example, if the upper layer protocols are TCP and IP and the media access is
Ethernet, then the Layer 2 frame encapsulation will be Ethernet II. This is typical for a LAN environment.
When learning about Layer 2 concepts, it is helpful to analyze frame header information. In the first part of this
lab, you will review the fields contained in an Ethernet II frame. In Part 2, you will use Wireshark to capture
and analyze Ethernet II frame header fields for local and remote traffic.
Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with Internet access with Wireshark installed)
Part 1: Examine the Header Fields in an Ethernet II Frame

In Part 1, you will examine the header fields and content in an Ethernet II Frame. A Wireshark capture will be
used to examine the contents in those fields.
Step 1: Review the Ethernet II header field descriptions and lengths.
Preamble
Destination
Address
Source
Address
Frame
Type
Data
FCS
8 Bytes
6 Bytes
6 Bytes
2 Bytes
46 1500 Bytes
4 Bytes
Step 2: Examine the network configuration of the PC.

This PC host IP address is 10.20.164.22 and the default gateway has an IP address of 10.20.164.17.
Page 1 of 7
Step 3: Examine Ethernet frames in a Wireshark capture.

The Wireshark capture below shows the packets generated by a ping being issued from a PC host to its
default gateway. A filter has been applied to Wireshark to view the ARP and ICMP protocols only. The
session begins with an ARP query for the MAC address of the gateway router, followed by four ping requests
and replies.
Step 4: Examine the Ethernet II header contents of an ARP request.

The following table takes the first frame in the Wireshark capture and displays the data in the Ethernet II
header fields.
Page 2 of 7
Field
Value
Description
Preamble
Not shown in capture
This field contains synchronizing bits, processed by the NIC

hardware.
Destination Address
Broadcast
(ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff)
Source Address
Dell_24:2a:60
(5c:26:0a:24:2a:60)
Layer 2 addresses for the frame. Each address is 48 bits

long, or 6 octets, expressed as 12 hexadecimal digits, 09,A-F.
A common format is 12:34:56:78:9A:BC.
The first six hex numbers indicate the manufacturer of the
network interface card (NIC), the last six hex numbers are
the serial number of the NIC.
The destination address may be a broadcast, which contains
all ones, or a unicast. The source address is always unicast.
Frame Type
0x0806
For Ethernet II frames, this field contains a hexadecimal

value that is used to indicate the type of upper-layer protocol
in the data field. There are numerous upper-layer protocols
supported by Ethernet II. Two common frame types are:
Value
Description
0x0800 IPv4 Protocol
0x0806
Address resolution protocol (ARP)
Data
ARP
Contains the encapsulated upper-level protocol. The data

field is between 46 1,500 bytes.
FCS
Not shown in capture
Frame Check Sequence, used by the NIC to identify errors

during transmission. The value is computed by the sending
machine, encompassing frame addresses, type, and data
field. It is verified by the receiver.
What is significant about the contents of the destination address field?

_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Why does the PC send out a broadcast ARP prior to sending the first ping request?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
What is the MAC address of the source in the first frame? _______________________
What is the Vendor ID (OUI) of the Sources NIC? __________________________
What portion of the MAC address is the OUI?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
What is the Sources NIC serial number? _________________________________
Part 2: Use Wireshark to Capture and Analyze Ethernet Frames

In Part 2, you will use Wireshark to capture local and remote Ethernet frames. You will then examine the
information that is contained in the frame header fields.
Page 3 of 7
Step 1: Determine the IP address of the default gateway on your PC.

Open a command prompt window and issue the ipconfig command.
What is the IP Address of the PC Default Gateway? ________________________
Step 2: Start capturing traffic on your PCs NIC.

a. Open Wireshark.
b. On the Wireshark Network Analyzer toolbar, click the Interface List icon.
c.
On the Wireshark: Capture Interfaces window, select the interface to start traffic capturing by clicking the
appropriate check box, and then click Start. If you are uncertain of what interface to check, click Details
for more information about each interface listed.
d. Observe the traffic that appears in the Packet List window.
Step 3: Filter Wireshark to display only ICMP traffic.

You can use the filter in Wireshark to block visibility of unwanted traffic. The filter does not block the capture
of unwanted data; it only filters what to display on the screen. For now, only ICMP traffic is to be displayed.
In the Wireshark Filter box, type icmp. The box should turn green if you typed the filter correctly. If the box is
green, click Apply to apply the filter.
Page 4 of 7
Step 4: From the command prompt window, ping the default gateway of your PC.
From the command window, ping the default gateway using the IP address that you recorded in Step 1.
Step 5: Stop capturing traffic on the NIC.

Click the Stop Capture icon to stop capturing traffic.
Step 6: Examine the first Echo (ping) request in Wireshark.

The Wireshark main window is divided into three sections: the Packet List pane (top), the Packet Details pane
(middle), and the Packet Bytes pane (bottom). If you selected the correct interface for packet capturing in
Step 3, Wireshark should display the ICMP information in the Packet List pane of Wireshark, similar to the
following example.
a. In the Packet List pane (top section), click the first frame listed. You should see Echo (ping) request
under the Info heading. This should highlight the line blue.
b. Examine the first line in the Packet Details pane (middle section). This line displays the length of the
frame; 74 bytes in this example.
c.
The second line in the Packet Details pane shows that it is an Ethernet II frame. The source and
destination MAC addresses are also displayed.
What is the MAC address of the PCs NIC? ________________________
What is the default gateways MAC address? ______________________
d. You can click the plus (+) sign at the beginning of the second line to obtain more information about the
Ethernet II frame. Notice that the plus sign changes to a minus (-) sign.
Page 5 of 7

What type of frame is displayed? ________________________________
e. The last two lines displayed in the middle section provide information about the data field of the frame.
Notice that the data contains the source and destination IPv4 address information.
What is the source IP address? _________________________________
What is the destination IP address? ______________________________
f.
You can click any line in the middle section to highlight that part of the frame (hex and ASCII) in the
Packet Bytes pane (bottom section). Click the Internet Control Message Protocol line in the middle
section and examine what is highlighted in the Packet Bytes pane.
What do the last two highlighted octets spell? ______

g. Click the next frame in the top section and examine an Echo reply frame. Notice that the source and
destination MAC addresses have reversed, because this frame was sent from the default gateway router
as a reply to the first ping.
What device and MAC address is displayed as the destination address?
___________________________________________
Step 7: Restart packet capture in Wireshark.

Click the Start Capture icon to start a new Wireshark capture. You will receive a popup window asking if you
would like to save the previous captured packets to a file before starting a new capture. Click Continue
without Saving.
Page 6 of 7
Step 8: In the command prompt window, ping www.cisco.com.

Step 9: Stop capturing packets.
Step 10: Examine the new data in the packet list pane of Wireshark.
In the first echo (ping) request frame, what are the source and destination MAC addresses?
Source: _________________________________
Destination: ______________________________
What are the source and destination IP addresses contained in the data field of the frame?
Source: _________________________________
Destination: ______________________________
Compare these addresses to the addresses you received in Step 7. The only address that changed is the
destination IP address. Why has the destination IP address changed, while the destination MAC address
remained the same?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Reflection
Wireshark does not display the preamble field of a frame header. What does the preamble contain?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 7 of 7
Lab Observing ARP with the Windows CLI, IOS CLI, and
Wireshark
Topology
Addressing Table
Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
R1
G0/1
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
192.168.1.11
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
S2
VLAN 1
192.168.1.12
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
PC-B
NIC
192.168.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
Objectives
Part 1: Build and Configure the Network
Part 2: Use the Windows ARP Command
Part 3: Use the IOS Show ARP Command
Part 4: Use Wireshark to Examine ARP Exchanges
The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is used by TCP/IP to map a Layer 3 IP address to a Layer 2 MAC
address. When a frame is placed on the network, it must have a destination MAC address. To dynamically
Page 1 of 11
Lab Observing ARP with the Windows CLI, IOS CLI and Wireshark
discover the MAC address for the destination device, an ARP request is broadcast on the LAN. The device
that contains the destination IP address responds, and the MAC address is recorded in the ARP cache. Every
device on the LAN keeps its own ARP cache, or small area in RAM that holds ARP results. An ARP cache
timer removes ARP entries that have not been used for a certain period of time.
ARP is an excellent example of performance tradeoff. With no cache, ARP must continually request address
translations each time a frame is placed on the network. This adds latency to the communication and could
congest the LAN. Conversely, unlimited hold times could cause errors with devices that leave the network or
change the Layer 3 address.
A network administrator should be aware of ARP, but may not interact with the protocol on a regular basis.
ARP is a protocol that enables network devices to communicate with the TCP/IP protocol. Without ARP, there
is no efficient method to build the datagram Layer 2 destination address. Also, ARP is a potential security risk.
ARP spoofing, or ARP poisoning, is a technique used by an attacker to inject the wrong MAC address
association in a network. An attacker forges the MAC address of a device, and frames are sent to the wrong
destination. Manually configuring static ARP associations is one way to prevent ARP spoofing. Finally, an
authorized MAC address list may be configured on Cisco devices to restrict network access to only approved
devices.
In this lab, you will use the ARP commands in both Windows and Cisco routers to display the ARP table. You
will also clear the ARP cache and add static ARP entries.
Required Resources
2 PCs (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with terminal emulation program, such as Tera Term and Wireshark
installed)
Note: The Fast Ethernet interfaces on Cisco 2960 switches are autosensing and an Ethernet straight-through
cable may be used between switches S1 and S2. If using another Cisco switch model, it may be necessary to
use an Ethernet crossover cable.
Page 2 of 11

Step 1: Cable the network according to the topology.
Step 2: Configure the IP addresses for the devices according to the Addressing Table.
Step 3: Verify network connectivity by pinging all the devices from PC-B.
Part 2: Use the Windows ARP Command

The arp command allows the user to view and modify the ARP cache in Windows. You access this command
from the Windows command prompt.
Step 1: Display the ARP cache.

a. Open a command window on PC-A and type arp.
C:\Users\User1> arp
Displays and modifies the IP-to-Physical address translation tables used by
address resolution protocol (ARP).
ARP -s inet_addr eth_addr [if_addr]
ARP -d inet_addr [if_addr]
ARP -a [inet_addr] [-N if_addr] [-v]
-a
-g
-v
inet_addr
-N if_addr
-d
-s
eth_addr
if_addr
Displays current ARP entries by interrogating the current

protocol data. If inet_addr is specified, the IP and Physical
addresses for only the specified computer are displayed. If
more than one network interface uses ARP, entries for each ARP
table are displayed.
Same as -a.
Displays current ARP entries in verbose mode. All invalid
entries and entries on the loop-back interface will be shown.
Specifies an internet address.
Displays the ARP entries for the network interface specified
by if_addr.
Deletes the host specified by inet_addr. inet_addr may be
wildcarded with * to delete all hosts.
Adds the host and associates the Internet address inet_addr
with the Physical address eth_addr. The Physical address is
given as 6 hexadecimal bytes separated by hyphens. The entry
is permanent.
Specifies a physical address.
If present, this specifies the Internet address of the
interface whose address translation table should be modified.
If not present, the first applicable interface will be used.
Example:
> arp -s 157.55.85.212
> arp -a
00-aa-00-62-c6-09
.... Adds a static entry.

.... Displays the arp table.
Page 3 of 11
b. Examine the output.
What command would be used to display all entries in the ARP cache? ___________________________
What command would be used to delete all ARP cache entries (flush ARP cache)? _________________
What command would be used to delete the ARP cache entry for 192.168.1.11?
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
Type arp a to display the ARP table.

C:\Users\User1> arp a
Interface: 192.168.1.3 --- 0xb
Internet Address
Physical Address
192.168.1.1
d4-8c-b5-ce-a0-c1
192.168.1.255
ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff
224.0.0.22
01-00-5e-00-00-16
224.0.0.252
01-00-5e-00-00-fc
239.255.255.250
01-00-5e-7f-ff-fa
Type
dynamic
static
static
static
static
Note: The ARP table is empty if you use Windows XP (as displayed below).
C:\Documents and Settings\User1> arp -a
No ARP Entries Found.
d. Ping from PC-A to PC-B to dynamically add entries in the ARP cache.
C:\Documents and Settings\User1> ping 192.168.1.2
Interface: 192.168.1.3 --- 0xb
Internet Address
Physical Address
192.168.1.2
00-50-56-be-f6-db
Type
dynamic
What is the physical address for the host with IP address of 192.168.1.2? _________________________
Step 2: Adjust entries in the ARP cache manually.

To delete entries in ARP cache, issue the command arp d {inet-addr | *}. Addresses can be deleted
individually by specifying the IP address, or all entries can be deleted with the wildcard *.
Verify that the ARP cache contains the following entries: the R1 G0/1 default gateway (192.168.1.1), PC-B
(192.168.1.2) and both switches (192.168.1.11 and 192.168.1.12).
a. From PC-A, ping all the addresses in the Address Table.
b. Verify that all the addresses have been added to the ARP cache. If the address is not in ARP cache, ping
the destination address and verify that the address was added to the ARP cache.
Interface: 192.168.1.3 --- 0xb
Internet Address
Physical Address
192.168.1.1
d4-8c-b5-ce-a0-c1
192.168.1.2
00-50-56-be-f6-db
192.168.1.11
0c-d9-96-e8-8a-40
192.168.1.12
0c-d9-96-d2-40-40
192.168.1.255
ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff
224.0.0.22
01-00-5e-00-00-16
Type
dynamic
dynamic
dynamic
dynamic
static
static
Page 4 of 11
224.0.0.252
239.255.255.250
c.
01-00-5e-00-00-fc
01-00-5e-7f-ff-fa
static
static
As an administrator, access the command prompt. Click the Start icon, and in the Search programs and
file box, type cmd. When the cmd icon appears, right-click the icon and select Run as administrator.
Click Yes to allow this program to make changes.
Note: For Windows XP users, it is not necessary to have administrator privileges to modify ARP cache
entries.
d. In the Administrator command prompt window, type arp d *. This command deletes all the ARP cache
entries. Verify that all the ARP cache entries are deleted by typing arp a at the command prompt.
C:\windows\system32> arp d *
C:\windows\system32> arp a
No ARP Entries Found.
e. Wait a few minutes. The Neighbor Discovery protocol starts to populate the ARP cache again.
Interface: 192.168.1.3 --- 0xb
Internet Address
Physical Address
192.168.1.255
ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff
Type
static
Note: The Neighbor Discovery protocol is not implemented in Windows XP.
Page 5 of 11
f.
From PC-A, ping PC-B (192.168.1.2) and the switches (192.168.1.11 and 192.168.1.12) to add the ARP
entries. Verify that the ARP entries have been added to the cache.
Interface: 192.168.1.3 --- 0xb
Internet Address
Physical Address
192.168.1.2
00-50-56-be-f6-db
192.168.1.11
0c-d9-96-e8-8a-40
192.168.1.12
0c-d9-96-d2-40-40
192.168.1.255
ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff
Type
dynamic
dynamic
dynamic
static
g. Record the physical address for switch S2. _________________________________________________

h. Delete a specific ARP cache entry by typing arp d inet-addr. At the command prompt, type arp -d
192.168.1.12 to delete the ARP entry for S2.
C:\windows\system32> arp d 192.168.1.12
i.
Type arp a to verify that the ARP entry for S2 has been removed from the ARP cache.
Interface: 192.168.1.3 --- 0xb
Internet Address
Physical Address
192.168.1.2
00-50-56-be-f6-db
192.168.1.11
0c-d9-96-e8-8a-40
192.168.1.255
ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff
j.
Type
dynamic
dynamic
static
You can add a specific ARP cache entry by typing arp s inet_addr mac_addr. The IP address and
MAC address for S2 will be used in this example. Use the MAC address recorded in step g.
C:\windows\system32> arp s 192.168.1.12 0c-d9-96-d2-40-40
k.
Verify that the ARP entry for S2 has been added to the cache.
Part 3: Use the IOS show arp Command

The Cisco IOS can also display the ARP cache on routers and switches with the show arp or show ip arp
command.
Step 1: Display ARP entries on router R1.

R1# show arp
Protocol
Internet
Internet
Internet
Address
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.2
192.168.1.3
Age (min)
0
0
Hardware Addr
d48c.b5ce.a0c1
0050.56be.f6db
0050.56be.768c
Type
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
Interface
GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/1
R1#
Notice there is no Age (-) for the first entry, router interface G0/1 (the LAN default gateway). The Age is
the number of minutes (min) that the entry has been in ARP cache and is incremented for the other
entries. The Neighbor Discovery protocol populates the PC-A and PC-B IP and MAC address ARP
entries.
Step 2: Add ARP entries on router R1.

You can add ARP entries to the ARP table of the router by pinging other devices.
Page 6 of 11
a. Ping switch S1.
R1# ping 192.168.1.11
Type escape sequence to abort.
Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 192.168.1.11, timeout is 2 seconds:
.!!!!
Success rate is 80 percent (4/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/4 ms
b. Verify that an ARP entry for switch S1 has been added to the ARP table of R1.
R1# show ip arp
Protocol
Internet
Internet
Internet
Internet
R1#
Address
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.2
192.168.1.3
192.168.1.11
Age (min)
6
6
0
Hardware Addr
d48c.b5ce.a0c1
0050.56be.f6db
0050.56be.768c
0cd9.96e8.8a40
Type
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
Interface
GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/1
Hardware Addr
d48c.b5ce.a0c1
0050.56be.f6db
0050.56be.768c
0cd9.96e8.8a40
Type
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
Interface
Vlan1
Vlan1
Vlan1
Vlan1
Step 3: Display ARP entries on switch S1.

S1# show ip arp
Protocol
Internet
Internet
Internet
Internet
S1#
Address
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.2
192.168.1.3
192.168.1.11
Age (min)
46
8
8
-
Step 4: Add ARP entries on switch S1.

By pinging other devices, ARP entries can also be added to the ARP table of the switch.
a. From switch S1, ping switch S2.
S1# ping 192.168.1.12
.!!!!
b. Verify that the ARP entry for switch S2 has been added to ARP table of S1.
S1# show ip arp
Protocol
Internet
Internet
Internet
Internet
Internet
S1#
Address
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.2
192.168.1.3
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.12
Age (min)
5
11
11
2
Hardware Addr
d48c.b5ce.a0c1
0050.56be.f6db
0050.56be.768c
0cd9.96e8.8a40
0cd9.96d2.4040
Type
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
Interface
Vlan1
Vlan1
Vlan1
Vlan1
Vlan1
Part 4: Use Wireshark to Examine ARP Exchanges

In Part 4, you will examine ARP exchanges by using Wireshark to capture and evaluate the ARP exchange.
You will also examine network latency caused by ARP exchanges between devices.
Page 7 of 11
Step 1: Configure Wireshark for packet captures.

a. Start Wireshark.
b. Choose the network interface to use for capturing the ARP exchanges.
Step 2: Capture and evaluate ARP communications.

a. Start capturing packets in Wireshark. Use the filter to display only ARP packets.
b. Flush the ARP cache by typing the arp d * command at the command prompt.
c.
Verify that the ARP cache has been cleared.
d. Send a ping to the default gateway, using the ping 192.168.1.1 command.
e. Stop the Wireshark capture after pinging to the default gateway is finished.
f.
Examine the Wireshark captures for the ARP exchanges in the packet details pane.
What was the first ARP packet? ___________________________
Fill in the following table with information about your first captured ARP packet.
Field
Value
Sender MAC address

Sender IP address
Target MAC address
Target IP address
What was the second ARP packet? ______________________________
Page 8 of 11
Fill in the following table with information about your second captured ARP packet.
Field
Value
Sender MAC address

Sender IP address
Target MAC address
Target IP address
Step 3: Examine network latency caused by ARP.

a. Clear the ARP entries on PC-A.
b. Start a Wireshark capture.
c.
Ping switch S2 (192.168.1.12). The ping should be successful after the first echo request.
Note: If all the pings were successful, S1 should be reloaded to observe network latency with ARP.
C:\Users\User1> ping 192.168.1.12
Request timed out.
Reply from 192.168.1.12: bytes=32 time=2ms TTL=255
Ping statistics for 192.168.1.12:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 3, Lost = 1 (25% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Page 9 of 11
Minimum = 1ms, Maximum = 3ms, Average = 2ms
d. Stop the Wireshark capture after the pinging is finished. Use the Wireshark filter to display only ARP and
ICMP outputs. In Wireshark, type arp or icmp in the Filter: entry area.
e. Examine the Wireshark capture. In this example, frame 10 is the first ICMP request sent by PC-A to S1.
Because there is no ARP entry for S1, an ARP request was sent to the management IP address of S1
asking for the MAC address. During the ARP exchanges, the echo request did not receive a reply before
the request was timed out. (frames 8 12)
After the ARP entry for S1 was added to the ARP cache, the last three ICMP exchanges were successful,
as displayed in frames 26, 27 and 30 33.
As displayed in the Wireshark capture, ARP is an excellent example of performance tradeoff. With no
cache, ARP must continually request address translations each time a frame is placed on the network.
This adds latency to the communication and could congest the LAN.
Reflection
1. How and when are static ARP entries removed?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why do you want to add static ARP entries in the cache?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3. If ARP requests can cause network latency, why is it a bad idea to have unlimited hold times for ARP entries?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 10 of 11

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Page 11 of 11
Lab - Using IOS CLI with Switch MAC Address Tables

Topology
Addressing Table
Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
R1
G0/1
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
192.168.1.11
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
S2
VLAN 1
192.168.1.12
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
PC-B
NIC
192.168.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
Objectives
Cable the network according to the topology diagram.
Configure the network devices according to the Addressing Table.
Part 2: Examine the Switch MAC Address Table
Use show commands to observe the process of building the switch MAC address table.
The purpose of a Layer 2 LAN switch is to deliver Ethernet frames to host devices on the local network. The
switch records host MAC addresses that are visible on the network, and maps those MAC addresses to its
own Ethernet switch ports. This process is called building the MAC address table. When a switch receives a
frame from a PC, it examines the frames source and destination MAC addresses. The source MAC address
Page 1 of 5

is recorded and mapped to the switch port from which it arrived. Then the destination MAC address is looked
up in the MAC address table. If the destination MAC address is a known address, then the frame is forwarded
out of the corresponding switch port of the MAC address. If the MAC address is unknown, then the frame is
broadcast out of all switch ports, except the one from which it came. It is important to observe and understand
the function of a switch and how it delivers data on the network. The way a switch operates has implications
for network administrators whose job it is to ensure secure and consistent network communication.
Switches are used to interconnect and deliver information to computers on local area networks. Switches
deliver Ethernet frames to host devices identified by network interface card MAC addresses.
In Part 1, you will build a multi-switch and router topology with a trunk linking the two switches. In Part 2, you
will ping various devices and observe how the two switches build their MAC address tables.
IOS Release 15.0(2) (lanbasek9 image). Other routers, switches and Cisco IOS versions can be used.
are unsure contact your instructor.
Required Resources
Note: The Fast Ethernet interfaces on Cisco 2960 switches are autosensing and an Ethernet straight-through
cable may be used between switches S1 and S2. If using another model Cisco switch, it may be necessary to

Step 1: Cable the network according to the topology.
Step 2: Configure PC hosts.
Step 3: Initialize and reload the routers and switches as necessary.
Step 4: Configure basic settings for each switch.
a. Configure device name as shown in the topology.
b. Configure IP address and default gateway as listed in Addressing Table.
c.
Assign cisco as the console and vty passwords.
d. Assign class as the privileged EXEC password.
Page 2 of 5
Step 5: Configure basic settings for the router.

a. Disable DNS lookup.
b. Configure IP address for the router as listed in Addressing Table.
c.
Configure device name as shown in the topology.
d. Assign cisco as the console and vty passwords.

e. Assign class as the privileged EXEC password.
Part 2: Examine the Switch MAC Address Table

A switch learns MAC addresses and builds the MAC address table, as network devices initiate
communication on the network.
Step 1: Record network device MAC addresses.

a. Open a command prompt on PC-A and PC-B and type ipconfig /all. What are the Ethernet adapter
physical addresses?
PC-A MAC Address: ___________________________________________________________________
PC-B MAC Address: ___________________________________________________________________
b. Console into router R1 and type the show interface G0/1 command. What is the hardware address?
R1 Gigabit Ethernet 0/1 MAC Address: ____________________________________________________
c.
Console into switch S1 and S2 and type the show interface F0/1 command on each switch. On the
second line of command output, what is the hardware addresses (or burned-in address [bia])?
S1 Fast Ethernet 0/1 MAC Address: ______________________________________________________
S2 Fast Ethernet 0/1 MAC Address: ______________________________________________________
Step 2: Display the switch MAC address table.

Console into switch S2 and view the MAC address table, both before and after running network
communication tests with ping.
a. Establish a console connection to S2 and enter privileged EXEC mode.
b. In privileged EXEC mode, type the show mac address-table command and press Enter.
S2# show mac address-table
Even though there has been no network communication initiated across the network (i.e., no use of ping),
it is possible that the switch has learned MAC addresses from its connection to the PC and the other
switch.
Are there any MAC addresses recorded in the MAC address table?
____________________________________________________________________________________
What MAC addresses are recorded in the table? To which switch ports are they mapped and to which
devices do they belong? Ignore MAC addresses that are mapped to the CPU.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 5

If you had not previously recorded MAC addresses of network devices in Step 1, how could you tell which
devices the MAC addresses belong to, using only the output from the show mac address-table
command? Does it work in all scenarios?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 3: Clear the S2 MAC address table and display the MAC address table again.
a. In privileged EXEC mode, type the clear mac address-table dynamic command and press Enter.
S2# clear mac address-table dynamic
b. Quickly type the show mac address-table command again. Does the MAC address table have any
addresses in it for VLAN 1? Are there other MAC addresses listed?
___________________________________________________________________________________
Wait 10 seconds, type the show mac address-table command, and press Enter. Are there new
addresses in the MAC address table? __________________
Step 4: From PC-B, ping the devices on the network and observe the switch MAC address
table.
a. From PC-B, open a command prompt and type arp -a. Not including multicast or broadcast addresses,
how many device IP-to-MAC address pairs have been learned by ARP?
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. From the PC-B command prompt, ping the router/gateway R1, PC-A, S1, and S2. Did all devices have
successful replies? If not, check your cabling and IP configurations.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
From a console connection to S2, enter the show mac address-table command. Has the switch added
additional MAC addresses to the MAC address table? If so, which addresses and devices?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
From PC-B, open a command prompt and retype arp -a. Does the PC-B ARP cache have additional
entries for all network devices that were sent pings?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Reflection
On Ethernet networks, data is delivered to devices by their MAC addresses. For this to happen, switches and
PCs dynamically build ARP caches and MAC address tables. With only a few computers on the network this
process seems fairly easy. What might be some of the challenges on larger networks?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 5

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Page 5 of 5
MAC and choose

Objectives
Explain basic switching concepts.
In this activity, you will indicate your knowledge of Ethernet technology by successfully comparing legacy
to current standards. You will speculate on potential future Ethernet technology standards, and explain
why MAC addresses and framing formats have stayed basically the same, in order to assist data
transmission, during Ethernets evolution.
Background/Scenario
Please view the video, The History of Ethernet, located at the following link:
http://www.netevents.tv/video/bob-metcalfe-the-history-of-ethernet
Topics discussed in the video include not only where we have come from in Ethernet development, but
where we are going with Ethernet technology in the future!
1. After viewing the video and comparing its contents to Chapter 10, go to the web and search for
information about Ethernet:
How was Ethernet used when it was first developed?
How has Ethernet stayed the same over the past 25 years? What changes are being made
to make it more useful and applicable to todays data transmission methods?
2. Collect three pictures of old, current, and possible future Ethernet physical media and devices.
Focus your search on switches if possible. Share these pictures with the class and discuss:
How have Ethernet physical media and intermediary devices changed?
How have Ethernet physical media and intermediary devices stayed the same?
How do you think the Ethernet will change in the future? What factors could influence these
changes?
Required Resources
Internet access to video, History of Ethernet, located at: http://www.netevents.tv/video/bob-metcalfe-thehistory-of-ethernet
Hard- or soft-copy media for recording answers to questions and for in-class sharing.
Reflection
1. How was Ethernet used when it was first developed?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
2. How has Ethernet stayed the same over the past 25 years? What changes are being made to make it
more useful and applicable to todays data transmission methods?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 2
MAC and choose

3. How have Ethernet physical media and intermediary devices changed?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
4. How have Ethernet physical media and intermediary devices stayed the same?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
5. How do you think the Ethernet will change in the future? What factors could influence these changes?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 2
The road less traveledor is it?

Objectives
Explain how network devices use routing tables to direct packets to a destination network.
In this activity, you will visualize how a hop-by-hop routing paradigm, with correct path selection at each
hop, results in a successful delivery of packets. You will recognize that each router on the path must have
correct knowledge about the destination network, and that path towards that network, to deliver packets
over the shortest path.
Background/Scenario
During the upcoming weekend, you decide to visit a schoolmate who is currently at home sick. You know
his street address but you have never been to his town before. Instead of looking up the address on the
map, you decide to take it easy and to simply ask town residents for directions after you arrive by train.
The citizens you ask for directions are very helpful. However, they all have an interesting habit. Instead of
explaining the entire route to your destination, they all tell you, Take this road and as soon as you arrive
at the nearest crossroad, ask somebody there again. Somewhat bemused at this apparent oddity, you
follow these instructions and finally arrive, crossroad by crossroad, and road by road, at your friends
house.
Answer the following questions:
1. Would it have made a significant difference if you were told about the whole route or a larger part
of the route instead of just being directed to the nearest crossroad?
2. Would it have been more helpful to ask about the specific street address or just about the street
name? What would happen if the person you asked for directions did not know where the
destination street was or directed you through an incorrect road?
3. Assuming that on your way back home, you again choose to ask residents for directions. Would it
be guaranteed that you would be directed via the same route you took to get to your friends
home? Explain your answer.
4. Is it necessary to explain where you depart from when asking directions to an intended
destination?
Reflection
1. Would it have made a significant difference if you were told about the whole route or a larger part of the
route instead of just being directed to the nearest crossroad?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
2. Would it have been more helpful to ask about the specific street address or just about the street name?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 2
The road less traveledor is it?

3. What would happen if the person you asked for directions did not know where the destination street was
or directed you through an incorrect road?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
4. Assuming that on your way back home, you again choose to ask residents for directions. Is it guaranteed
that you will be directed via the same route you took to get to your friends home? Explain your answer.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
5. Is it necessary to explain where you depart from when asking directions to an intended destination?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 2
Lab - Viewing Host Routing Tables

Topology
Objectives
Part 1: Access the Host Routing Table
Part 2: Examine IPv4 Host Routing Table Entries
To access a resource on a network, your host will determine the route to the destination host using its routing
table. The host routing table is similar to that of a router, but is specific to the local host and much less
complex. For a packet to reach a local destination, the local host routing table is required. To reach a remote
destination, both the local host routing table and the router routing table are required. The netstat r and
route print commands provide insight into how your local host routes packets to the destination.
In this lab, you will display and examine the information in the host routing table of your PC using the netstat
r and route print commands. You will determine how packets will be routed by your PC depending on the
destination address.
Note: This lab cannot be completed using Netlab. This lab assumes that you have Internet access.
Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with Internet and command prompt access)
Part 1: Access the Host Routing Table

Step 1: Record your PC information.
On your PC, open a command prompt window and type the ipconfig /all command to display the following
information and record it:
IPv4 Address
MAC Address
Default Gateway
Step 2: Display the routing tables.

In a command prompt window type the netstat r (or route print) command to display the host routing table.
Page 1 of 6
What are the three sections displayed in the output?

_______________________________________________________________________________________
Step 3: Examine the Interface List.

The first section, Interface List, displays the Media Access Control (MAC) addresses and assigned interface
number of every network-capable interface on the host.
Page 2 of 6

The first column is the interface number. The second column is the list of MAC addresses associated with the
network-capable interfaces on the hosts. These interfaces can include Ethernet, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
adapters. The third column shows the manufacturer and a description of the interface.
In this example, the first line displays the wireless interface that is connected to the local network.
Note: If you have a PC with an Ethernet interface and a Wireless adapter enabled, both interfaces would be
listed in the Interface List.
What is the MAC address of the interface connected to your local network? How does the MAC address
compare to the recorded MAC address in Step 1?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The second line is loopback interface. The loopback interface is automatically assigned an IP address of
127.0.0.1 when the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is running on a host.
The last four lines represent transition technology that allows communication in a mixed environment and
includes IPv4 and IPv6.

In Part 2, you will examine the IPv4 host routing table. This table is in the second section as a result of the
netstat r output. It lists all the known IPv4 routes, including direct connections, local network, and local
default routes.
The output is divided in five columns: Network Destination, Netmask, Gateway, Interface, and Metric.
The Network Destination column lists the reachable network. The Network Destination is used with
Netmask to match the destination IP address.
The Netmask lists the subnet mask that the host uses to determine the network and host portions of the
IP address.
The Gateway column lists the address that the host uses to send the packets to a remote network
destination. If a destination is directly connected, the gateway is listed as On-link in the output.
The Interface column lists the IP address that is configured on the local network adaptor. This is used to
forward a packet on the network.
The Metric column lists the cost of using a route. It is used to calculate the best route to a destination. A
preferred route has a lower metric number than other routes listed.
The output displays five different types of active routes:
Page 3 of 6
The local default route 0.0.0.0 is used when the packet does not match other specified addresses in the
routing table. The packet will be sent to the gateway from the PC for further processing. In this example,
the packet will be sent to 192.168.1.1 from 192.168.1.11.
The loopback addresses, 127.0.0.0 127.255.255.255, are related to direct connection and provide
services to the local host.
The addresses for the subnet, 192.168.1.0 192.168.1.255, are all related to the host and the local
network. If the final destination of the packet is in the local network, the packet will exit 192.168.1.11
interface.
-
The local route address 192.168.1.0 represents all devices on the 192.168.1.0/24 network.
The address of the local host is 192.168.1.11.
The network broadcast address 192.168.1.255 is used to send messages to all the hosts on the local
network.
The special multicast class D addresses 224.0.0.0 are reserved for use through either the loopback
interface (127.0.0.1) or the host (192.168.1.11).
The local broadcast address 255.255.255.255 can be used through either the loopback interface
(127.0.0.1) or host (192.168.1.11).
Based on the contents of the IPv4 routing table, if the PC wanted to send a packet to 192.168.1.15, what
would it do and where would it send the packet?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
If the PC wanted to send a packet to a remote host located at 172.16.20.23, what would it do and where
would it send the packet?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________

In Part 3, you will examine the IPv6 routing table. This table is in the third section displayed in the netstat r
output. It lists all the known IPv6 routes including direct connections, local network and local default routes.
Page 4 of 6
The output of the IPv6 Route Table differs in column headings and format because the IPv6 addresses are
128 bits versus only 32 bits for IPv4 addresses. The IPv6 Route Table section displays four columns:
The If column lists the interface numbers of the IPv6-enabled network interfaces from the Interface List
section of the netstat r command.
The Metric column lists the cost of each route to a destination. The lower cost is the preferred route, and
the metric is used to select between multiple routes with the same prefix.
The Network Destination column lists the address prefix for the route.
The Gateway lists the next-hop IPv6 address to reach the destination. On-link is listed as the next-hop
address if it is directly connected to the host.
In this example, the figure displays the IPv6 Route Table section generated by the netstat r command to
reveal the following network destinations:
::/0: This is the IPv6 equivalent of the local default route. The Gateway column provides the link-local
address of the default router.
::1/128: This is equivalent to the IPv4 loopback address and provides services to the local host.
2001::/32: This is the global unicast network prefix.
2001:0:9d38:6ab8:1863:3bca:3f57:fef4/128: This is the global unicast IPv6 address of the local computer.
fe80::/64: This is the local link network route address and represents all computers on the local-link IPv6
network.
fe80::1863:3bca:3f57:fef4/128: This is the link-local IPv6 address of the local computer.
ff00::/8: These are special reserved multicast class D addresses equivalent to the IPv4 224.x.x.x
addresses.
The host routing table for IPv6 has similar information as the IPv4 routing table. What is the local default route
for IPv4 and what is it for IPv6?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
What is the loopback address and subnet mask for IPv4? What is the loopback IP address for IPv6?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
How many IPv6 addresses have been assigned to this PC?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
How many broadcast addresses does the IPv6 routing table contain?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 6
Reflection
1. How is the number of bits for the network indicated for IPv4. How is it done for IPv6?
______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why is there both IPv4 and IPv6 information in the host routing tables?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 6
Lab - Exploring Router Physical Characteristics

Topology
Objectives
Part 1: Examine Router External Characteristics
Identify the various parts of a Cisco router, including:

-
Management ports
LAN interfaces
WAN interfaces
Module expansion slots
Compact Flash memory expansion slots
USB ports
Examine the router activity and status lights.
Part 2: Examine Router Internal Characteristics Using Show Commands
Establish a console connection to the router using Tera Term.
Identify router internal characteristics using the show version command.
Identify router interface characteristics using show interface commands.
In this lab, you will examine the outside of the router to become familiar with its characteristics and
components, such as its power switch, management ports, LAN and WAN interfaces, indicator lights, network
expansion slots, memory expansion slots, and USB ports.
You will also identify the internal components and characteristics of the IOS by consoling into the router and
issuing various commands, such as show version and show interfaces, from the CLI.
Cisco IOS Release 15.2(4)M3 (universalk9 image). Other routers and Cisco IOS versions can be used.
from what is shown in the labs.
Note: Make sure that the routers have been erased and have no startup configurations. If you are unsure,
contact your instructor.
Required Resources
Page 1 of 8
Examine Router External Characteristics

Use the images below, as well as your own direct inspection of the backplane of a Cisco router, to answer the
following questions. Feel free to draw arrows and circle the areas of the image that correctly identify the parts.
Note: The router depicted in the images below is a Cisco 1941 router, which may be different from the make
and model of the routers in your particular academy. You can find device information and specifications for
the Cisco 1941 series routers at the Cisco.com website. Additional information, including answers to many of
the questions below can be found here:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/prod/collateral/routers/ps10538/data_sheet_c78_556319.html
Step 1: Identify the various parts of a Cisco router.

The image shown in this step is of the backplane of a Cisco 1941 ISR. Use it to answer the questions in this
step. In addition, if you are examining a different model router, a space has been provided here for you to
draw the backplane and identify components and interfaces as specified in the questions that follow.
a.
Page 2 of 8

Circle and label the routers power switch. Is the power switch on your router in the same area as the
router depicted in the image?
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. Circle and label the management ports. What are the built-in management ports? Are the management
ports the same on your router? If not, how are they different?
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
Circle and label the routers LAN interfaces. How many LAN interfaces does the router in the image have
and what is the interface technology type? Are the LAN interfaces the same on your router? If not, how
are they different?
____________________________________________________________________________________
d. Circle and label the routers WAN interfaces. How many WAN interfaces does the router in the image
have and what is the interface technology type? Are the WAN interfaces the same on your router? If not,
how are they different?
____________________________________________________________________________________
e. The Cisco 1941 ISR is a modular platform and comes with module expansion slots for varied network
connectivity requirements. Circle and label the module slots. How many module slots are there? How
many are used? What type of module expansion slots are they? Are the module slots the same on your
router? If not, how are they different?
____________________________________________________________________________________
f.
The Cisco 1941 router comes with CompactFlash memory slots for high speed storage. Circle and label
the CompactFlash memory slots. How many memory slots are there? How many are used? How much
memory can they hold? Are the memory slots the same on your router? If not, how are they different?
____________________________________________________________________________________
g. The Cisco 1941 router comes with USB 2.0 ports. The built-in USB ports support eToken devices and
USB flash memory. The USB eToken device feature provides device authentication and secure
configuration of Cisco routers. The USB flash feature provides optional secondary storage capability and
an additional boot device. Circle and label the USB ports. How many USB ports are there? Are there USB
ports on your router?
____________________________________________________________________________________
h. The Cisco 1941 router also comes with a mini-B USB console port. Circle and label the mini-B USB
console port.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Examine the router activity and status lights.

The following images highlight the activity and status lights of the front panel and backplane of a powered up
and connected Cisco 1941 ISR.
Note: Some of the indicator lights are obscured from view in the image of the backplane of the Cisco 1941
router below.
Page 3 of 8
a. In the top image above, examine the indicator lights on the front panel of the router? The lights are
labeled SYS, ACT, and POE. What do the labels refer to? What do the lights in the image indicate about
the status of the router? These labels would be readable if they were not lit.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. In the backplane image above, examine the indicator lights on the router. There are three visible activity
lights, one for each of the connected interfaces and management ports. Examine the interface lights on
your router. How are the lights labeled, and what is their meaning?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 8

c.
Aside from the management ports and network interfaces, what other indicator lights are on the
backplane of the router and what might their purpose be?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Examine Router Internal Characteristics Using Show Commands

Step 1: Establish a console connection to the router and use the show version command.
a. Using Tera Term, console into the router and enter privileged EXEC mode using the enable command:
Router> enable
Router#
b. Display information about the router by using the show version command. Use the Spacebar on the
keyboard to page through the output.
Router# show version
Cisco IOS Software, C1900 Software (C1900-UNIVERSALK9-M), Version 15.2(4)M3, RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc1)
Compiled Thu 26-Jul-12 19:34 by prod_rel_team
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 15.0(1r)M15, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
Router uptime is 1 day, 14 hours, 46 minutes
System restarted at 07:26:55 UTC Mon Dec 3 2012
System image file is "flash0:c1900-universalk9-mz.SPA.152-4.M3.bin"
Last reload type: Normal Reload
Last reload reason: power-on
<output omitted>
If you require further assistance please contact us by sending email to
[email protected].
Cisco CISCO1941/K9 (revision 1.0) with 487424K/36864K bytes of memory.
Processor board ID FGL16082318
2 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces
2 Serial(sync/async) interfaces
1 terminal line
1 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Module
DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.
255K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory.
250880K bytes of ATA System CompactFlash 0 (Read/Write)
<output omitted>
Technology Package License Information for Module:'c1900'
Page 5 of 8
----------------------------------------------------------------Technology
Technology-package
Technology-package
Current
Type
Next reboot
-----------------------------------------------------------------ipbase
ipbasek9
Permanent
ipbasek9
security
securityk9
Permanent
securityk9
data
None
None
None
Configuration register is 0x2102
c.
Based on the output of the show version command, answer the following questions about the router. If
you are examining a different model router, include the information about it here.
1) What is the version of the Cisco IOS and what is the system image filename?
________________________________________________________________________________
2) What is the Bootstrap program version in ROM BIOS?
________________________________________________________________________________
3) How long has the router been running without a restart (also known as its uptime)?
________________________________________________________________________________
4) How much dynamic random-access memory (DRAM) memory does the router have?
________________________________________________________________________________
5) What is the routers processor board ID number?
________________________________________________________________________________
6) What network interfaces does the router have?
________________________________________________________________________________
7) How much CompactFlash memory for IOS storage is there?
________________________________________________________________________________
8) How much nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM) memory for configuration file storage is
there?
________________________________________________________________________________
9) What is the setting of the configuration register?
________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Use the show interface command to examine the network interfaces.
a. Use the show interface gigabitEthernet 0/0 command to see the status of the Gigabit Ethernet 0/0
interface.
Note: After typing part of the command, for example, show interface g, you can use the Tab key on your
keyboard to complete the gigabitEthernet command parameter.
Router# show interface gigabitEthernet 0/0
GigabitEthernet0/0 is administratively down, line protocol is down
Hardware is CN Gigabit Ethernet, address is 442b.031a.b9a0 (bia 442b.031a.b9a0)
Page 6 of 8

Full Duplex, 100Mbps, media type is RJ45
output flow-control is unsupported, input flow-control is unsupported
Last input never, output never, output hang never
0 lost carrier, 0 no carrier, 0 pause output
b. Given the output of the show interface gigabitEthernet 0/0 command depicted above, or using the
output from your router, answer the following questions:
What is the hardware type and MAC address of the Gigabit Ethernet interface?
____________________________________________________________________________________
What is the interface media type? Is the interface up or down?
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
Use the show interfaces serial 0/0/0 command to view the status of the Serial 0/0/0 interface.
Router# show interface serial 0/0/0
Serial0/0/0 is administratively down, line protocol is down
Hardware is WIC MBRD Serial
Encapsulation HDLC, loopback not set
Last input 07:41:21, output never, output hang never
Page 7 of 8

0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored, 0 abort
1 carrier transitions
DCD=down DSR=down DTR=down RTS=down CTS=down
d. Given the output command depicted above, answer the following questions:
What is the frame encapsulation type?
___________________________________________________________________________________
What is the hardware type? Is the interface up or down?
___________________________________________________________________________________
Reflection
1. Why might you need to use an EHWIC expansion slot?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why might you need to upgrade the Flash memory?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3. What is the purpose of the mini-USB port?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4. What is the purpose of the ISM/WLAN indicator light on the backplane of the router? What does it refer to?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 8 of 8
Lab - Building a Switch and Router Network

Topology
Addressing Table
Device
R1
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
G0/0
192.168.0.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
G0/1
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
N/A
N/A
N/A
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
PC-B
NIC
192.168.0.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.0.1
Objectives
Initialize and restart the router and switch.
Assign static IP information to the PC interfaces.
Configure the router.
Part 3: Display Device Information
Retrieve hardware and software information from the network devices.
Interpret the output from the routing table.
Display interface information on the router.
Display a summary list of the interfaces on the router and switch.
This is a comprehensive lab to review previously covered IOS commands. In this lab, you will cable the
equipment as shown in the topology diagram. You will then configure the devices to match the addressing
table. After the configurations have been saved, you will verify your configurations by testing for network
connectivity.
After the devices have been configured and network connectivity has been verified, you will use IOS
commands to retrieve information from the devices to answer questions about your network equipment.
Page 1 of 11

This lab provides minimal assistance with the actual commands necessary to configure the router. However,
the required commands are provided in Appendix A. Test your knowledge by trying to configure the devices
without referring to the appendix.
Note: Ensure that the routers and switches have been erased and have no startup configurations. Refer to
Appendix B for the procedure to initialize and reload a router and switch.
Required Resources
Note: The Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on Cisco 1941 routers are autosensing and an Ethernet straightthrough cable may be used between the router and PC-B. If using another model Cisco router, it may be
necessary to use an Ethernet crossover cable.
Part 1: Set Up Topology and Initialize Devices

a. Attach the devices shown in the topology diagram, and cable, as necessary.
b. Power on all the devices in the topology.

If configuration files were previously saved on the router and switch, initialize and reload these devices back
to their basic configurations. For information on how to initialize and reload these devices, refer to Appendix
B.

addresses, device access, and passwords. Refer to the Topology and Addressing Table at the beginning of
this lab for device names and address information.
Note: Appendix A provides configuration details for the steps in Part 2. You should attempt to complete Part 2
prior to reviewing this appendix.
Step 1: Assign static IP information to the PC interfaces.

a. Configure the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway settings on PC-A.
b. Configure the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway settings on PC-B.
Page 2 of 11

c.
Ping PC-B from a command prompt window on PC-A.

Why were the pings not successful?
____________________________________________________________________________________

a. Console into the router and enable privileged EXEC mode.
b. Enter configuration mode.
c.
Assign a device name to the router.
d. Disable DNS lookup to prevent the router from attempting to translate incorrectly entered commands as
though they were host names.
e. Assign class as the privileged EXEC encrypted password.
f.
Assign cisco as the console password and enable login.
g. Assign cisco as the VTY password and enable login.

h. Encrypt the clear text passwords.
i.
Create a banner that warns anyone accessing the device that unauthorized access is prohibited.
j.
Configure and activate both interfaces on the router.
k.
Configure an interface description for each interface indicating which device is connected to it.
l.
Save the running configuration to the startup configuration file.
m. Set the clock on the router.

Note: Use the question mark (?) to help with the correct sequence of parameters needed to execute this
command.
n. Ping PC-B from a command prompt window on PC-A.
Were the pings successful? Why?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Part 3: Display Device Information

In Part 3, you will use show commands to retrieve information from the router and switch.
Step 1: Retrieve hardware and software information from the network devices.
a. Use the show version command to answer the following questions about the router.
What is the name of the IOS image that the router is running?
____________________________________________________________________________________
How much DRAM memory does the router have?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
How much NVRAM memory does the router have?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 11

How much Flash memory does the router have?
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. Use the show version command to answer the following questions about the switch.
What is the name of the IOS image that the switch is running?
____________________________________________________________________________________
How much dynamic random access memory (DRAM) does the switch have?
____________________________________________________________________________________
How much nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM) does the switch have?
____________________________________________________________________________________
What is the model number of the switch?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Display the routing table on the router.

Use the show ip route command on the router to answer the following questions.
What code is used in the routing table to indicate a directly connected network? _____
How many route entries are coded with a C code in the routing table? _________
What interface types are associated to the C coded routes?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Step 3: Display interface information on the router.

Use the show interface g0/1 to answer the following questions.
What is the operational status of the G0/1 interface?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
What is the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the G0/1 interface?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
How is the Internet address displayed in this command?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Step 4: Display a summary list of the interfaces on the router and switch.
There are several commands that can be used to verify an interface configuration. One of the most useful of
these is the show ip interface brief command. The command output displays a summary list of the
interfaces on the device and provides immediate feedback to the status of each interface.
a. Enter the show ip interface brief command on the router.
R1# show ip interface brief
Interface
Embedded-Service-Engine0/0
GigabitEthernet0/0
GigabitEthernet0/1
Serial0/0/0
Serial0/0/1
R1#
IP-Address
unassigned
192.168.0.1
192.168.1.1
unassigned
unassigned
OK?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Method
unset
manual
manual
unset
unset
Status
Protocol
administratively down down
up
up
up
up
Page 4 of 11

b. Enter the show ip interface brief command on the switch.
Switch# show ip interface brief
Interface
Vlan1
FastEthernet0/1
FastEthernet0/2
FastEthernet0/3
FastEthernet0/4
FastEthernet0/5
FastEthernet0/6
FastEthernet0/7
FastEthernet0/8
FastEthernet0/9
FastEthernet0/10
FastEthernet0/11
FastEthernet0/12
FastEthernet0/13
FastEthernet0/14
FastEthernet0/15
FastEthernet0/16
FastEthernet0/17
FastEthernet0/18
FastEthernet0/19
FastEthernet0/20
FastEthernet0/21
FastEthernet0/22
FastEthernet0/23
FastEthernet0/24
GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/2
Switch#
IP-Address
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
OK?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Method
manual
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
Status
up
down
down
down
down
up
up
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
Protocol
up
down
down
down
down
up
up
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
Reflection
1. If the G0/1 interface showed administratively down, what interface configuration command would you use to
turn the interface up?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. What would happen if you had incorrectly configured interface G0/1 on the router with an IP address of
192.168.1.2?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 11

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Note: To find out how the router is configured, look at the interfaces to identify the router type and how many
Appendix A: Configuration Details for Steps in Part 2

Step 1: Configure the PC interfaces.
Page 6 of 11
c.
Ping PC-B from a command prompt window on PC-A.

Router> enable
Router#
Router# conf t
End with CNTL/Z.
Router(config)#
c.

R1(config)# enable secret class
f.

R1(config)# line con 0
R1(config-line)# password cisco
R1(config-line)# login
Page 7 of 11

R1(config-line)# exit
R1(config)#
g. Assign cisco as the vty password and enable login.
R1(config)# line
R1(config-line)#
R1(config-line)#
R1(config-line)#
R1(config)#
vty 0 4
password cisco
login
exit
h. Encrypt the clear text passwords.

R1(config)# service password-encryption
i.
R1(config)# banner motd #
Enter TEXT message. End with the character '#'.
Unauthorized access prohibited!
#
R1(config)#
j.
Configure and activate both interfaces on the router.

R1(config)# int g0/0
R1(config-if)# description Connection to PC-B.
R1(config-if)# no shut
R1(config-if)#
*Nov 29 23:49:44.195: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface GigabitEthernet0/0, changed state to
down
up
*Nov 29 23:49:48.863: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface
R1(config-if)# int g0/1

R1(config-if)# description Connection to S1.
R1(config-if)# exit
R1(config)# exit
down
up
*Nov 29 23:50:19.863: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface
R1#
k.
Save the running configuration to the startup file.

R1# copy running-config startup-config
Destination filename [startup-config]?
Page 8 of 11

[OK]
R1#
l.
Set the clock on the router.

R1# clock set 17:00:00 29 Nov 2012
R1#
*Nov 29 17:00:00.000: %SYS-6-CLOCKUPDATE: System clock has been updated from 23:55:46
UTC Thu Nov 29 2012 to 17:00:00 UTC Thu Nov 29 2012, configured from console by
console.
R1#
Note: Use the question mark (?) to help determine the correct sequence of the parameters needed to
execute this command.
m. Ping PC-B from a command prompt window on PC-A.
Appendix B: Initializing and Reloading a Router and Switch
Part 1: Initialize the Router and Reload

Step 1: Connect to the router.
Console into the router and enter privileged EXEC mode using the enable command.
Router> enable
Router#
Step 2: Erase the startup configuration file from NVRAM.

Type the erase startup-config command to remove the startup configuration from nonvolatile randomaccess memory (NVRAM).
Router# erase startup-config
[OK]
Router#
Step 3: Reload the router.

Issue the reload command to remove an old configuration from memory. When prompted to Proceed with
reload, press Enter to confirm the reload. Pressing any other key will abort the reload.
Router# reload
Page 9 of 11

*Nov 29 18:28:09.923: %SYS-5-RELOAD: Reload requested by console. Reload Reason:
Reload Command.
Note: You may receive a prompt to save the running configuration prior to reloading the router. Respond
by typing no and press Enter.

After the router reloads, you are prompted to enter the initial configuration dialog. Enter no and press Enter.
Step 5: Terminate the autoinstall program.

You will be prompted to terminate the autoinstall program. Respond yes and then press Enter.
Would you like to terminate autoinstall? [yes]: yes
Router>
Part 2: Initialize the Switch and Reload

Switch> enable
Switch#
Switch# show flash
2
3
4
5
6
-rwx
-rwx
-rwx
-rwx
-rwx
1919
1632
13336
11607161
616
Mar
Mar
Mar
Mar
Mar
1
1
1
1
1
1993
1993
1993
1993
1993
00:06:33
00:06:33
00:06:33
02:37:06
00:07:13
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
private-config.text
config.text
multiple-fs
vlan.dat

Switch#

Page 10 of 11

Switch#

the operation.)
[OK]
Switch#

Switch# reload
and press Enter.

Switch>
Page 11 of 11
Can you read this map?

Objectives
In this activity, given a scenario, you will determine whether high-reliability messaging should be used.
You will focus on whether the final message is complete, correct, and delivered in a timely manner.
Background/Scenario
Note: It is suggested that students work in pairs; however, if preferred, students can complete this
activity individually.
Your instructor will provide you with output generated by a routers show ip route command. Use Packet
Tracer to build a topology model using this routing information.
At a minimum, the following should be used in your topology model:
One Catalyst 2960 switch
One Cisco Series 1941 Router with one HWIC-4ESW switching port modular card and IOS Version
15.1 or higher
Three PCs (can be servers, generic PCs, laptops, etc.)
Use the note tool in Packet Tracer to indicate the addresses of the router interfaces and possible
addresses for the end devices you chose for your model.
Label all end devices, ports, and addresses ascertained from the show ip route output/routing table
information in your Packet Tracer file. Save your work in hard or soft copy to share with the class.
Required Resources
Packet Tracer software program.
Routing Table 1 - You can use the table to assist one another as you read the information provided, and
then construct the model using Packet Tracer.
Page 1 of 2
Can you read this map?
Reflection
1. What was the hardest part of designing this network model? Explain your answer.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 2
We Need to Talk
Objectives
Explain how transport layer protocols and services support communications across data networks.
In this activity, you will determine whether high or low data communication delivery methods should be
utilized in a situational context.
Background/Scenario
Note: This activity works best with medium-sized groups of 6 to 8 students per group.
This chapter helps you understand how transport layer protocols and services support network data
communications.
Your instructor will whisper a complex message to the first student in a group. An example of the
message might be Our final exam will be given next Tuesday, February 5th, at 2:00 p.m. in Room 1151.
That student whispers the message to the next student in the group. Each group follows this process until
all members of each group have heard the whispered message.
Here are the rules to follow:
You can whisper the message only once to your neighbor.
The message must keep moving from one person to the other with no skipping of participants. The
instructor should ask a student to keep time of the full message activity from first participant to last
participant stating the messages. The first or last person would mostly likely be the best one to keep
this time.
The last student will say aloud exactly what he or she heard.
Your instructor will repeat the original message so that the group can compare it to the message that was
delivered by the last student in the group.
Required Resources
Timer for the student who is keeping a record of the conversations duration.
Reflection
1. Would the contents of this message need to be fully correct when you received them if you were
depending on this message to drive your personal/business calendar, studying schedule, etc.?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
2. Would the length of time taken to deliver the message be an important factor to the sender and recipient?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 1
Lab - Using Wireshark to Observe the TCP 3-Way Handshake

Topology
Objectives
Part 1: Prepare Wireshark to Capture Packets
Select an appropriate NIC interface to capture packets.
Part 2: Capture, Locate, and Examine Packets
Capture a web session to www.google.com.
Locate appropriate packets for a web session.
Examine information within packets, including IP addresses, TCP port numbers, and TCP control flags.
In this lab, you will use Wireshark to capture and examine packets generated between the PC browser using
the HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and a web server, such as www.google.com. When an application,
such as HTTP or File Transfer Protocol (FTP) first starts on a host, TCP uses the three-way handshake to
establish a reliable TCP session between the two hosts. For example, when a PC uses a web browser to surf
the Internet, a three-way handshake is initiated and a session is established between the PC host and web
server. A PC can have multiple, simultaneous, active TCP sessions with various web sites.
Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with a command prompt access, Internet access, and Wireshark installed)
Part 1: Prepare Wireshark to Capture Packets

In Part 1, you start the Wireshark program and select the appropriate interface to begin capturing packets.
Step 1: Retrieve the PC interface addresses.

For this lab, you need to retrieve your PCs IP address and its network interface card (NIC) physical address,
also called the MAC address.
a. Open a command prompt window, type ipconfig /all and then press Enter.
Page 1 of 6
b. Write down the IP and MAC addresses associated with the selected Ethernet adapter, because that is the
source address to look for when examining captured packets.
The PC host IP address: ________________________________________________________
The PC host MAC address: _____________________________________________________
Step 2: Start Wireshark and select the appropriate interface.

a. Click the Windows Start button and on the pop-up menu, double-click Wireshark.
b. After Wireshark starts, click Interface List.
c.
In the Wireshark: Capture Interfaces window, click the check the box next to the interface connected to
your LAN.
Page 2 of 6

Note: If multiple interfaces are listed and you are unsure which interface to check, click Details. Click the
802.3 (Ethernet) tab, and verify that the MAC address matches what you wrote down in Step 1b. Close
the Interface Details window after verification.
Part 2: Capture, Locate, and Examine Packets

Step 1: Click the Start button to start the data capture.
a. Go to www.google.com. Minimize the Google window, and return to Wireshark. Stop the data capture.
You should see captured traffic similar to that shown below in step b.
Note: Your instructor may provide you with a different website. If so, enter the website name or address
here:
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. The capture window is now active. Locate the Source, Destination, and Protocol columns.
Step 2: Locate appropriate packets for the web session.

If the computer was recently started and there has been no activity in accessing the Internet, you can see the
entire process in the captured output, including the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), Domain Name
System (DNS), and the TCP three-way handshake. The capture screen in Part 2, Step 1 shows all the
packets the computer must get to www.google.com. In this case, the PC already had an ARP entry for the
default gateway; therefore, it started with the DNS query to resolve www.google.com.
a. Frame 11 shows the DNS query from the PC to the DNS server, attempting to resolve the domain name,
www.google.com to the IP address of the web server. The PC must have the IP address before it can
send the first packet to the web server.
What is the IP address of the DNS server that the computer queried? ____________________
b. Frame 12 is the response from the DNS server with the IP address of www.google.com.
c.
Find the appropriate packet for the start of your three-way handshake. In this example, frame 15 is the
start of the TCP three-way handshake.
Page 3 of 6

What is the IP address of the Google web server? __________________________________
d. If you have many packets that are unrelated to the TCP connection, it may be necessary to use the
Wireshark filter capability. Enter tcp in the filter entry area within Wireshark and press Enter.
Step 3: Examine information within packets including IP addresses, TCP port numbers, and
TCP control flags.
a. In our example, frame 15 is the start of the three-way handshake between the PC and the Google web
server. In the packet list pane (top section of the main window), select the frame. This highlights the line
and displays the decoded information from that packet in the two lower panes. Examine the TCP
information in the packet details pane (middle section of the main window).
b. Click the + icon to the left of the Transmission Control Protocol in the packet details pane to expand the
view of the TCP information.
c.
Click the + icon to the left of the Flags. Look at the source and destination ports and the flags that are set.
Note: You may have to adjust the top and middle windows sizes within Wireshark to display the
necessary information.
Page 4 of 6
What is the TCP source port number? __________________________

How would you classify the source port? ________________________
What is the TCP destination port number? _______________________
How would you classify the destination port? _____________________
Which flag (or flags) is set? ________________________
What is the relative sequence number set to? ____________________
d. To select the next frame in the three-way handshake, select Go on the Wireshark menu and select Next
Packet In Conversation. In this example, this is frame 16. This is the Google web server reply to the
initial request to start a session.
What are the values of the source and destination ports? ______________________________________
Page 5 of 6

Which flags are set? ___________________________________________________________________
What are the relative sequence and acknowledgement numbers set to?
____________________________________________________________________________________
e. Finally, examine the third packet of the three-way handshake in the example. Clicking frame 17 in the top
window displays the following information in this example:
Examine the third and final packet of the handshake.

Which flag (or flags) is set? _____________________________________________________________
The relative sequence and acknowledgement numbers are set to 1 as a starting point. The TCP
connection is now established, and communication between the source computer and the web server can
begin.
f.
Close the Wireshark program.
Reflection
1. There are hundreds of filters available in Wireshark. A large network could have numerous filters and many
different types of traffic. Which three filters in the list might be the most useful to a network administrator?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. What other ways could Wireshark be used in a production network?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 6
Lab - Using Wireshark to Examine a UDP DNS Capture

Topology
Objectives
Part 1: Record a PCs IP Configuration Information
Part 2: Use Wireshark to Capture DNS Queries and Responses
Part 3: Analyze Captured DNS or UDP Packets
If you have ever used the Internet, you have used the Domain Name System (DNS). DNS is a distributed
network of servers that translates user-friendly domain names like www.google.com to an IP address. When
you type a website URL into your browser, your PC performs a DNS query to the DNS servers IP address.
Your PCs DNS server query and the DNS servers response make use of the User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
as the transport layer protocol. UDP is connectionless and does not require a session setup as does TCP.
DNS queries and responses are very small and do not require the overhead of TCP.
In this lab, you will communicate with a DNS server by sending a DNS query using the UDP transport
protocol. You will use Wireshark to examine the DNS query and response exchanges with the name server.
Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with a command prompt access, Internet access, and Wireshark installed)
Part 1: Record a PCs IP Configuration Information

In Part 1, you will use the ipconfig /all command on your local PC to find and record the MAC and IP
addresses of your PCs network interface card (NIC), the IP address of the specified default gateway, and the
DNS server IP address specified for the PC. Record this information in the table provided. The information will
be used in the following parts of this lab with packet analysis.
IP address
MAC address
Default gateway IP address
DNS server IP address
Part 2: Use Wireshark to Capture DNS Queries and Responses

In Part 2, you will set up Wireshark to capture DNS query and response packets to demonstrate the use of
UDP transport protocol while communicating with a DNS server.
Page 1 of 6

a. Click the Windows Start button and navigate to the Wireshark program.
Note: If Wireshark is not yet installed, it can be downloaded at http://www.wireshark.org/download.html.
b. Select an interface for Wireshark for capturing packets. Use the Interface List to choose the interface
that is associated with the recorded PCs IP and Media Access Control (MAC) addresses in Part 1.
c.
After selecting the desired interface, click Start to capture the packets.
d. Open a web browser and type www.google.com. Press Enter to continue.

e. Click Stop to stop the Wireshark capture when you see Googles home page.
Part 3: Analyze Captured DNS or UDP Packets

In Part 3, you will examine the UDP packets that were generated when communicating with a DNS server for
the IP addresses for www.google.com.
Step 1: Filter DNS packets.

a. In the Wireshark main window, type dns in the entry area of the Filter toolbar. Click Apply or press Enter.
Note: If you do not see any results after the DNS filter was applied, close the web browser and in the
command prompt window, type ipconfig /flushdns to remove all previous DNS results. Restart the
Wireshark capture and repeat the instructions in Part 2b 2e. If this does not resolve the issue, in the
command prompt window, you can type nslookup www.google.com as an alternative to the web
browser.
b. In the packet list pane (top section) of the main window, locate the packet that includes standard query
and A www.google.com. See frame 4 as an example.
Page 2 of 6
Step 2: Examine UDP segment using DNS query.

Examine UDP by using a DNS query for www.google.com as captured by Wireshark. In this example,
Wireshark capture frame 4 in the packet list pane is selected for analysis. The protocols in this query are
displayed in the packet details pane (middle section) of the main window. The protocol entries are highlighted
in gray.
a. In the packet details pane, frame 4 had 74 bytes of data on the wire as displayed on the first line. This is
the number of bytes to send a DNS query to a name server requesting the IP addresses of
www.google.com.
b. The Ethernet II line displays the source and destination MAC addresses. The source MAC address is
from your local PC because your local PC originated the DNS query. The destination MAC address is
from the default gateway, because this is the last stop before this query exits the local network.
Is the source MAC address the same as recorded from Part 1 for the local PC? _________________
c.
In the Internet Protocol Version 4 line, the IP packet Wireshark capture indicates that the source IP
address of this DNS query is 192.168.1.11, and the destination IP address is 192.168.1.1. In this
example, the destination address is the default gateway. The router is the default gateway in this network.
Can you pair up the IP and MAC addresses for the source and destination devices?
Device
IP Address
MAC Address
Local PC
Default Gateway
The IP packet and header encapsulates the UDP segment. The UDP segment contains the DNS query
as the data.
d. A UDP header only has four fields: source port, destination port, length, and checksum. Each field in UDP
header is only 16 bits as depicted below.
Expand the User Datagram Protocol in the packet details pane by clicking the plus (+) sign. Notice that
there are only four fields. The source port number in this example is 52110. The source port was
randomly generated by the local PC using port numbers that are not reserved. The destination port is 53.
Port 53 is a well-known port reserved for use with DNS. DNS servers listen on port 53 for DNS queries
from clients.
Page 3 of 6
In this example, the length of this UDP segment is 40 bytes. Out of 40 bytes, 8 bytes are used as header.
The other 32 bytes are used by DNS query data. The 32 bytes of DNS query data is highlighted in the
following illustration in the packet bytes pane (lower section) of the Wireshark main window.
The checksum is used to determine the integrity of the packet after it has traversed the Internet.
The UDP header has low overhead because UDP does not have fields that are associated with three-way
handshake in TCP. Any data transfer reliability issues that occur must be handled by the application
layer.
Record your Wireshark results in the table below:
Frame Size
Source MAC address
Destination MAC address
Source IP address
Destination IP address
Source Port
Destination Port
Is the source IP address the same as the local PCs IP address recorded in Part 1? _____________
Is the destination IP address the same as the default gateway noted in Part 1? _____________
Step 3: Examine UDP using DNS response.

In this step, you will examine the DNS response packet and verify that DNS response packet also uses UDP.
Page 4 of 6

a. In this example, frame 5 is the corresponding DNS response packet. Notice the number of bytes on the
wire is 290 bytes. It is a larger packet as compared to the DNS query packet.
b. In the Ethernet II frame for the DNS response, from what device is the source MAC address and what
device is the destination MAC address?
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
Notice the source and destination IP addresses in the IP packet. What is the destination IP address?
What is the source IP address?
Destination IP address: _______________________Source IP address: ________________________
What happened to the roles of source and destination for the local host and default gateway?
____________________________________________________________________________________
d. In the UDP segment, the role of the port numbers has also reversed. The destination port number is
52110. Port number 52110 is the same port that was generated by the local PC when the DNS query was
sent to the DNS server. Your local PC listens for a DNS response on this port.
The source port number is 53. The DNS server listens for a DNS query on port 53 and then sends a DNS
response with a source port number of 53 back to originator of the DNS query.
When the DNS response is expanded, notice the resolved IP addresses for www.google.com in the
Answers section.
Page 5 of 6
Reflection
What are the benefits of using UDP instead of TCP as a transport protocol for DNS?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 6
Lab - Using Wireshark to Examine FTP and TFTP Captures

Topology Part 1 (FTP)
Part 1 will highlight a TCP capture of an FTP session. This topology consists of a PC with Internet access.
Topology Part 2 (TFTP)

Part 2 will highlight a UDP capture of a TFTP session. The PC must have both an Ethernet connection and a
console connection to Switch S1.
Addressing Table (Part 2)

Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
S1
VLAN 1
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
Objectives
Part 1: Identify TCP Header Fields and Operation Using a Wireshark FTP Session Capture
Part 2: Identify UDP Header Fields and Operation Using a Wireshark TFTP Session Capture
The two protocols in the TCP/IP transport layer are the TCP, defined in RFC 761, and UDP, defined in RFC
768. Both protocols support upper-layer protocol communication. For example, TCP is used to provide
transport layer support for the HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and FTP protocols, among others. UDP
provides transport layer support for the Domain Name System (DNS) and TFTP among others.
Note: Understanding the parts of the TCP and UDP headers and operation are a critical skill for network
engineers.
Page 1 of 14

In Part 1 of this lab, you will use Wireshark open source tool to capture and analyze TCP protocol header
fields for FTP file transfers between the host computer and an anonymous FTP server. The Windows
command line utility is used to connect to an anonymous FTP server and download a file. In Part 2 of this lab,
you will use Wireshark to capture and analyze UDP protocol header fields for TFTP file transfers between the
host computer and Switch S1.
Note: The switch used is a Cisco Catalyst 2960s with Cisco IOS Release 15.0(2) (lanbasek9 image). Other
switches and Cisco IOS versions can be used. Depending on the model and Cisco IOS version, the available
commands and output produced might vary from what displays in the labs.
Note: Make sure that the switch has been erased and has no startup configurations. If you are unsure,
Note: Part 1 assumes the PC has Internet access and cannot be performed using Netlab. Part 2 is Netlab
compatible.
Required Resources Part 1 (FTP)

1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with command prompt access, Internet access, and Wireshark installed)
Required Resources Part 2 (TFTP)
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with Wireshark and a TFTP server, such as tftpd32 installed)
Console cable to configure the Cisco IOS devices via the console port
Ethernet cable as shown in the topology
Part 1: Identify TCP Header Fields and Operation Using a Wireshark FTP
Session Capture
In Part 1, you use Wireshark to capture an FTP session and inspect TCP header fields.
Step 1: Start a Wireshark capture.

a. Close all unnecessary network traffic, such as the web browser, to limit the amount traffic during the
Wireshark capture.
b. Start the Wireshark capture.
Step 2: Download the Readme file.

a. From the command prompt, enter ftp ftp.cdc.gov.
b. Log into the FTP site for Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) with user anonymous and
no password.
c.
Locate and download the Readme file.
Page 2 of 14
Step 3: Stop the Wireshark capture.

Step 4: View the Wireshark Main Window.
Wireshark captured many packets during the FTP session to ftp.cdc.gov. To limit the amount of data for
analysis, type tcp and ip.addr == 198.246.112.54 in the Filter: entry area and click Apply. The IP address,
198.246.112.54, is the address for ftp.cdc.gov.
Page 3 of 14
Step 5: Analyze the TCP fields.

After the TCP filter has been applied, the first three frames in the packet list pane (top section) displays the
transport layer protocol TCP creating a reliable session. The sequence of [SYN], [SYN, ACK], and [ACK]
illustrates the three-way handshake.
TCP is routinely used during a session to control datagram delivery, verify datagram arrival, and manage
window size. For each data exchange between the FTP client and FTP server, a new TCP session is started.
At the conclusion of the data transfer, the TCP session is closed. Finally, when the FTP session is finished,
TCP performs an orderly shutdown and termination.
In Wireshark, detailed TCP information is available in the packet details pane (middle section). Highlight the
first TCP datagram from the host computer, and expand the TCP record. The expanded TCP datagram
appears similar to the packet detail pane shown below.
The image above is a TCP datagram diagram. An explanation of each field is provided for reference:
Page 4 of 14
The TCP source port number belongs to the TCP session host that opened a connection. The value is
normally a random value above 1,023.
The TCP destination port number is used to identify the upper layer protocol or application on the
remote site. The values in the range 01,023 represent the well-known ports and are associated with
popular services and applications (as described in RFC 1700, such as Telnet, FTP, HTTP, and so on).
The combination of the source IP address, source port, destination IP address, and destination port
uniquely identifies the session to both sender and receiver.
Note: In the Wireshark capture below, the destination port is 21, which is FTP. FTP servers listen on port 21
for FTP client connections.
The Sequence number specifies the number of the last octet in a segment.
The Acknowledgment number specifies the next octet expected by the receiver.
The Code bits have a special meaning in session management and in the treatment of segments.
Among interesting values are:
-
ACK Acknowledgement of a segment receipt.
SYN Synchronize, only set when a new TCP session is negotiated during the TCP three-way
handshake.
FIN Finish, request to close the TCP session.
The Window size is the value of the sliding window; determines how many octets can be sent before
waiting for an acknowledgement.
The Urgent pointer is only used with an Urgent (URG) flag when the sender needs to send urgent data
to the receiver.
The Options has only one option currently, and it is defined as the maximum TCP segment size (optional
value).
Using the Wireshark capture of the first TCP session startup (SYN bit set to 1), fill in information about the
TCP header:
From the PC to CDC server (only the SYN bit is set to 1):
Source IP Address:
Destination IP Address:
Source port number:
Destination port number:
Sequence number:
Acknowledgement number:
Header length:
Window size:
In the second Wireshark filtered capture, the CDC FTP server acknowledges the request from the PC. Note
the values of the SYN and ACK bits.
Page 5 of 14
Fill in the following information regarding the SYN-ACK message.

Source IP address:
Destination IP address:
Source port number:
Sequence number:
Header length:
Window size:
In the final stage of the negotiation to establish communications, the PC sends an acknowledgement
message to the server. Notice only the ACK bit is set to 1, and the Sequence number has been incremented
to 1.
Page 6 of 14
Fill in the following information regarding the ACK message.

Source IP address:
Destination IP address:
Source port number:
Sequence number:
Header length:
Window size:
How many other TCP datagrams contained a SYN bit?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
After a TCP session is established, FTP traffic can occur between the PC and FTP server. The FTP client and
server communicate between each other, unaware that TCP has control and management over the session.
When the FTP server sends a Response: 220 to the FTP client, the TCP session on the FTP client sends an
acknowledgment to the TCP session on the server. This sequence is visible in the Wireshark capture below.
Page 7 of 14

When the FTP session has finished, the FTP client sends a command to quit. The FTP server
acknowledges the FTP termination with a Response: 221 Goodbye. At this time, the FTP server TCP session
sends a TCP datagram to the FTP client, announcing the termination of the TCP session. The FTP client TCP
session acknowledges receipt of the termination datagram, then sends its own TCP session termination.
When the originator of the TCP termination, FTP server, receives a duplicate termination, an ACK datagram
is sent to acknowledge the termination and the TCP session is closed. This sequence is visible in the diagram
and capture below.
By applying an ftp filter, the entire sequence of the FTP traffic can be examined in Wireshark. Notice the
sequence of the events during this FTP session. The username anonymous was used to retrieve the Readme
file. After the file transfer completed, the user ended the FTP session.
Page 8 of 14

Apply the TCP filter again in Wireshark to examine the termination of the TCP session. Four packets are
transmitted for the termination of the TCP session. Because TCP connection is full-duplex, each direction
must terminate independently. Examine the source and destination addresses.
In this example, the FTP server has no more data to send in the stream; it sends a segment with the FIN flag
set in frame 63. The PC sends an ACK to acknowledge the receipt of the FIN to terminate the session from
the server to the client in frame 64.
In frame 65, the PC sends a FIN to the FTP server to terminate the TCP session. The FTP server responds
with an ACK to acknowledge the FIN from the PC in frame 67. Now the TCP session terminated between the
FTP server and PC.
Part 2: Identify UDP Header Fields and Operation Using a Wireshark TFTP
Session Capture
In Part 2, you use Wireshark to capture a TFTP session and inspect UDP header fields.
Step 1: Set up this physical topology and prepare for TFTP capture.
a. Establish a console and Ethernet connection between PC-A and Switch S1.
b. If not already done, manually configure the IP address on the PC to 192.168.1.3. It is not required to set
the default gateway.
Page 9 of 14
c.
Configure the switch. Assign an IP address of 192.168.1.1 to VLAN 1. Verify connectivity with the PC by
pinging 192.168.1.3. Troubleshoot as necessary.
Switch> enable
Switch# conf t
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# host S1
S1(config)# interface vlan 1
*Mar 1 00:37:50.166: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Vlan1, changed state to up
*Mar 1 00:37:50.175: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Vlan1,
changed state to up
S1(config-if)# end
S1# ping 192.168.1.3
!!!!!
Page 10 of 14

d. Save the running configuration to NVRAM:
S1# copy run start
Step 2: Prepare the TFTP server on the PC.

a. If it does not already exist, create a folder on the PC desktop called TFTP. The files from the switch will
be copied to this location.
b. Start tftpd32 on the PC.
c.
Click Browse and change the current directory to C:\Users\user1\Desktop\TFTP by replacing user1 with
your username.
The TFTP server should look like this:
Notice that in Current Directory, it lists the user and the Server (PC-A) interface as the IP address of
192.168.1.3.
d. Test the ability to copy a file using TFTP from the switch to the PC. Troubleshoot as necessary.
S1# copy start tftp
Address or name of remote host []? 192.168.1.3
Destination filename [s1-confg]?
!!
1638 bytes copied in 0.026 secs (63000 bytes/sec)
If you see that the file has copied (as in the above output), then you are ready to go on to the next step. If
not, then troubleshoot. If you get the %Error opening tftp (Permission denied) error, first
check to make sure your firewall is not blocking TFTP, and that you are copying to a location where your
username has adequate permission, such as the desktop.
Page 11 of 14
Step 3: Capture a TFTP session in Wireshark

a. Open Wireshark. From the Edit menu, choose Preferences and click the (+) sign to expand Protocols.
Scroll down and select UDP. Click the Validate the UDP checksum if possible check box and click
Apply. Then click OK.
b. Start a Wireshark capture.

c.
Run the copy start tftp command on the switch.
d. Stop the Wireshark capture.
e. Set the filter to tftp. Your output should look similar to the output shown above. This TFTP transfer is
used to analyze transport layer UDP operations.
In Wireshark, detailed UDP information is available in the Wireshark packet details pane. Highlight the
first UDP datagram from the host computer, and move the mouse pointer to the packet details pane. It
may be necessary to adjust the packet details pane and expand the UDP record by clicking the protocol
expand box. The expanded UDP datagram should look similar to the diagram below.
The figure below is a UDP datagram diagram. Header information is sparse, compared to the TCP
datagram. Similar to TCP, each UDP datagram is identified by the UDP source port and UDP destination
port.
Page 12 of 14
Using the Wireshark capture of the first UDP datagram, fill in information about the UDP header. The
checksum value is a hexadecimal (base 16) value, denoted by the preceding 0x code:
Source IP Address:
Source Port Number:
Destination Port Number:
UDP Message Length:
UDP Checksum:
How does UDP verify datagram integrity?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Examine the first frame returned from tftpd server. Fill in the information about the UDP header:
Source IP Address:
Source Port Number:
Destination Port Number:
UDP Message Length:
UDP Checksum:
Notice that the return UDP datagram has a different UDP source port, but this source port is used for the
remainder of the TFTP transfer. Because there is no reliable connection, only the original source port
used to begin the TFTP session is used to maintain the TFTP transfer.
Also notice that the UDP Checksum is incorrect. This is most likely caused by UDP checksum offload.
You can learn more about why this happens by searching for UDP checksum offload.
Page 13 of 14
Reflection
This lab provided the opportunity to analyze TCP and UDP protocol operations from captured FTP and TFTP
sessions. How does TCP manage communication differently than UDP?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Challenge
Because neither FTP nor TFTP are secure protocols, all transferred data is sent in clear text. This includes
any user IDs, passwords, or clear-text file contents. Analyzing the upper-layer FTP session will quickly identify
the user ID, password, and configuration file passwords. Upper-layer TFTP data examination is a bit more
complicated, but the data field can be examined and the configuration user ID and password information
extracted.
Cleanup
Unless directed otherwise by your instructor:
1) Remove the files that were copied to your PC.
2) Erase the configurations on switch S1.
3) Remove the manual IP address from the PC and restore Internet connectivity.
Page 14 of 14
We Need to Talk, Again

Objectives
Explain how transport layer protocols and services support communications across data networks.
In this activity, given a scenario, you will determine whether high-reliability messaging should be used.
You will focus on whether the final message is complete, correct, and delivered in a timely manner
Background/Scenario
Note: It is important that the students have completed the Introductory MA for this chapter. This activity
works best in medium-sized groups of 6 to 8 students.
Your instructor will whisper a complex message to the first student in a group. An example of the
message might be We are expecting a blizzard tomorrow. It should be arriving in the morning and school
will be delayed 2 two hours so bring your homework.
That student whispers the message to the next student in the group. Each group follows this process until
all members of each group have heard the whispered message.
Here are the rules to follow:
You can whisper the message in short parts to your neighbor AND you can repeat the
message parts after verifying your neighbor heard the correct message.
Small parts of the message may be checked and repeated again (clockwise OR counterclockwise to ensure accuracy of the message parts) by whispering. A student will be
assigned to time the entire activity.
When the message has reached the end of the group, the last student will say aloud what
was heard. Small parts of the message may be repeated (i.e., re-sent), and the process can
be restarted to ensure that ALL parts of the message are fully delivered and correct.
Your instructor will repeat the original message to check for quality delivery.
Reflection
1. Would the contents of this message need to be clear and correct when you received them, if you were
depending on this message to drive your personal/business calendar, studying schedule, etc.?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
2. Would the length of time taken to deliver the message be an important factor to the sender and recipient?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
3. Compare the Introductory Modeling Activity of this chapter to this activity. What differences do you notice
about the delivery of the message?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 1
The Internet of Everything (IoE)

Objectives
IPv6 is important to help manage the data traffic identification, which will be needed in the future. Many
addresses will assist in this endeavor, and IPv6 helps to alleviate this need.
Background /Scenario
Today, more than 99% of our world remains unconnected. Tomorrow, we will be connected to almost
everything. 37 billion devices will be connected to the Internet by 2020. From trees to water to cars, the
organic and the digital will work together for a more intelligent and connected world. This tomorrow of
networking is known as The Internet of Everything or IoE.
If traffic, transportation, networking and space exploration depend on digital information sharing, how will
that information be identified from its source to its destination?
In this activity, you will begin to think about not only what will be identified in the IoE world, but how
everything will be addressed in the same world!
Activity directions for class or individual students:
1. Read the blog/news source, Internet of Everything: Fueling an Amazing Future
#TomorrowStartsHere authored by John Chambers regarding the Internet of Everything (IoE).
This blog is located at http://blogs.cisco.com/news/internet-of-everything-2.
2. Then view the video, Cisco Commercial: Tomorrow Starts Here located halfway down the page.
3. Next, navigate to the IoE main page located at http://www.cisco.com/web/tomorrow-startshere/index.html.Then click on a category that interests you from within the graphic collage.
4. Next, watch the video or read through the blog or .pdf that belongs to your IoE category of
interest.
5. Write 5 comments or questions about what you saw or read. Be prepared to share with the class.
Required Resources
Internet connectivity for research on the cisco.com site. Headphones may also be useful if students are
individually completing this activity within a group setting.
Recording capabilities (paper, tablet, etc.) for comments or questions regarding the videos, blogs and/or
.pdfs read or viewed for Step 3.
Reflection
1. Why do you think there is a need to address trees? Windmills? Cars? Refrigerators? Why will just
about anything be able to use an IP address?
____________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 1
Lab Using the Windows Calculator with Network Addresses
Objectives
Part 1: Access the Windows Calculator
Part 2: Convert between Numbering Systems
Part 3: Convert Host IPv4 Addresses and Subnet Masks into Binary
Part 4: Determine the Number of Hosts in a Network Using Powers of 2
Part 5: Convert MAC Addresses and IPv6 Addresses to Binary
Network technicians use binary, decimal, and hexadecimal numbers when working with computers and
networking devices. Microsoft provides a built-in Calculator application as part of the operating system. The
Windows 7 version of Calculator includes a Standard view that can be used to perform basic arithmetic tasks
such as addition, subtract, multiplication, and division. The Calculator application also has advanced
programming, scientific, and statistical capabilities.
In this lab, you will use the Windows 7 Calculator application Programmer view to convert between the binary,
decimal, and hexadecimal number systems. You will also use the Scientific view powers function to determine
the number of hosts that can be addressed based on the number of host bits available.
Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP)
Note: If using an operating system other than Windows 7, the Calculator application views and functions
available may vary from those shown in this lab. However, you should be able to perform the calculations.
Page 1 of 7
Part 1: Access the Windows Calculator

In Part 1, you will become familiar with the Microsoft Windows built-in calculator application and view the
available modes.
Step 1: Click the Windows Start button and select All Programs.
Step 2: Click the Accessories folder and select Calculator.
Step 3: After Calculator opens, click the View menu.
What are the four available modes?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Note: The Programmer and Scientific modes are used in this lab.
Part 2: Convert between Numbering Systems

In the Windows Calculator Programmer view, several number system modes are available: Hex (Hexadecimal
or base 16), Dec (Decimal or base 10), Oct (Octal or base 8), and Bin (Binary or base 2).
We are accustomed to using the decimal number system that uses the digits 0 to 9. The decimal numbering
system is used in everyday life for all counting, money, and financial transactions. Computers and other
electronic devices use the binary numbering system with only the digits 0 and 1 for data storage, data
transmission and numerical calculations. All computer calculations are ultimately performed internally in
binary (digital) form, regardless of how they are displayed.
One disadvantage of binary numbers is that the binary number equivalent of a large decimal number can be
quite long. This makes them difficult to read and write. One way to overcome this problem is to arrange binary
numbers into groups of four as hexadecimal numbers. Hexadecimal numbers are base 16, and a combination
of numbers from 0 to 9 and the letters A to F are used to represent the binary or decimal equivalent.
Hexadecimal characters are used when writing or displaying IPv6 and MAC addresses.
The octal numbering system is very similar in principle to hexadecimal. Octal numbers represent binary
numbers in groups of three. This numbering system uses digits 0 to 7. Octal numbers are also a convenient
way to represent a large binary number in smaller groups, but this numbering system is not commonly used.
In this lab, the Windows 7 Calculator is used to convert between different numbering systems in the
Programmer mode.
a. Click the View menu and select Programmer to switch to Programmer mode.
Note: For Windows XP and Vista, only two modes, Standard and Scientific, are available. If you are using one
of these operating systems, you can use the Scientific mode to perform this lab.
Which number system is currently active? ______________________________________________
Which numbers on the number pad are active in decimal mode? _________________________
b. Click the Bin (Binary) radio button. Which numbers are active on the number pad now?
____________________________________
Why do you think the other numbers are grayed out?
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
Click the Hex (Hexadecimal) radio button. Which characters are activated on the number pad now?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 7

d. Click the Dec radio button. Using your mouse, click the number 1 followed by the number 5 on the
number pad. The decimal number 15 is now entered.
Note: The numbers and letters on the keyboard can also be used to enter the values. If using the
numerical keypad, type the number 15. If the number does not enter into the calculator, press the Num
Lock key to enable the numeric keypad.
Click the Bin radio button. What happened to the number 15?
____________________________________________________________________________________
e. Numbers are converted from one numbering system to another by selecting the desired number mode.
Click the Dec radio button again. The number converts back to decimal.
f.
Click the Hex radio button to change to Hexadecimal mode. Which hexadecimal character (0 through 9
or A to F) represents decimal 15? _______________________
g. As you were switching between the numbering systems, you may have noticed the binary number 1111 is
displayed during the conversion. This assists you in relating the binary digits to other numbering system
values. Each set of 4 bits represents a hexadecimal character or potentially multiple decimal characters.
h. Clear the values in the window by clicking C above the 9 on the calculator keypad. Convert the following
numbers between the binary, decimal, and hexadecimal numbering systems.
Decimal
Binary
Hexadecimal
86
175
204
0001 0011
0100 1101
0010 1010
38
93
E4
i.
As you record the values in the table above, do you see a pattern between the binary and hexadecimal
numbers?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 7
Part 3: Convert Host IPv4 Addresses and Subnet Masks into Binary
Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) addresses and subnet masks are represented in a dotted decimal format
(four octets), such as 192.168.1.10 and 255.255.255.0, respectively. This makes these addresses more
readable to humans. Each of the decimal octets in the address or a mask can be converted to 8 binary bits.
An octet is always 8 binary bits. If all 4 octets were converted to binary, how many bits would there be?
________________________
a. Use the Windows Calculator application to convert the IP address 192.168.1.10 into binary and record the
binary numbers in the following table:
Decimal
Binary
192
168
1
10
b. Subnet masks, such as 255.255.255.0, are also represented in a dotted decimal format. A subnet mask
will always consist of four 8-bit octets, each represented as a decimal number. Using the Windows
Calculator, convert the 8 possible decimal subnet mask octet values to binary numbers and record the
binary numbers in the following table:
Decimal
Binary
0
128
192
224
240
248
252
254
255
c.
With the combination of IPv4 address and the subnet mask, the network portion can be determined and
the number of hosts available in a given IPv4 subnet can also be calculated. The process is examined in
Part 4.
Part 4: Determine the Number of Hosts in a Network Using Powers of 2

Given an IPv4 network address and a subnet mask, the network portion can be determined along with the
number of hosts available in the network.
a. To calculate the number of hosts on a network, you must determine the network and host portion of the
address.
Using the example of 192.168.1.10 with a subnet of 255.255.248.0, the address and subnet mask are
converted to binary numbers. Align the bits as you record your conversions to binary numbers.
Page 4 of 7
Decimal IP Address and Subnet Mask
Binary IP Address and Subnet Mask
192.168.1.10
255.255.248.0
Because the first 21 bits in the subnet mask are consecutive numeral ones, the corresponding first 21 bits
in the IP address in binary is 110000001010100000000; these represent the network portion of the
address. The remaining 11 bits are 00100001010 and represent the host portion of the address.
What is the decimal and binary network number for this address?
____________________________________________________________________________________
What is the decimal and binary host portion for this address?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Because the network number and the broadcast address use two addresses out of the subnet, the
formula to determine the number of hosts available in an IPv4 subnet is the number 2 to the power of the
number of host bits available, minus 2:
Number of available hosts = 2 (number of host bits) 2
b. Using the Windows Calculator application, switch to the Scientific mode by clicking the View menu, then
select Scientific.
c.
Input 2. Click the xy key. This key raises a number to a power.
d. Input 11. Click =, or press Enter on the keyboard for the answer.
e. Subtract 2 from the answer by using the calculator if desired.
f.
In this example, there are 2046 hosts are available on this network (211-2).
g. If given the number of host bits, determine the number of hosts available and record the number in the
following table.
Number of Available Host Bits
Number of Available Hosts
5
14
24
10
Page 5 of 7

h. For a given subnet mask, determine the number of hosts available and record the answer in the following
table.
Subnet Mask
Binary Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
11111111.11111111.11111111.00000000
255.255.240.0
11111111.11111111.11110000.00000000
255.255.255.128
11111111.11111111.11111111.10000000
255.255.255.252
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100
255.255.0.0
11111111.11111111.00000000.00000000
Number of
Available
Host Bits
Number of
Available
Hosts
Part 5: Convert MAC Addresses and IPv6 Addresses to Binary

Both Media Access Control (MAC) and Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) addresses are represented as
hexadecimal digits for readability. However, computers only understand binary digits and use these binary
digits for computations. In this part, you will convert these hexadecimal addresses to binary addresses.
Step 1: Convert MAC addresses to binary digits.

a. The MAC or physical address is normally represented as 12 hexadecimal characters, grouped in pairs
and separated by hyphens (-). Physical addresses on a Windows-based computer are displayed in a
format of xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx, where each x is a number from 0 to 9 or a letter from A to F. Each of the hex
characters in the address can be converted to 4 binary bits, which is what the computer understands. If all
12 hex characters were converted to binary, how many bits would there be?
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. Record the MAC address for your PC.
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
Convert the MAC address into binary digits using the Windows Calculator application.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Convert an IPv6 address into binary digits.

IPv6 addresses are also written in hexadecimal characters for human convenience. These IPv6 addresses
can be converted to binary numbers for computer use.
a. IPv6 addresses are binary numbers represented in human-readable notations:
2001:0DB8:ACAD:0001:0000:0000:0000:0001 or in a shorter format: 2001:DB8:ACAD:1::1.
b. An IPv6 address is 128 bits long. Using the Windows Calculator application, convert the sample IPv6
address into binary numbers and record it in the table below.
Page 6 of 7
Hexadecimal
Binary
2001
0DB8
ACAD
0001
0000
0000
0000
0001
Reflection
1. Can you perform all the conversions without the assistance of the calculator? What can you do to make it
happen?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. For most IPv6 addresses, the network portion of the address is usually 64 bits. How many hosts are available
on a subnet where the first 64 bits represent the network? Hint: All host addresses are available in the subnet
for hosts.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 7 of 7
Lab Converting IPv4 Addresses to Binary

Objectives
Part 1: Convert IPv4 Addresses from Dotted Decimal to Binary
Part 2: Use Bitwise ANDing Operation to Determine Network Addresses
Part 3: Apply Network Address Calculations
Every IPv4 address is comprised of two parts: a network portion and a host portion. The network portion of an
address is the same for all devices that reside in the same network. The host portion identifies a specific host
within a given network. The subnet mask is used to determine the network portion of an IP address. Devices
on the same network can communicate directly; devices on different networks require an intermediary Layer 3
device, such as a router, to communicate.
To understand the operation of devices on a network, we need to look at addresses the way devices doin
binary notation. To do this, we must convert the dotted decimal form of an IP address and its subnet mask to
binary notation. After this has been done, we can use the bitwise ANDing operation to determine the network
address.
This lab provides instructions on how to determine the network and host portion of IP addresses by converting
addresses and subnet masks from dotted decimal to binary, and then using the bitwise ANDing operation.
You will then apply this information to identify addresses in the network.
Part 1: Convert IPv4 Addresses from Dotted Decimal to Binary

In Part 1, you will convert decimal numbers to their binary equivalent. After you have mastered this activity,
you will convert IPv4 addresses and subnet masks from dotted decimal to their binary form.
Step 1: Convert decimal numbers to their binary equivalent.

Fill in the following table by converting the decimal number to an 8-bit binary number. The first number has
been completed for your reference. Recall that the eight binary bit values in an octet are based on the powers
of 2, and from left to right are 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, 4, 2, and 1.
Decimal
Binary
192
11000000
168
10
255
2
Page 1 of 4
Step 2: Convert the IPv4 addresses to their binary equivalent.

An IPv4 address can be converted using the same technique you used above. Fill in the table below with the
binary equivalent of the addresses provided. To make your answers easier to read, separate the binary octets
with a period.
Decimal
192.168.10.10
Binary
11000000.10101000.00001010.00001010
209.165.200.229
172.16.18.183
10.86.252.17
255.255.255.128
255.255.192.0
Part 2: Use Bitwise ANDing Operation to Determine Network Addresses

In Part 2, you will use the bitwise ANDing operation to calculate the network address for the provided host
addresses. You will first need to convert an IPv4 decimal address and subnet mask to their binary equivalent.
Once you have the binary form of the network address, convert it to its decimal form.
Note: The ANDing process compares the binary value in each bit position of the 32-bit host IP with the
corresponding position in the 32-bit subnet mask. If there two 0s or a 0 and a 1, the ANDing result is 0. If
there are two 1s, the result is a 1, as shown in the example here.
Step 1: Determine the number of bits to use to calculate the network address.
Description
Decimal
Binary
IP Address
192.168.10.131
11000000.10101000.00001010.10000011
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.192
11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000
Network Address
192.168.10.128
11000000.10101000.00001010.10000000
How do you determine what bits to use to calculate the network address?
____________________________________________________________________________________
In the example above, how many bits are used to calculate the network address?
______________
Page 2 of 4
Step 2: Use the ANDing operation to determine the network address.

a. Enter the missing information into the table below:
Description
Decimal
IP Address
172.16.145.29
Subnet Mask
255.255.0.0
Binary
Network Address
b. Enter the missing information into the table below:
Description
Decimal
IP Address
192.168.10.10
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Binary
Network Address
c.
Enter the missing information into the table below:

Description
Decimal
IP Address
192.168.68.210
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.128
Binary
Network Address
d. Enter the missing information into the table below:
Description
Decimal
IP Address
172.16.188.15
Subnet Mask
255.255.240.0
Binary
Network Address
e. Enter the missing information into the table below:
Description
Decimal
IP Address
10.172.2.8
Subnet Mask
255.224.0.0
Binary
Network Address
Page 3 of 4
Part 3: Apply Network Address Calculations

In Part 3, you must calculate the network address for the given IP addresses and subnet masks. After you
have the network address, you should be able to determine the responses needed to complete the lab.
Step 1: Determine whether IP addresses are on same network.

a. You are configuring two PCs for your network. PC-A is given an IP address of 192.168.1.18, and PC-B is
given an IP address of 192.168.1.33. Both PCs receive a subnet mask of 255.255.255.240.
What is the network address for PC-A? ___________________________
What is the network address for PC-B? ___________________________
Will these PCs be able to communicate directly with each other? _______
What is the highest address that can be given to PC-B that allows it to be on the same network as PC-A?
___________________________
b. You are configuring two PCs for your network. PC-A is given an IP address of 10.0.0.16, and PC-B is
given an IP address of 10.1.14.68. Both PCs receive a subnet mask of 255.254.0.0.
What is the network address for PC-A? __________________________
What is the network address for PC-B? __________________________
Will these PCs be able to communicate directly with each other? ______
What is the lowest address that can be given to PC-B that allows it to be on the same network as PC-A?
___________________________
Step 2: Identify the default gateway address.

a. Your company has a policy to use the first IP address in a network as the default gateway address. A
host on the local-area network (LAN) has an IP address of 172.16.140.24 and a subnet mask of
255.255.192.0.
What is the network address for this network?
___________________________
What is the default gateway address for this host?
___________________________
b. Your company has a policy to use the first IP address in a network as the default gateway address. You
have been instructed to configure a new server with an IP address of 192.168.184.227 and a subnet
mask of 255.255.255.248.
What is the network address for this network?
___________________________
What is the default gateway for this server?
___________________________
Reflection
Why is the subnet mask important in determining the network address?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 4
Lab Identifying IPv4 Addresses

Objectives
Part 1: Identify IPv4 Addresses
Identify the network and host portion of an IP address.
Identify the range of host addresses given a network/prefix mask pair.
Part 2: Classify IPv4 Addresses
Identify the type of address (network, host, multicast, or broadcast).
Identify whether an address is public or private.
Determine if an address assignment is a valid host address.
Addressing is an important function of network layer protocols because it enables data communication
between hosts on the same network, or on different networks. In this lab, you will examine the structure of
Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) addresses. You will identify the various types of IPv4 addresses and the
components that help comprise the address, such as network portion, host portion, and subnet mask. Types
of addresses covered include public, private, unicast, and multicast.
Required Resources
Optional: IPv4 address calculator
Part 1: Identify IPv4 Addresses

In Part 1, you will be given several examples of IPv4 addresses and will complete tables with appropriate
information.
Step 1: Analyze the table shown below and identify the network portion and host portion of the
given IPv4 addresses.
The first two rows show examples of how the table should be completed.
Key for table:
N = all 8 bits for an octet are in the network portion of the address
n = a bit in the network portion of the address
H = all 8 bits for an octet are in the host portion of the address
h = a bit in the host portion of the address
Page 1 of 4
Network/Host
N,n = Network
IP Address/Prefix
H,h = Host
Subnet Mask
Network Address
192.168.10.10/24
N.N.N.H
255.255.255.0
192.168.10.0
10.101.99.17/23
N.N.nnnnnnnh.H
255.255.254.0
10.101.98.0
209.165.200.227/27
172.31.45.252/24
10.1.8.200/26
172.16.117.77/20
10.1.1.101/25
209.165.202.140/27
192.168.28.45/28
Step 2: Analyze the table below and list the range of host and broadcast addresses given a
network/prefix mask pair.
The first row shows an example of how the table should be completed.
IP Address/Prefix
192.168.10.10/24
First Host Address

192.168.10.1
Last Host
Address
192.168.10.254
Broadcast
Address
192.168.10.255
10.101.99.17/23
209.165.200.227/27
172.31.45.252/24
10.1.8.200/26
172.16.117.77/20
10.1.1.101/25
209.165.202.140/27
192.168.28.45/28
Part 2: Classify IPv4 Addresses

In Part 2, you will identify and classify several examples of IPv4 addresses.
Step 1: Analyze the table shown below and identify the type of address (network, host,
multicast, or broadcast address).
The first row shows an example of how the table should be completed.
Page 2 of 4
IP Address
Subnet Mask
10.1.1.1
255.255.255.252
192.168.33.63
255.255.255.192
239.192.1.100
255.252.0.0
172.25.12.52
255.255.255.0
10.255.0.0
255.0.0.0
172.16.128.48
255.255.255.240
209.165.202.159
255.255.255.224
172.16.0.255
255.255.0.0
224.10.1.11
255.255.255.0
Address Type
host
Step 2: Analyze the table shown below and identify the address as public or private.
IP Address/Prefix
Public or Private
209.165.201.30/27
192.168.255.253/24
10.100.11.103/16
172.30.1.100/28
192.31.7.11/24
172.20.18.150/22
128.107.10.1/16
192.135.250.10/24
64.104.0.11/16
Step 3: Analyze the table shown below and identify whether the address/prefix pair is a valid
host address.
Page 3 of 4
IP Address/Prefix
Valid Host Address?
Reason
127.1.0.10/24
172.16.255.0/16
241.19.10.100/24
192.168.0.254/24
192.31.7.255/24
64.102.255.255/14
224.0.0.5/16
10.0.255.255/8
198.133.219.8/24
Reflection
Why should we continue to study and learn about IPv4 addressing if the available IPv4 address space is
depleted?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 4

Topology
Objectives
Part 1: Identify the Different Types of IPv6 Addresses
Review the different types of IPv6 addresses.
Match the IPv6 address with the correct type.
Part 2: Examine a Host IPv6 Network Interface and Address
Check PC IPv6 network address settings.
Part 3: Practice IPv6 Address Abbreviation
Study and review the rules for IPv6 address abbreviation.
Practice compressing and decompressing IPv6 addresses.
With the depletion of the Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) network address space and the adoption and
transition to IPv6, networking professionals must understand how both IPv4 and IPv6 networks function.
Many devices and applications already support IPv6. This includes extensive Cisco device Internetwork
Operating System (IOS) support and workstation/server operating system support, such as that found in
Windows and Linux.
This lab focuses on IPv6 addresses and the components of the address. In Part 1, you will identify the IPv6
address types, and in Part 2, you will view the IPv6 settings on a PC. In Part 3, you will practice IPv6 address
abbreviation.
Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7 or Vista with Internet access)
Note: The IPv6 protocol is enabled in Windows 7 and Vista by default. The Windows XP operating system
does not enable IPv6 by default and is not recommended for use with this lab. This lab uses Windows 7 PC
hosts.
Part 1: Identify the Different Types of IPv6 Addresses

In Part 1, you will review the characteristics of IPv6 addresses to identify the different types of IPv6
addresses.
Page 1 of 7
Step 1: Review the different types of IPv6 addresses.

An IPv6 address is 128 bits long. It is most often presented as 32 hexadecimal characters. Each
hexadecimal character is the equivalent of 4 bits (4 x 32 = 128). A non-abbreviated IPv6 host address is
shown here:
2001:0DB8:0001:0000:0000:0000:0000:0001
A hextet is the hexadecimal, IPv6 version of an IPv4 octet. An IPv4 address is 4 octets long, separated by
dots. An IPv6 address is 8 hextets long, separated by colons.
An IPv4 address is 4 octets and is commonly written or displayed in decimal notation.
255.255.255.255
An IPv6 address is 8 hextets and is commonly written or displayed in hexadecimal notation.
FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF
In an IPv4 address, each individual octet is 8 binary digits (bits). Four octets equals one 32-bit IPv4
address.
11111111 = 255
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111111 = 255.255.255.255
In an IPv6 address, each individual hextet is 16 bits long. Eight hextets equals one 128-bit IPv6 address.
1111111111111111 = FFFF
1111111111111111.1111111111111111.1111111111111111.1111111111111111.
1111111111111111.1111111111111111.1111111111111111.1111111111111111 =
FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF
If we read an IPv6 address starting from the left, the first (or far left) hextet identifies the IPv6 address
type. For example, if the IPv6 address has all zeros in the far left hextet, then the address is possibly a
loopback address.
0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0001 = loopback address
::1 = loopback address abbreviated
As another example, if the IPv6 address has FE80 in the first hextet, then the address is a link-local
address.
FE80:0000:0000:0000:C5B7:CB51:3C00:D6CE = link-local address
FE80::C5B7:CB51:3C00:D6CE = link-local address abbreviated
Study the chart below to help you identify the different types of IPv6 address based on the numbers in the
first hextet.
Page 2 of 7
First Hextet (Far Left)
Type of IPv6 Address
0000 to 00FF
Loopback address, any address, unspecified address, or IPv4compatible
2000 to 3FFF
Global unicast address (a routable address in a range of

addresses that is currently being handed out by the Internet
Assigned Numbers Authority [IANA])
FE80 to FEBF
Link-local (a unicast address which identifies the host computer

on the local network)
FC00 to FCFF
Unique-local (a unicast address which can be assigned to a host

to identify it as being part of a specific subnet on the local
network)
FF00 to FFFF
Multicast address
There are other IPv6 address types that are either not yet widely implemented, or have already become
deprecated, and are no longer supported. For instance, an anycast address is new to IPv6 and can be
used by routers to facilitate load sharing and provide alternate path flexibility if a router becomes
unavailable. Only routers should respond to an anycast address. Alternatively, site-local addresses
have been deprecated and replaced by unique-local addresses. Site-local addresses were identified by
the numbers FEC0 in the initial hextet.
In IPv6 networks, there are no network (wire) addresses or broadcast addresses as there are in IPv4
networks.
Step 2: Match the IPv6 address to its type.

Match the IPv6 addresses to their corresponding address type. Notice that the addresses have been
compressed to their abbreviated notation and that the slash network prefix number is not shown. Some
answer choices must be used more than once.
IPv6 Address
Answer
Answer Choices
2001:0DB8:1:ACAD::FE55:6789:B210
1. ____
a. Loopback address
::1
2. ____
b. Global unicast address
FC00:22:A:2::CD4:23E4:76FA
3. ____
c. Link-local address
2033:DB8:1:1:22:A33D:259A:21FE
4. ____
d. Unique-local address
FE80::3201:CC01:65B1
5. ____
e. Multicast address
FF00::
6. ____
FF00::DB7:4322:A231:67C
7. ____
FF02::2
8. ____
Part 2: Examine a Host IPv6 Network Interface and Address

In Part 2, you will check the IPv6 network settings of your PC to identify your network interface IPv6 address.
Step 1: Check your PC IPv6 network address settings.

a. Verify that the IPv6 protocol is installed and active on your PC-A (check your Local Area Connection
settings).
Page 3 of 7

b. Click the Windows Start button and then Control Panel and change View by: Category to View by:
Small icons.
c.
Click the Network and Sharing Center icon.
d. On the left side of the window, click Change adapter settings. You should now see icons representing
your installed network adapters. Right-click your active network interface (it may be a Local Area
Connection or a Wireless Network Connection), and then click Properties.
e. You should now see your Network Connection Properties window. Scroll through the list of items to
determine whether IPv6 is present, which indicates that it is installed, and if it is also check marked, which
indicates that it is active.
f.
Select the item Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) and click Properties. You should see the IPv6
settings for your network interface. Your IPv6 properties window is likely set to Obtain an IPv6 address
automatically. This does not mean that IPv6 relies on the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
Instead of using DHCP, IPv6 looks to the local router for IPv6 network information and then autoconfigures its own IPv6 addresses. To manually configure IPv6, you must provide the IPv6 address, the
subnet prefix length, and the default gateway.
Note: The local router can refer host requests for IPv6 information, especially Domain Name System
(DNS) information, to a DHCPv6 server on the network.
Page 4 of 7
g. After you have verified that IPv6 is installed and active on your PC, you should check your IPv6 address
information. To do this, click the Start button, type cmd in the Search programs and files form box, and
press Enter. This opens a Windows command prompt window.
h. Type ipconfig /all and press Enter. Your output should look similar to this:
C:\Users\user> ipconfig /all
Windows IP Configuration
<output omitted>
Wireless LAN adapter Wireless Network Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix
Description . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Address. . . . . . . .
DHCP Enabled. . . . . . . . . .
Autoconfiguration Enabled . . .
Link-local IPv6 Address . . . .
IPv4 Address. . . . . . . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . .
Lease Obtained. . . . . . . . .
Lease Expires . . . . . . . . .
Default Gateway . . . . . . . .
DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . .
DHCPv6 IAID . . . . . . . . . .
DHCPv6 Client DUID. . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Intel(R) Centrino(R) Advanced-N 6200 AGN

02-37-10-41-FB-48
Yes
Yes
fe80::8d4f:4f4d:3237:95e2%14(Preferred)
192.168.2.106(Preferred)
255.255.255.0
Sunday, January 06, 2013 9:47:36 AM
Monday, January 07, 2013 9:47:38 AM
192.168.2.1
192.168.2.1
335554320
00-01-00-01-14-57-84-B1-1C-C1-DE-91-C3-5D
DNS Servers . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.1.1
Page 5 of 7

8.8.4.4
<output omitted>
i.
You can see from the output that the client PC has an IPv6 link-local address with a randomly generated
interface ID. What does it indicate about the network regarding IPv6 global unicast address, IPv6 uniquelocal address, or IPv6 gateway address?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
j.
What kind of IPv6 addresses did you find when using ipconfig /all?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Part 3: Practice IPv6 Address Abbreviation

In Part 3, you will study and review rules for IPv6 address abbreviation to correctly compress and decompress
IPv6 addresses.
Step 1: Study and review the rules for IPv6 address abbreviation.
Rule 1: In an IPv6 address, a string of four zeros (0s) in a hextet can be abbreviated as a single zero.
2001:0404:0001:1000:0000:0000:0EF0:BC00
2001:0404:0001:1000:0:0:0EF0:BC00 (abbreviated with single zeros)
Rule 2: In an IPv6 address, the leading zeros in each hextet can be omitted, trailing zeros cannot be omitted.
2001:0404:0001:1000:0000:0000:0EF0:BC00
2001:404:1:1000:0:0:EF0:BC00 (abbreviated with leading zeros omitted)
Rule 3: In an IPv6 address, a single continuous string of four or more zeros can be abbreviated as a double
colon (::). The double colon abbreviation can only be used one time in an IP address.
2001:0404:0001:1000:0000:0000:0EF0:BC00
2001:404:1:1000::EF0:BC00 (abbreviated with leading zeroes omitted and continuous zeros
replaced with a double colon)
The image below illustrates these rules of IPv6 address abbreviation:
Page 6 of 7
Step 2: Practice compressing and decompressing IPv6 addresses.

Using the rules of IPv6 address abbreviation, either compress or decompress the following addresses:
1) 2002:0EC0:0200:0001:0000:04EB:44CE:08A2
________________________________________________________________________________
2) FE80:0000:0000:0001:0000:60BB:008E:7402
________________________________________________________________________________
3) FE80::7042:B3D7:3DEC:84B8
________________________________________________________________________________
4) FF00::
________________________________________________________________________________
5) 2001:0030:0001:ACAD:0000:330E:10C2:32BF
________________________________________________________________________________
Reflection
1. How do you think you must support IPv6 in the future?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Do you think IPv4 networks continue on, or will everyone eventually switch over to IPv6? How long do you
think it will take?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 7 of 7
Lab - Configuring IPv6 Addresses on Network Devices

Topology
Addressing Table
Device
R1
Interface
IPv6 Address
Prefix
Length
Default Gateway
G0/0
2001:DB8:ACAD:A::1
64
N/A
G0/1
2001:DB8:ACAD:1::1
64
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
2001:DB8:ACAD:1::B
64
N/A
PC-A
NIC
2001:DB8:ACAD:1::3
64
FE80::1
PC-B
NIC
2001:DB8:ACAD:A::3
64
FE80::1
Objectives
Part 1: Set Up Topology and Configure Basic Router and Switch Settings
Part 2: Configure IPv6 Addresses Manually
Part 3: Verify End-to-End Connectivity
Knowledge of the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) multicast groups can be helpful when assigning IPv6
addresses manually. Understanding how the all-router multicast group is assigned and how to control address
assignments for the Solicited Nodes multicast group can prevent IPv6 routing issues and help ensure best
practices are implemented.
In this lab, you will configure hosts and device interfaces with IPv6 addresses and explore how the all-router
multicast group is assigned to a router. You will use show commands to view IPv6 unicast and multicast
addresses. You will also verify end-to-end connectivity using the ping and traceroute commands.
Note: The routers used with CCNA hands-on labs are Cisco 1941 ISRs with Cisco IOS Release 15.2(4)M3
(universalk9 image). The switches used are Cisco Catalyst 2960s with Cisco IOS Release 15.0(2) (lanbasek9
image). Other routers, switches and Cisco IOS versions can be used. Depending on the model and Cisco IOS
version, the commands available and output produced might vary from what is shown in the labs. Refer to the
Router Interface Summary table at the end of the lab for the correct interface identifiers.
Required Resources
1 Router (Cisco 1941 with Cisco IOS software, Release 15.2(4)M3 universal image or comparable)
Page 1 of 11
2 PCs (Windows 7 with terminal emulation program, such as Tera Term)
Note: The Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on Cisco 1941 routers are autosensing and an Ethernet straightthrough cable may be used between the router and PC-B. If using another model Cisco router, it may be
necessary to use an Ethernet crossover cable.
Note: The IPv6 protocol is enabled in Windows 7 and Vista by default. The Windows XP operating system
does not enable IPv6 by default and is not recommended for use with this lab. This lab uses Windows 7 PC
hosts.
Part 1: Set Up Topology and Configure Basic Router and Switch Settings
Step 3: Verify that the PC interfaces are configured to use the IPv6 protocol.
Verify that the IPv6 protocol is active on both PCs by ensuring that the Internet Protocol Version 6
(TCP/IPv6) check box is selected in the Local Area Connection Properties window.

b. Assign the device name to the router.
Page 2 of 11

c.
Disable DNS lookup to prevent the router from attempting to translate incorrectly entered commands as
though they were hostnames.
d. Assign class as the privileged EXEC encrypted password.

e. Assign cisco as the console password and enable login.
f.
Assign cisco as the VTY password and enable login.
g. Encrypt the clear text passwords.

h. Create a banner that warns anyone accessing the device that unauthorized access is prohibited.
i.
Step 5: Configure the switch.

a. Console into the switch and enable privileged EXEC mode.
b. Assign the device name to the switch.
c.

f.
Assign cisco as the VTY password and enable login.
g. Encrypt the clear text passwords.

i.
Part 2: Configure IPv6 Addresses Manually

Step 1: Assign the IPv6 addresses to Ethernet interfaces on R1.
a. Assign the IPv6 global unicast addresses, listed in the Addressing Table, to both Ethernet interfaces on
R1.
R1(config)# interface g0/0
R1(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001:db8:acad:a::1/64
R1(config-if)# interface g0/1
R1(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001:db8:acad:1::1/64
R1(config-if)# end
R1#
b. Issue the show ipv6 interface brief command to verify that the correct IPv6 unicast address is assigned
to each interface.
R1# show ipv6 interface brief
Em0/0
[administratively down/down]
unassigned
GigabitEthernet0/0
[up/up]
FE80::D68C:B5FF:FECE:A0C0
2001:DB8:ACAD:A::1
Page 3 of 11

GigabitEthernet0/1
[up/up]
FE80::D68C:B5FF:FECE:A0C1
2001:DB8:ACAD:1::1
Serial0/0/0
unassigned
Serial0/0/1
unassigned
R1#
c.
Issue the show ipv6 interface g0/0 command. Notice that the interface is listing two Solicited Nodes
multicast groups, because the IPv6 link-local (FE80) Interface ID was not manually configured to match
the IPv6 unicast Interface ID.
Note: The link-local address displayed is based on EUI-64 addressing, which automatically uses the
interface Media Access Control (MAC) address to create a 128-bit IPv6 link-local address.
R1# show ipv6 interface g0/0
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::D68C:B5FF:FECE:A0C0
No Virtual link-local address(es):
Global unicast address(es):
2001:DB8:ACAD:A::1, subnet is 2001:DB8:ACAD:A::/64
Joined group address(es):
FF02::1
FF02::1:FF00:1
FF02::1:FFCE:A0C0
MTU is 1500 bytes
ICMP error messages limited to one every 100 milliseconds
ICMP redirects are enabled
ICMP unreachables are sent
ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 1
ND reachable time is 30000 milliseconds (using 30000)
ND advertised reachable time is 0 (unspecified)
ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 (unspecified)
ND router advertisements are sent every 200 seconds
ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds
ND advertised default router preference is Medium
Hosts use stateless autoconfig for addresses.
R1#
d. To get the link-local address to match the unicast address on the interface, manually enter the link-local
addresses on each of the Ethernet interfaces on R1.
R1# config t
End with CNTL/Z.

R1(config-if)# ipv6 address fe80::1 link-local
R1(config-if)# ipv6 address fe80::1 link-local
R1(config-if)# end
R1#
Page 4 of 11

Note: Each router interface belongs to a separate network. Packets with a link-local address never leave
the local network; therefore, you can use the same link-local address on both interfaces.
e. Re-issue the show ipv6 interface g0/0 command. Notice that the link-local address has been changed to
FE80::1 and that there is only one Solicited Nodes multicast group listed.
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::1
2001:DB8:ACAD:A::1, subnet is 2001:DB8:ACAD:A::/64
FF02::1
FF02::1:FF00:1
MTU is 1500 bytes
R1#
What multicast groups have been assigned to interface G0/0?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Enable IPv6 routing on R1.

a. On a PC-B command prompt, enter the ipconfig command to examine IPv6 address information
assigned to the PC interface.
Page 5 of 11

Has an IPv6 unicast address been assigned to the network interface card (NIC) on PC-B? _________
b. Enable IPv6 routing on R1 using the IPv6 unicast-routing command.
R1 # configure terminal
R1(config)# ipv6 unicast-routing
R1(config)# exit
R1#
*Dec 17 18:29:07.415: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
c.
Use the show ipv6 interface g0/0 command to see what multicast groups are assigned to interface
G0/0. Notice that the all-router multicast group (FF02::2) now appears in the group list for interface G0/0.
Note: This will allow the PCs to obtain their IP address and default gateway information automatically
using Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC).
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::1
2001:DB8:ACAD:A::1, subnet is 2001:DB8:ACAD:A::/64 [EUI]
FF02::1
FF02::2
FF02::1:FF00:1
MTU is 1500 bytes
R1#
d. Now that R1 is part of the all-router multicast group, re-issue the ipconfig command on PC-B. Examine
the IPv6 address information.
Page 6 of 11
Why did PC-B receive the Global Routing Prefix and Subnet ID that you configured on R1?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 3: Assign IPv6 addresses to the management interface (SVI) on S1.

a. Assign the IPv6 address listed in the Addressing Table to the management interface (VLAN 1) on S1.
Also assign a link-local address for this interface. IPv6 command syntax is the same as on the router.
b. Verify that the IPv6 addresses are properly assigned to the management interface using the show ipv6
interface vlan1 command.
Note: The default 2960 Switch Database Manager (SDM) template does not support IPv6. It may be
necessary to issue the command sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 default to enable IPv6 addressing
before applying an IPv6 address to the VLAN 1 SVI.
Step 4: Assign static IPv6 addresses to the PCs.

a. Open the Local Area Connection Properties window on PC-A. Select Internet Protocol Version 6
(TCP/IPv6) and click Properties.
Page 7 of 11
b. Click the Use the following IPv6 address radio button. Refer to the Addressing Table and enter the IPv6
address, Subnet prefix length, and Default gateway information. Click OK.
c.
Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
Page 8 of 11

d. Repeat Steps 4a to c to enter the static IPv6 information on PC-B. For the correct IPv6 address
information, refer to the Addressing Table.
e. Issue the ipconfig command from the command line on PC-B to verify the IPv6 address information.
Part 3: Verify End-to-End Connectivity

a. From PC-A, ping FE80::1. This is the link-local address assigned to G0/1 on R1.
Note: You can also test connectivity by using the global unicast address, instead of the link-local address.
b. Ping the S1 management interface from PC-A.
c.
Use the tracert command on PC-A to verify that you have end-to-end connectivity to PC-B.
Page 9 of 11
d. From PC-B, ping PC-A.
e. From PC-B, ping the link-local address for G0/0 on R1.
Note: If end-to-end connectivity is not established, troubleshoot your IPv6 address assignments to verify
that you entered the addresses correctly on all devices.
Reflection
1. Why can the same link-local address, FE80::1, be assigned to both Ethernet interfaces on R1?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. What is the Subnet ID of the IPv6 unicast address 2001:db8:acad::aaaa:1234/64?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 10 of 11

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/0/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Page 11 of 11
Lab Testing Network Connectivity with Ping and Traceroute

Topology
Page 1 of 15
Addressing Table
Device
LOCAL
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
G0/1
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
S0/0/0 (DCE)
10.1.1.1
255.255.255.252
N/A
S0/0/0
10.1.1.2
255.255.255.252
N/A
S0/0/1 (DCE)
10.2.2.2
255.255.255.252
N/A
G0/1
192.168.3.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
S0/0/1
10.2.2.1
255.255.255.252
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
192.168.1.11
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
S3
VLAN 1
192.168.3.11
255.255.255.0
192.168.3.1
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
PC-C
NIC
192.168.3.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.3.1
ISP
REMOTE
Objectives
Cable the network.
Configure the PCs.
Configure the routers.
Configure the switches.
Part 2: Use Ping Command for Basic Network Testing
Use ping from a PC.
Use ping from Cisco devices.
Part 3: Use Tracert and Traceroute Commands for Basic Network Testing
Use tracert from a PC.
Use traceroute from Cisco devices.
Part 4: Troubleshoot the Topology
Ping and traceroute are two tools that are indispensable when testing TCP/IP network connectivity. Ping is a
network administration utility used to test the reachability of a device on an IP network. This utility also
measures the round-trip time for messages sent from the originating host to a destination computer. The ping
utility is available on Windows, Unix-like operating systems (OS), and the Cisco Internetwork Operating
System (IOS).
The traceroute utility is a network diagnostic tool for displaying the route and measuring the transit delays of
packets travelling an IP network. The tracert utility is available on Windows, and a similar utility, traceroute, is
available on Unix-like OS and Cisco IOS.
In this lab, the ping and traceroute commands are examined and command options are explored to modify
the command behavior. Cisco devices and PCs are used in this lab for command exploration. Cisco routers
Page 2 of 15

will use Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) to route packets between networks. The
necessary Cisco device configurations are provided in this lab.
Required Resources
3 Routers (Cisco 1941 with Cisco IOS Release 15.2(4)M3 universal image or comparable)
Ethernet and serial cables as shown in the topology

In Part 1, you will set up the network in the topology and configure the PCs and Cisco devices. The initial
configurations for the routers and switches are provided for your reference. In this topology, EIGRP is used to
route packets between networks.

Step 2: Erase the configurations on the routers and switches, and reload the devices.
Step 3: Configure PC IP addresses and default gateways according to the Addressing Table.
Step 4: Configure the LOCAL, ISP, and REMOTE routers using the initial configurations
provided below.
At the switch or router global config mode prompt, copy and paste the configuration for each device. Save the
configuration to startup-config.
Initial configurations for the LOCAL router:
hostname LOCAL
no ip domain-lookup
interface s0/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.252
clock rate 56000
no shutdown
interface g0/1
ip add 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
no shutdown
router eigrp 1
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
Page 3 of 15

network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
no auto-summary
Initial configurations for ISP:
hostname ISP
no ip domain-lookup
interface s0/0/0
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
no shutdown
interface s0/0/1
ip add 10.2.2.2 255.255.255.252
clock rate 56000
no shutdown
router eigrp 1
network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.2.2.0 0.0.0.3
no auto-summary
end
Initial configurations for REMOTE:
hostname REMOTE
no ip domain-lookup
interface s0/0/1
ip address 10.2.2.1 255.255.255.252
no shutdown
interface g0/1
ip add 192.168.3.1 255.255.255.0
no shutdown
router eigrp 1
network 10.2.2.0 0.0.0.3
network 192.168.3.0 0.0.0.255
no auto-summary
end
Step 5: Configure the S1 and S3 switches with the initial configurations.

Initial configurations for S1:
hostname S1
no ip domain-lookup
interface vlan 1
ip add 192.168.1.11 255.255.255.0
no shutdown
exit
ip default-gateway 192.168.1.1
end
Initial configurations for S3:
Page 4 of 15

hostname S3
no ip domain-lookup
interface vlan 1
ip add 192.168.3.11 255.255.255.0
no shutdown
exit
ip default-gateway 192.168.3.1
end
Step 6: Configure an IP host table on the LOCAL router.

The IP host table allows you to use a hostname to connect to a remote device rather than an IP address. The
host table provides name resolution for the device with the following configurations. Copy and paste the
following configurations for the LOCAL router. The configurations will allow you to use the hostnames for ping
and traceroute commands on the LOCAL router.
ip host
ip host
ip host
ip host
ip host
ip host
ip host
end
REMOTE 10.2.2.1 192.168.3.1

ISP 10.1.1.2 10.2.2.2
LOCAL 192.168.1.1 10.1.1.1
PC-C 192.168.3.3
PC-A 192.168.1.3
S1 192.168.1.11
S3 192.168.3.11
Part 2: Use Ping Command for Basic Network Testing

In Part 2 of this lab, use the ping command to verify end-to-end connectivity. Ping operates by sending
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo request packets to the target host and then waiting for an
ICMP response. It can record the round trip time and any packet loss.
You will examine the results with the ping command and the additional ping options that are available on
Windows-based PCs and Cisco devices.
Step 1: Test network connectivity from the LOCAL network using PC-A.
All the pings from PC-A to other devices in the topology should be successful. If they are not, check the
topology and the cabling, as well as the configuration of the Cisco devices and the PCs.
a. Ping from PC-A to its default gateway (LOCALs GigabitEthernet 0/1 interface).
Pinging 192.168.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=255

Page 5 of 15

In this example, four (4) ICMP requests, 32 bytes each, were sent and the responses were received in
less than one millisecond with no packet loss. The transmission and reply time increases as the ICMP
requests and responses are processed by more devices during the journey to and from the final
destination.
b. From PC-A, ping the addresses listed in the following table and record the average round trip time and
Time to Live (TTL).
Destination
Average Round Trip Time (ms)
TTL
192.168.1.1 (LOCAL)
192.168.1.11 (S1)
10.1.1.1 (LOCAL)
10.1.1.2 (ISP)
10.2.2.2 (ISP)
10.2.2.1 (REMOTE)
192.168.3.1 (REMOTE)
192.168.3.11 (S3)
192.168.3.3 (PC-C)
Notice the average round trip time to 192.168.3.3 (PC-C). The time increased because the ICMP
requests were processed by three routers before PC-A received the reply from PC-C.
Reply from 192.168.3.3: bytes=32 time=41ms
TTL=125
TTL=125
TTL=125
TTL=125

Step 2: Use extended ping commands on a PC.

The default ping command sends four requests at 32 bytes each. It waits 4,000 milliseconds (4 seconds) for
each response to be returned before displaying the Request timed out message. The ping command can be
fine tuned for troubleshooting a network.
a. At the command prompt, type ping and press Enter.
C:\Users\User1> ping
Usage: ping [-t] [-a] [-n count] [-l size] [-f] [-i TTL] [-v TOS]
[-r count] [-s count] [[-j host-list] | [-k host-list]]
[-w timeout] [-R] [-S srcaddr] [-4] [-6] target_name
Options:
-t
Ping the specified host until stopped.
Page 6 of 15
-a
-n
-l
-f
-i
-v
-r
-s
-j
-k
-w
-R
-S
-4
-6
count
size
TTL
TOS
count
count
host-list
host-list
timeout
srcaddr
To see statistics and continue - type Control-Break;

To stop - type Control-C.
Resolve addresses to hostnames.
Number of echo requests to send.
Send buffer size.
Set Don't Fragment flag in packet (IPv4-only).
Time To Live.
Type Of Service (IPv4-only. This setting has been deprecated
and has no effect on the type of service field in the IP Header).
Record route for count hops (IPv4-only).
Timestamp for count hops (IPv4-only).
Loose source route along host-list (IPv4-only).
Strict source route along host-list (IPv4-only).
Timeout in milliseconds to wait for each reply.
Use routing header to test reverse route also (IPv6-only).
Source address to use.
Force using IPv4.
Force using IPv6.
b. Using the t option, ping PC-C to verify that PC-C is reachable.

C:\Users\User1> ping t 192.168.3.3
To illustrate the results when a host is unreachable, disconnect the cable between the REMOTE router
and the S3 switch, or shut down the GigabitEthernet 0/1 interface on the REMOTE router.
Reply from 192.168.1.3: Destination host unreachable.
While the network is functioning correctly, the ping command can determine whether the destination
responded and how long it took to receive a reply from the destination. If a network connectivity problem
exists, the ping command displays an error message.
c.
Reconnect the Ethernet cable or enable the GigabitEthernet interface on the REMOTE router (using the
no shutdown command) before moving onto the next step. After about 30 seconds, the ping should be
successful again.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
d. Press Ctrl+C to stop the ping command.
Step 3: Test network connectivity from the LOCAL network using Cisco devices.
The ping command is also available on Cisco devices. In this step, the ping command is examined using the
LOCAL router and the S1 switch.
a. Ping PC-C on the REMOTE network using the IP address of 192.168.3.3 from the LOCAL router.
LOCAL# ping 192.168.3.3
Page 7 of 15

!!!!!
The exclamation point (!) indicates that the ping was successful from the LOCAL router to PC-C. The
round trip takes an average of 64 ms with no packet loss, as indicated by a 100% success rate.
b. Because a local host table was configured on the LOCAL router, you can ping PC-C on the REMOTE
network using the hostname configured from the LOCAL router.
LOCAL# ping PC-C
!!!!!
c.
There are more options available for the ping command. At the CLI, type ping and press Enter. Input
192.168.3.3 or PC-C for the Target IP address. Press Enter to accept the default value for other options.
LOCAL# ping
Protocol [ip]:
Target IP address: PC-C
Repeat count [5]:
Datagram size [100]:
Timeout in seconds [2]:
Extended commands [n]:
Sweep range of sizes [n]:
!!!!!
d. You can use an extended ping to observe when there is a network issue. Start the ping command to
192.168.3.3 with a repeat a count of 500. Then, disconnect the cable between the REMOTE router and
the S3 switch or shut down the GigabitEthernet 0/1 interface on the REMOTE router.
Reconnect the Ethernet cable or enable the GigabitEthernet interface on the REMOTE router after the
exclamation points (!) have replaced by the letter U and periods (.). After about 30 seconds, the ping
should be successful again. Press Ctrl+Shift+6 to stop the ping command if desired.
LOCAL# ping
Protocol [ip]:
Target IP address: 192.168.3.3
Repeat count [5]: 500
Datagram size [100]:
Timeout in seconds [2]:
Extended commands [n]:
Sweep range of sizes [n]:
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!U................
....!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Page 8 of 15

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!
The letter U in the results indicates that a destination is unreachable. An error protocol data unit (PDU)
was received by the LOCAL router. Each period (.) in the output indicates that the ping timed out while
waiting for a reply from PC-C. In this example, 5% of the packets were lost during the simulated network
outage.
Note: You can also use the following command for the same results:
LOCAL# ping 192.168.3.3 repeat 500
or
LOCAL# ping PC-C repeat 500
e. You can also test network connectivity with a switch. In this example, the S1 switch pings the S3 switch
on the REMOTE network.
S1# ping 192.168.3.11
!!!!!
The ping command is extremely useful when troubleshooting network connectivity. However, ping cannot
indicate the location of problem when a ping is not successful. The tracert (or traceroute) command can
display network latency and path information.
Part 3: Use Tracert and Traceroute Commands for Basic Network Testing
The commands for tracing routes can be found on PCs and network devices. For a Windows-based PC, the
tracert command uses ICMP messages to trace the path to the final destination. The traceroute command
utilizes the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) datagrams for tracing routes to the final destination for Cisco
devices and other Unix-like PCs.
In Part 3, you will examine the traceroute commands and determine the path that a packet travels to its final
destination. You will use the tracert command from the Windows PCs and the traceroute command from the
Cisco devices. You will also examine the options that are available for fine tuning the traceroute results.
Step 1: Use the tracert command from PC-A to PC-C.

a. At the command prompt, type tracert 192.168.3.3.
C:\Users\User1> tracert 192.168.3.3
Tracing route to PC-C [192.168.3.3]
Over a maximum of 30 hops:
1
2
3
4
<1
24
48
59
ms
ms
ms
ms
<1
24
48
59
ms
ms
ms
ms
<1
24
48
59
ms
ms
ms
ms
192.168.1.1
10.1.1.2
10.2.2.1
PC-C [192.168.3.3]
Trace complete.
Page 9 of 15

The tracert results indicates the path from PC-A to PC-C is from PC-A to LOCAL to ISP to REMOTE to
PC-C. The path to PC-C traveled through three router hops to the final destination of PC-C.
Step 2: Explore additional options for the tracert command.

a. At the command prompt, type tracert and press Enter.
C:\Users\User1> tracert
Usage: tracert [-d] [-h maximum_hops] [-j host-list] [-w timeout]
[-R] [-S srcaddr] [-4] [-6] target_name
Options:
-d
-h maximum_hops
-j host-list
-w timeout
-R
-S srcaddr
-4
-6
Do not resolve addresses to hostnames.

Maximum number of hops to search for target.
Loose source route along host-list (IPv4-only).
Wait timeout milliseconds for each reply.
Trace round-trip path (IPv6-only).
Source address to use (IPv6-only).
Force using IPv4.
Force using IPv6.
b. Use the -d option. Notice that the IP address of 192.168.3.3 is not resolved as PC-C.
C:\Users\User1> tracert d 192.168.3.3
Tracing route to 192.168.3.3 over a maximum of 30 hops:
1
2
3
4
<1
24
48
59
ms
ms
ms
ms
<1
24
48
59
ms
ms
ms
ms
<1
24
48
59
ms
ms
ms
ms
192.168.1.1
10.1.1.2
10.2.2.1
192.168.3.3
Trace complete.
Step 3: Use the traceroute command from the LOCAL router to PC-C.
a. At the command prompt, type traceroute 192.168.3.3 or traceroute PC-C on the LOCAL router. The
hostnames are resolved because a local IP host table was configured on the LOCAL router.
LOCAL# traceroute 192.168.3.3
Tracing the route to PC-C (192.168.3.3)
VRF info: (vrf in name/id, vrf out name/id)
1 ISP (10.1.1.2) 16 msec 16 msec 16 msec
2 REMOTE (10.2.2.1) 28 msec 32 msec 28 msec
3 PC-C (192.168.3.3) 32 msec 28 msec 32 msec
LOCAL# traceroute PC-C

Tracing the route to PC-C (192.168.3.3)
1 ISP (10.1.1.2) 16 msec 16 msec 16 msec
2 REMOTE (10.2.2.1) 28 msec 32 msec 28 msec
Page 10 of 15

3 PC-C (192.168.3.3) 32 msec 32 msec 28 msec
Step 4: Use the traceroute command from the S1 switch to PC-C.

a. On the S1 switch, type traceroute 192.168.3.3. The hostnames are not displayed in the traceroute
results because a local IP host table was not configured on this switch.
S1# traceroute 192.168.3.3
Tracing the route to 192.168.3.3
1 192.168.1.1 1007 msec 0 msec 0 msec
2 10.1.1.2 17 msec 17 msec 16 msec
3 10.2.2.1 34 msec 33 msec 26 msec
4 192.168.3.3 33 msec 34 msec 33 msec
The traceroute command has additional options. You can use the ? or just press Enter after typing
traceroute at the prompt to explore these options.
The following link provides more information regarding the ping and traceroute commands for a Cisco
device:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1831/products_tech_note09186a00800a6057.shtml
Part 4: Troubleshoot the Topology

Step 1: Erase the configurations on the REMOTE router.
Step 2: Reload the REMOTE router.
Step 3: Copy and paste the following configuration into the REMOTE router.
hostname REMOTE
no ip domain-lookup
interface s0/0/1
ip address 10.2.2.1 255.255.255.252
no shutdown
interface g0/1
ip add 192.168.8.1 255.255.255.0
no shutdown
router eigrp 1
network 10.2.2.0 0.0.0.3
network 192.168.3.0 0.0.0.255
no auto-summary
end
Step 4: From the LOCAL network, use ping and tracert or traceroute commands to
troubleshoot and correct the problem on the REMOTE network.
a. Use the ping and tracert commands from PC-A.
Page 11 of 15

You can use the tracert command to determine end-to-end network connectivity. This tracert result
indicates that PC-A can reach its default gateway of 192.168.1.1, but PC-A does not have network
connectivity with PC-C.
Tracing route to 192.168.3.3 over a maximum of 30 hops
1
<1 ms
<1 ms
<1 ms 192.168.1.1
2 192.168.1.1 reports: Destination host unreachable.
Trace complete.
One way to locate the network issue is to ping each hop in the network to PC-C. First determine if PC-A
can reach the ISP router Serial 0/0/1 interface with an IP address of 10.2.2.2.
C:\Users\Utraser1> ping 10.2.2.2
TTL=254
TTL=254
TTL=254
TTL=254

The ping was successful to the ISP router. The next hop in the network is the REMOTE router. Ping the
REMOTE router Serial 0/0/1 interface with an IP address of 10.2.2.1.
TTL=253
TTL=253
TTL=253
TTL=253

PC-A can reach the REMOTE router. Based on the successful ping results from PC-A to the REMOTE
router, the network connectivity issue is with 192.168.3.0/24 network. Ping the default gateway to PC-C,
which is the GigabitEthernet 0/1 interface of the REMOTE router.
Page 12 of 15

PC-A cannot reach the GigabitEthernet 0/1 interface of the REMOTE router, as displayed by the results
from the ping command.
The S3 switch can also be pinged from PC-A to verify the location of the networking connectivity issue by
typing ping 192.168.3.11 at the command prompt. Because PC-A cannot reach GigabitEthernet 0/1 of
the REMOTE router, PC-A probably cannot ping the S3 switch successfully, as indicated by the results
below.
The tracert and ping results conclude that PC-A can reach the LOCAL, ISP, and REMOTE routers, but
not PC-C or the S3 switch, nor the default gateway for PC-C.
b. Use the show commands to examine the running configurations for the the REMOTE router.
REMOTE# show ip interface brief
Interface
GigabitEthernet0/0
GigabitEthernet0/1
Serial0/0/0
Serial0/0/1
IP-Address
unassigned
unassigned
192.168.8.1
unassigned
10.2.2.1
OK?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Method
unset
unset
manual
unset
manual
Status
Protocol
up
up
up
up
REMOTE# show run

<output omitted>
no ip address
shutdown
duplex auto
speed auto
!
ip address 192.168.8.1 255.255.255.0
duplex auto
speed auto
!
interface Serial0/0/0
no ip address
shutdown
Page 13 of 15

clock rate 2000000
!
interface Serial0/0/1
ip address 10.2.2.1 255.255.255.252
<output omitted>
The outputs of the show run and show ip interface brief commands indicate that the GigabitEthernet
0/1 interface is up/up, but was configured with an incorrect IP address.
c.
Correct the IP address for GigabitEthernet 0/1.

REMOTE# configure terminal
End with CNTL/Z.
REMOTE(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 0/1

REMOTE(config-if)# ip address 192.168.3.1 255.255.255.0
d. Verify that PC-A can ping and tracert to PC-C.
TTL=125
TTL=125
TTL=125
TTL=125


Tracing route to PC-C [192.168.3.3]
Over a maximum of 30 hops:
1
2
3
4
<1
24
48
59
ms
ms
ms
ms
<1
24
48
59
ms
ms
ms
ms
<1
24
48
59
ms
ms
ms
ms
192.168.1.1
10.1.1.2
10.2.2.1
PC-C [192.168.3.3]
Trace complete.
Note: This can also be accomplished using ping and traceroute commands from the CLI on the the
LOCAL router and the S1 switch after verifying that there are no network connectivity issues on the
192.168.1.0/24 network.
Reflection
1. What could prevent ping or traceroute responses from reaching the originating device beside network
connectivity issues?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 14 of 15

2. If you ping a non-existent address on the remote network, such as 192.168.3.4, what is the message
displayed by the ping command? What does this mean? If you ping a valid host address and receive this
response, what should you check?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3. If you ping an address that does not exist in any network in your topology, such as 192.168.5.3, from a
Windows-based PC, what is the message displayed by the ping command? What does this message
indicate?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Page 15 of 15
The Internet of EverythingNaturally!

Objectives
Explain the need for IPv6 network addresses.
This is an application-based activity. You will develop a plan to show how IoE subnets, unicasts, and
multicasts could be used in our daily lives to affect data communication.
Background/Scenario
Note: This activity may be completed individually or in small/large groups.
This chapter discussed the ways in which small to medium-sized businesses are connected to networks
in groups. The IoE was introduced in the activity at the beginning of this chapter.
Choose one of the following:
Online banking
World news
Weather forecasting/climate
Traffic conditions
Devise an IPv6 addressing scheme for the area you have chosen. Your addressing scheme should
include how you would plan for:
Subnetting
Unicasts
Multicasts
Keep a copy of your scheme to share with the class or learning community. Be prepared to explain:
How subnetting, unicasts, and multicasts could be incorporated
Where your addressing scheme could be used
How small to medium-size businesses would be affected by using your plan
Required Resources
Paper, pens, pencils, or tablets
Packet Tracer (if you would like to display how your network would physically look)
Hard- or soft-copy of the final network topology with IPv6 addressing indicated for sharing with the class.
Reflection
1. What was the hardest part of designing this network model? Explain your answer.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 1
Call me!
Objectives
Explain why routing is necessary for hosts on different subnets to communicate.
In this activity, you will:
Recognize that data is delivered quicker if group addressing identifiers are used.
Visualize how communication is facilitated through providing large groups and then splitting those
groups into more manageable parts. After reflecting on how your smartphone or landline telephone
numbers are divided, you can draw inferences to how networking employs the same practices.
Background/Scenario
In this chapter, you will learn how devices can be grouped into subnets, or smaller network groups, from a
large network.
In this modeling activity, you are asked to think about a number you probably use every day, a number
such as your telephone number. As you complete the activity, think about how your telephone number
compares to strategies that network administrators might use to identify hosts for efficient data
communication.
Complete the two sections listed below and record your answers. Save the two sections in either hard- or
soft-copy format to use later for class discussion purposes.
Explain how your smartphone or landline telephone number is divided into identifying groups of
numbers. Does your telephone number use an area code? An Internet service provider (ISP)
identifier? A city, state, or country code?
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
In what ways does separating your telephone number into managed parts assist in contacting or
communicating with others?
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Required Resources
Recording capabilities (paper, tablet, etc.) for reflective comments to be shared with the class
Reflection
1. Why do you think ISPs need your telephone number when setting up your account parameters?
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 1
Lab Calculating IPv4 Subnets

Objectives
Part 1: Determine IPv4 Address Subnetting
Determine the network address.
Determine the broadcast address.
Determine the number of hosts.
Part 2: Calculate IPv4 Address Subnetting
Determine the number of subnets created.
Determine number of hosts per subnet.
Determine the subnet address.
Determine the host range for the subnet.
Determine the broadcast address for the subnet.
The ability to work with IPv4 subnets and determine network and host information based on a given IP
address and subnet mask is critical to understanding how IPv4 networks operate. The first part is designed to
reinforce how to compute network IP address information from a given IP address and subnet mask. When
given an IP address and subnet mask, you will be able to determine other information about the subnet such
as:
Network address
Broadcast address
Total number of host bits
Number of hosts per subnet
In the second part of the lab, for a given IP address and subnet mask, you will determine such information as
follows:
Network address of this subnet
Broadcast address of this subnet
Range of host addresses for this subnet
Number of subnets created
Number of hosts for each subnet
Required Resources
Optional: IPv4 address calculator
Part 1: Determine IPv4 Address Subnetting

In Part 1, you will determine the network and broadcast addresses, as well as the number of hosts, given an
IPv4 address and subnet mask.
Page 1 of 7

REVIEW: To determine the network address, perform binary ANDing on the IPv4 address using the subnet
mask provided. The result will be the network address. Hint: If the subnet mask has decimal value 255 in an
octet, the result will ALWAYS be the original value of that octet. If the subnet mask has decimal value 0 in an
octet, the result will ALWAYS be 0 for that octet.
Example:
IP Address
192.168.10.10
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
==========
Result (Network)
192.168.10.0
Knowing this, you may only have to perform binary ANDing on an octet that does not have 255 or 0 in its
subnet mask portion.
Example:
IP Address
172.30.239.145
Subnet Mask
255.255.192.0
Analyzing this example, you can see that you only have to perform binary ANDing on the third octet. The first
two octets will result in 172.30 due to the subnet mask. The fourth octet will result in 0 due to the subnet
mask.
IP Address
172.30.239.145
Subnet Mask
255.255.192.0
==========
Result (Network)
172.30.?.0
Perform binary ANDing on the third octet.

Decimal
Binary
239
11101111
192
11000000
=======
Result
192
11000000
Analyzing this example again produces the following result:

IP Address
172.30.239.145
Subnet Mask
255.255.192.0
==========
Result (Network)
172.30.192.0
Continuing with this example, determining the number of hosts per network can be calculated by analyzing
the subnet mask. The subnet mask will be represented in dotted decimal format, such as 255.255.192.0, or in
network prefix format, such as /18. An IPv4 address always has 32 bits. Subtracting the number of bits used
for the network portion (as represented by the subnet mask) gives you the number of bits used for hosts.
Using our example above, the subnet mask 255.255.192.0 is equivalent to /18 in prefix notation. Subtracting
18 network bits from 32 bits results in 14 bits left for the host portion. From there, it is a simple calculation:
2(number of host bits) - 2 = Number of hosts
214 = 16,384 2 = 16,382 hosts
Page 2 of 7

Determine the network and broadcast addresses and number of host bits and hosts for the given IPv4
addresses and prefixes in the following table.
IPv4
Address/Prefix
Network Address
Broadcast Address
Total Number
of Host Bits
Total Number
of Hosts
192.168.100.25/28
172.30.10.130/30
10.1.113.75/19
198.133.219.250/24
128.107.14.191/22
172.16.104.99/27
Part 2: Calculate IPv4 Address Subnetting

When given an IPv4 address, the original subnet mask and the new subnet mask, you will be able to
determine:
Network address of this subnet
Broadcast address of this subnet
Range of host addresses of this subnet
Number of subnets created
Number of hosts per subnet
The following example shows a sample problem along with the solution for solving this problem:
Given:
Host IP Address:
172.16.77.120
Original Subnet Mask
255.255.0.0
New Subnet Mask:
255.255.240.0
Find:
Number of Subnet Bits
Number of Subnets Created
16
Number of Host Bits per Subnet
12
Number of Hosts per Subnet
4,094
Network Address of this Subnet
172.16.64.0
IPv4 Address of First Host on this Subnet
172.16.64.1
IPv4 Address of Last Host on this Subnet
172.16.79.254
IPv4 Broadcast Address on this Subnet
172.16.79.255
Lets analyze how this table was completed.
Page 3 of 7

The original subnet mask was 255.255.0.0 or /16. The new subnet mask is 255.255.240.0 or /20. The
resulting difference is 4 bits. Because 4 bits were borrowed, we can determine that 16 subnets were created
because 24 = 16.
The new mask of 255.255.240.0 or /20 leaves 12 bits for hosts. With 12 bits left for hosts, we use the
following formula: 212 = 4,096 2 = 4,094 hosts per subnet.
Binary ANDing will help you determine the subnet for this problem, which results in the network 172.16.64.0.
Finally, you need to determine the first host, last host, and broadcast address for each subnet. One method to
determine the host range is to use binary math for the host portion of the address. In our example, the last 12
bits of the address is the host portion. The first host would have all significant bits set to zero and the least
significant bit set to 1. The last host would have all significant bits set to 1 and the least significant bit set to 0.
In this example, the host portion of the address resides in the 3rd and 4th octets.
1st Octet
Description
2nd Octet
3rd Octet
4th Octet
Description
Network/Host
nnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnn
nnnnhhhh
hhhhhhhh
Subnet Mask
Binary
10101100
00010000
01000000
00000001
First Host
Decimal
172
16
64
First Host
Binary
10101100
00010000
01001111
11111110
Last Host
Decimal
172
16
79
254
Last Host
Binary
10101100
00010000
01001111
11111111
Broadcast
Decimal
172
16
79
255
Broadcast
Step 1: Fill out the tables below with appropriate answers given the IPv4 address, original
subnet mask, and new subnet mask.
Page 4 of 7

a. Problem 1:
Given:
Host IP Address:
192.168.200.139
255.255.255.0
New Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.224
Find:

b. Problem 2:
Given:
Host IP Address:
10.101.99.228
255.0.0.0
New Subnet Mask:
255.255.128.0
Find:

Page 5 of 7

c.
Problem 3:
Given:
Host IP Address:
172.22.32.12
255.255.0.0
New Subnet Mask:
255.255.224.0
Find:

d. Problem 4:
Given:
Host IP Address:
192.168.1.245
255.255.255.0
New Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.252
Find:

Page 6 of 7

e. Problem 5:
Given:
Host IP Address:
128.107.0.55
255.255.0.0
New Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0
Find:

f.
Problem 6:
Given:
Host IP Address:
192.135.250.180
255.255.255.0
New Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.248
Find:

Reflection
Why is the subnet mask so important when analyzing an IPv4 address?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 7 of 7
Lab Subnetting Network Topologies

Objectives
Parts 1 to 5, for each network topology:
Determine the number of subnets.
Design an appropriate addressing scheme.
Assign addresses and subnet mask pairs to device interfaces.
Examine the use of the available network address space and future growth potential.
When given a network topology, it is important to be able to determine the number of subnets required. In this
lab, several scenario topologies will be provided, along with a base network address and mask. You will
subnet the network address and provide an IP addressing scheme that will accommodate the number of
subnets displayed in the topology diagram. You must determine the number of bits to borrow, the number of
hosts per subnet, and potential for growth as specified by the instructions.
Part 1: Network Topology A

In Part 1, you have been given the 192.168.10.0/24 network address to subnet, with the following topology.
Determine the number of networks needed and then design an appropriate addressing scheme.
Step 1: Determine the number of subnets in Network Topology A.

a. How many subnets are there? ___________
b. How many bits should you borrow to create the required number of subnets? _________
c.
How many usable host addresses per subnet are in this addressing scheme? ___________
d. What is the new subnet mask in dotted decimal format? _________________________

e. How many subnets are available for future use? _______________
Page 1 of 9
Step 2: Record the subnet information.

Fill in the following table with the subnet information:
Subnet
Number
Subnet Address
First Usable Host

Address
Last Usable Host

Address
Broadcast
Address
0
1
2
3
4
5
Part 2: Network Topology B

The network topology from Part 1 has expanded to accommodate the addition of router R3 and its
accompanying network, as illustrated in the following topology. Use the 192.168.10.0/24 network address to
provide addresses to the network devices, and then design a new addressing scheme to support the
additional network requirement.
Step 1: Determine the number of subnets in Network Topology B.

c.

Page 2 of 9

Subnet
Number
Subnet Address
First Usable Host

Address
Last Usable Host

Address
Broadcast
Address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part 3: Network Topology C

The topology has changed again with a new LAN added to R2 and a redundant link between R1 and R3. Use
the 192.168.10.0/24 network address to provide addresses to the network devices. Also provide an IP
address scheme that will accommodate these additional devices. For this topology, assign a subnet to each
network.
Step 1: Determine the number of subnets in Network Topology C.

c.

Page 3 of 9

Subnet
Number
Subnet Address
First Usable Host

Address
Last Usable Host

Address
Broadcast
Address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Step 3: Assign addresses to network devices in the subnets.

a. Fill in the following table with IP addresses and subnet masks for the router interfaces:
Device
R1
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
GigabitEthernet 0/1
Serial 0/0/0
Serial 0/0/1
R2
GigabitEthernet 0/1
Serial 0/0/0
Serial 0/0/1
R3
GigabitEthernet 0/1
Serial 0/0/0
Serial 0/0/1
Page 4 of 9

b. Fill in the following table with the IP addresses and subnet masks for devices in the LAN as displayed in
topology.
Device
Interface
PC-A
NIC
PC-B
NIC
S1
VLAN 1
PC-C
NIC
PC-D
NIC
S2
VLAN 1
PC-E
NIC
PC-F
NIC
S3
VLAN 1
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Part 4: Network Topology D

The network was modified to accommodate changes in the organization. The 192.168.10.0/24 network
address is used to provide the addresses in the network.
Page 5 of 9
Step 1: Determine the number of subnets in Network Topology D.

c.

Fill in the following table with the subnet information.
Subnet
Number
Subnet Address
First Usable Host

Address
Last Usable Host

Address
Broadcast
Address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Page 6 of 9
Part 5: Network Topology E

The organization has a network address of 172.16.128.0/17 to be divided as illustrated in the following
topology. You must choose an addressing scheme that can accommodate the number of networks and hosts
in the topology.
Step 1: Determine the number of subnets in Network Topology E.

c.

Page 7 of 9

Subnet
Number
Subnet Address
First Usable Host

Address
Last Usable Host

Address
Broadcast
Address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Page 8 of 9
Step 3: Assign addresses to network devices in the subnets.

a. Fill in the following table with IP addresses and subnet masks for the router interfaces:
Device
R1
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
GigabitEthernet 0/0
GigabitEthernet 0/1
Serial 0/0/0
Serial 0/0/1
R2
GigabitEthernet 0/0
GigabitEthernet 0/1
Serial 0/0/0
Serial 0/0/1
R3
GigabitEthernet 0/0
GigabitEthernet 0/1
Serial 0/0/0
Serial 0/0/1
Reflection
1. What information is needed when determining an appropriate addressing scheme for a network?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. After the subnets are assigned, will all the host addresses be utilized in each subnet?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 9 of 9
Lab Researching Subnet Calculators

Objectives
Part 1: Review Available Subnet Calculators
Part 2: Perform Network Calculations Using a Subnet Calculator
While it is important to understand how to convert a decimal IP address to its binary format and apply the
bitwise ANDing operation to determine the network address, it is also a tedious and mistake-prone process.
To assist with these calculations, many network administrators make use of an IP subnet calculator utility
program. A number of these types of programs have been developed that can be downloaded or run directly
from the Internet.
In this lab, you will be introduced to a few of the free IP subnet calculators that are available. You will use a
web-based IP subnet calculator to perform the network operations in this lab.
Required Resources
Part 1: Review Available Subnet Calculators

In Part 1, you are introduced to two types of subnet calculators: client-based (programs that are downloaded
and installed) and web-based (utilities that are run from a browser).
Step 1: Review client-based subnet calculators.

Solarwinds provides a free subnet calculator that can be downloaded and installed on a PC running a
Windows operating system. You will be required to provide personal information (Name, Company, Location,
Email Address, and Phone number) to be able to download this program. You can download and install the
Solarwinds Subnet Calculator at www.solarwinds.com.
If you have a PC running Linux, it is recommended that you use the ipcalc utility (available with most Linux
distributions). Use the apt-get install ipcalc command to install ipcalc on a PC running Linux.
Step 2: Use a web-based subnet calculator.

Web-based subnet calculators do not require installation, but you do need Internet access to use them. The
following web-based subnet calculator is accessible from any device that has Internet access, including
smartphones and tablets.
a. From your browser, go to www.ipcalc.org and click the IP Subnet Calculator link.
Note: Several other useful utilities are also listed on the menu, such as MAC vendor lookup, whois lookup,
and DNS lookup.
Note: At the time of this writing, a page formatting issue was encountered when viewing the www.ipcalc.org
website using Internet Explorer (Version 9). While the site functioned correctly, you may want to consider
using another browser (Firefox or Chrome) when accessing this site.
Page 1 of 5
b. On the IP Subnet Calculator screen, enter an IP address and subnet mask or an IP address and CIDR
prefix notation. Examples of how to enter each of these are shown in the Introduction area.
c.
In the Application field, enter 192.168.50.50/27 and click Calc!. The next screen displays a table with
network information in both decimal and binary formats.
Page 2 of 5

d. Using the information provided in the example above, answer the following questions.
What is the network address? ____________________________
What is the subnet mask? _______________________________
How many hosts will this network support? __________________
What is the lowest host address? _________________________
What is the highest host address? ________________________
What is the broadcast address? __________________________
Part 2: Perform Network Calculations Using a Subnet Calculator

In Part 2, use the www.ipcalc.org web-based subnet calculator to fill in the tables provided.
Step 1: Fill in the following table for address 10.223.23.136/10:

Description
Address
Decimal
Binary
10.223.23.136
Subnet mask
Network address
Broadcast address
First host address
Last host address
Number of hosts available
N/A
What type of address, public, or private? _____________
Step 2: Fill in the following table for the 172.18.255.92 address with a subnet mask of
255.255.224.0:
Description
Decimal
Address
172.18.255.92
Subnet mask
255.255.224.0
Binary
Network address
Broadcast address
First host address
Last host address
N/A
What is the CIDR prefix notation for this network? ________

Page 3 of 5
Step 3: Fill in the following table using the 192.168.184.78 address with a subnet mask of
255.255.255.252:
Description
Address
Decimal
Binary
192.168.184.78
Subnet mask
Network address
Broadcast address
First host address
Last host address
N/A
What is the CIDR prefix notation for this network? ________

Where would you most likely find a network like this being used?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Step 4: Fill in the following table for the 209.165.200.225/27 address:

Description
Address
Decimal
Binary
209.165.200.225
Subnet mask
Network address
Broadcast address
First host address
Last host address
N/A
Page 4 of 5
Step 5: Fill in the following table for address 64.104.110.7/20:

Description
Address
Decimal
Binary
64.104.110.7
Subnet mask
Network address
Broadcast address
First host address
Last host address
N/A
Reflection
1. What is an advantage of using a client-based subnet calculator?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. What is an advantage of using a web-based subnet calculator?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 5
Lab - Designing and Implementing a Subnetted IPv4 Addressing

Scheme
Topology
Addressing Table
Device
R1
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
G0/0
N/A
G0/1
N/A
Lo0
N/A
Lo1
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
PC-A
NIC
PC-B
NIC
N/A
N/A
N/A
Objectives
Part 1: Design a Network Subnetting Scheme
Create a subnetting scheme that meets the required number of subnets and host addresses.
Complete the diagram, showing where the host IP addresses will be applied.
Part 2: Configure the Devices
Assign an IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway to the PCs.
Configure the router Gigabit Ethernet interfaces with an IP address and subnet mask.
Create two loopback interfaces on the router, and configure each with an IP address and subnet mask.
Part 3: Test and Troubleshoot the Network
Verify and troubleshoot network connectivity using ping.
In this lab, starting from a single network address and network mask, you will subnet the network into multiple
subnets. The subnet scheme should be based on the number of host computers required in each subnet, as
well as other network considerations, like future network host expansion.
Page 1 of 7
Lab - Designing and Implementing a Subnetted IPv4 Addressing Scheme

After you have created a subnetting scheme and completed the network diagram by filling in the host and
interface IP addresses, you will configure the host PCs and router interfaces, including loopback interfaces.
The loopback interfaces are created to simulate additional LANs attached to router R1.
After the network devices and host PCs have been configured, you will use the ping command to test for
network connectivity.
This lab provides minimal assistance with the actual commands necessary to configure the router. However,
the required commands are provided in Appendix A. Test your knowledge by trying to configure the devices
without referring to the appendix.
from what is shown in the labs. Refer to the Router Interface Summary Table at this end of the lab for the
Required Resources
Note: The Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on Cisco 1941 routers are autosensing. An Ethernet straight-through
cable may be used between the router and PC-B. If using another Cisco router model, it may be necessary to
Design a Network Subnetting Scheme

Step 1: Create a subnetting scheme that meets the required number of subnets and required
number of host addresses.
In this scenario, you are a network administrator for a small subdivision within a larger company. You must
create multiple subnets out of the 192.168.0.0/24 network address space to meet the following requirements:
The first subnet is the employee network. You need a minimum of 25 host IP addresses.
The second subnet is the administration network. You need a minimum of 10 IP addresses.
The third and fourth subnets are reserved as virtual networks on virtual router interfaces, loopback 0 and
loopback 1. These virtual router interfaces simulate LANs attached to R1.
You also need two additional unused subnets for future network expansion.
Note: Variable length subnet masks will not be used. All of the device subnet masks will be the same length.
Answer the following questions to help create a subnetting scheme that meets the stated network
requirements:
1) How many host addresses are needed in the largest required subnet? _____________________
2) What is the minimum number of subnets required? _________________________________
Page 2 of 7

3) The network that you are tasked to subnet is 192.168.0.0/24. What is the /24 subnet mask in binary?
________________________________________________________________________________
4) The subnet mask is made up of two portions, the network portion, and the host portion. This is
represented in the binary by the ones and the zeros in the subnet mask.
In the network mask, what do the ones represent? ________________________________________
In the network mask, what do the zeros represent? _______________________________________
5) To subnet a network, bits from the host portion of the original network mask are changed into subnet
bits. The number of subnet bits defines the number of subnets. Given each of the possible subnet
masks depicted in the following binary format, how many subnets and how many hosts are created in
each example?
Hint: Remember that the number of host bits (to the power of 2) defines the number of hosts per
subnet (minus 2), and the number of subnet bits (to the power of two) defines the number of subnets.
The subnet bits (depicted in bold type face) are the bits that have been borrowed beyond the original
network mask of /24. The /24 is the slash prefix notation and corresponds to a dotted decimal mask of
255.255.255.0.
(/25) 11111111.11111111.11111111.10000000
Dotted decimal subnet mask equivalent: ________________________________
Number of subnets? ________________, Number of hosts? ________________
(/26) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000
Number of subnets? ________________, Number of hosts? ________________
(/27) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11100000
Number of subnets? ________________ Number of hosts? ________________
(/28) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11110000
Number of subnets? ________________ Number of hosts? _________________
(/29) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111000
(/30) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100
6) Considering your answers, which subnet masks meet the required number of minimum host
addresses?
________________________________________________________________________________
7) Considering your answers, which subnet masks meets the minimum number of subnets required?
________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 7

8) Considering your answers, which subnet mask meets both the required minimum number of hosts
and the minimum number of subnets required?
________________________________________________________________________________
9) When you have determined which subnet mask meets all of the stated network requirements, you will
derive each of the subnets starting from the original network address. List the subnets from first to
last below. Remember that the first subnet is 192.168.0.0 with the newly acquired subnet mask.
Subnet Address
/ Prefix Subnet Mask (dotted decimal)
___________________ / ____
__________________________
___________________ / ____
__________________________
___________________ / ____
__________________________
___________________ / ____
__________________________
___________________ / ____
__________________________
___________________ / ____
__________________________
___________________ / ____
__________________________
___________________ / ____
__________________________
___________________ / ____
__________________________
___________________ / ____
__________________________
Step 2: Complete the diagram showing where the host IP addresses will be applied.
On the following lines provided, fill in the IP addresses and subnets masks in slash prefix notation. On the
router, use the first usable address in each subnet for each of the interfaces, Gigabit Ethernet 0/0, Gigabit
Ethernet 0/1, loopback 0, and loopback 1. Fill in an IP address for both PC-A and PC-B. Also enter this
information into the Addressing Table on Page 1.
Page 4 of 7
Configure the Devices

In Part 2, set up the network topology and configure basic settings on the PCs and router, such as the router
Gigabit Ethernet interface IP addresses, and the PCs IP addresses, subnet masks, and default gateways.
Refer to the Addressing Table for device names and address information.
prior to reviewing Appendix A.

a. Enter into privileged EXEC mode and then global config mode.
b. Assign the R1 as the hostname for the router.
c.
Configure both the G0/0 and G0/1 interfaces with IP addresses and subnet masks, and then enable them.
d. Loopback interfaces are created to simulate additional LANs on R1 router. Configure the loopback
interfaces with IP addresses and subnet masks. After they are created, loopback interfaces are enabled,
by default. (To create the loopback addresses, enter the command interface loopback 0 at the global
config mode)
Note: You can create additional loopbacks for testing with different addressing schemes, if desired.
e. Save the running configuration to the startup configuration file.

Test and Troubleshoot the Network

In Part 3, you will use the ping command to test network connectivity.
a. Test to see if PC-A can communicate with its default gateway. From PC-A, open a command prompt and
ping the IP address of the router Gigabit Ethernet 0/1 interface. Do you get a reply? _________________
b. Test to see if PC-B can communicate with its default gateway. From PC-B, open a command prompt and
ping the IP address of the router Gigabit Ethernet 0/0 interface. Do you get a reply? ________________
c.
Test to see if PC-A can communicate with PC-B. From PC-A, open a command prompt and ping the IP
address of PC-B. Do you get a reply? _________________
d. If you answered no to any of the preceding questions, then you should go back and check all of your IP
address and subnet mask configurations, and ensure that the default gateways have been correctly
configured on PC-A and PC-B.
e. If you verify that all of the settings are correct, and you can still not ping successfully, then there are a few
additional factors that can block ICMP pings. On PC-A and PC-B within Windows, make sure that the
Windows Firewall is turned off for the Work, Home, and Public networks.
f.
Experiment by purposely misconfiguring the gateway address on PC-A to 10.0.0.1. What happens when
you try and ping from PC-B to PC-A? Do you receive a reply?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 7
Reflection
1. Subnetting one larger network into multiple smaller subnetworks allows for greater flexibility and security in
network design. However, what do you think some of the drawbacks are when the subnets are limited to
being the same size?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why do you think the gateway/router IP address is usually the first usable IP address in the network?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)

Router> enable
Router#
b. Enter into configuration mode.

Router# conf t
End with CNTL/Z.
Router(config)#
c.
Page 6 of 7

R1(config)#
d. Configure both the G0/0 and G0/1 interfaces with IP addresses and subnet masks, and enable them.
R1(config-if)# ip address <ip address> <subnet mask>
e. Loopback interfaces are created to simulate additional LANs off of router R1. Configure the loopback
interfaces with IP addresses and subnet masks. When they are created, loopback interfaces are enabled,
by default.
R1(config)# interface loopback 0
R1(config-if)# interface loopback 1
R1(config-if)# end
f.


Page 7 of 7
Lab Designing and Implementing a VLSM Addressing Scheme

Topology
Objectives
Part 1: Examine Network Requirements
Part 2: Design the VLSM Address Scheme
Part 3: Cable and Configure the IPv4 Network
Variable Length Subnet Mask (VLSM) was designed to avoid wasting IP addresses. With VLSM, a network is
subnetted and then re-subnetted. This process can be repeated multiple times to create subnets of various
sizes based on the number of hosts required in each subnet. Effective use of VLSM requires address
planning.
In this lab, use the 172.16.128.0/17 network address to develop an address scheme for the network displayed
in the topology diagram. VLSM is used to meet the IPv4 addressing requirements. After you have designed
the VLSM address scheme, you will configure the interfaces on the routers with the appropriate IP address
information.
Cisco IOS Release 15.2(4)M3 (universalk9 image). Other routers and Cisco IOS versions can be used.
Note: Make sure that the routers have been erased and have no startup configurations. If you are unsure,
Required Resources
3 routers (Cisco 1941 with Cisco IOS software, Release 15.2(4)M3 universal image or comparable)
1 PC (with terminal emulation program, such as Tera Term, to configure routers)
Console cable to configure the Cisco IOS devices via the console ports
Ethernet (optional) and serial cables, as shown in the topology
Page 1 of 7
Windows Calculator (optional)
Part 1: Examine Network Requirements

In Part 1, you will examine the network requirements to develop a VLSM address scheme for the network
displayed in the topology diagram using the 172.16.128.0/17 network address.
Note: You can use the Windows Calculator application and the www.ipcalc.org IP subnet calculator to help
with your calculations.
Step 1: Determine how many host addresses and subnets are available.
How many host addresses are available in a /17 network? ________
What is the total number of host addresses needed in the topology diagram? ________
How many subnets are needed in the network topology? ______
Step 2: Determine the largest subnet.

What is the subnet description (e.g. BR1 G0/1 LAN or BR1-HQ WAN link)? ___________________
How many IP addresses are required in the largest subnet? __________
What subnet mask can support that many host addresses?
_____________________
How many total host addresses can that subnet mask support? _________
Can you subnet the 172.16.128.0/17 network address to support this subnet? _____
What are the two network addresses that would result from this subnetting?
_____________________
_____________________
Use the first network address for this subnet.
Step 3: Determine the second largest subnet.

What is the subnet description? _____________________________
How many IP addresses are required for the second largest subnet? ______
___________________
How many total host addresses can that subnet mask support? __________
Can you subnet the remaining subnet again and still support this subnet? ______
_____________________
_____________________
Step 4: Determine the next largest subnet.

Page 2 of 7

___________________
_____________________
_____________________

How many IP addresses are required for the next largest subnet? ______
___________________
_____________________
_____________________

___________________
_____________________
_____________________

___________________
Page 3 of 7

_____________________
_____________________
Step 8: Determine the subnets needed to support the serial links.

How many host addresses are required for each serial subnet link? ______
___________________
a. Continue subnetting the first subnet of each new subnet until you have four /30 subnets. Write the first
three network addresses of these /30 subnets below.
___________________
___________________
___________________
b. Enter the subnet descriptions for these three subnets below.
____________________________
____________________________
____________________________
Part 2: Design the VLSM Address Scheme

Step 1: Calculate the subnet information.
Use the information that you obtained in Part 1 to fill in the following table.
Page 4 of 7
Subnet Description
Number of
Hosts Needed
HQ G0/0
16,000
HQ G0/1
8,000
BR1 G0/1
4,000
BR1 G0/0
2,000
BR2 G0/1
1,000
BR2 G0/0
500
HQ S0/0/0 BR1 S0/0/0
HQ S0/0/1 BR2 S0/0/1
BR1 S0/0/1 BR2 S0/0/0
Network Address
/CIDR
First Host
Address
Broadcast
Address
Step 2: Complete the device interface address table.

Assign the first host address in the subnet to the Ethernet interfaces. HQ should be given the first host
address on the Serial links to BR1 and BR2. BR1 should be given the first host address for the serial link to
BR2.
Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Device Interface
G0/0
16,000 Host LAN
G0/1
8,000 Host LAN
S0/0/0
BR1 S0/0/0
S0/0/1
BR2 S0/0/1
G0/0
2,000 Host LAN
G0/1
4,000 Host LAN
S0/0/0
HQ S0/0/0
S0/0/1
BR2 S0/0/0
G0/0
500 Host LAN
G0/1
1,000 Host LAN
S0/0/0
BR1 S0/0/1
S0/0/1
HQ S0/0/1
HQ
BR1
BR2
Part 3: Cable and Configure the IPv4 Network

In Part 3, you will cable the network topology and configure the three routers using the VLSM address
scheme that you developed in Part 2.
Page 5 of 7

Step 2: Configure basic settings on each router.
a. Assign the device name to the router.
b. Disable DNS lookup to prevent the router from attempting to translate incorrectly entered commands as
c.
Assign class as the privileged EXEC encrypted password.
d. Assign cisco as the console password and enable login.

e. Assign cisco as the VTY password and enable login.
f.
Encrypt the clear text passwords.
g. Create a banner that will warn anyone accessing the device that unauthorized access is prohibited.
Step 3: Configure the interfaces on each router.

a. Assign an IP address and subnet mask to each interface using the table that you completed in Part 2.
b. Configure an interface description for each interface.
c.
Set the clocking rate on all DCE serial interfaces to 128000.

HQ(config-if)# clock rate 128000
d. Activate the interfaces.
Step 4: Save the configuration on all devices.

Step 5: Test Connectivity.
a. From HQ, ping BR1s S0/0/0 interface address.
b. From HQ, ping BR2s S0/0/1 interface address.
c.
From BR1, ping BR2s S0/0/0 interface address.
d. Troubleshoot connectivity issues if pings were not successful.

Note: Pings to the GigabitEthernet interfaces on other routers will not be successful. The LANs defined for
the GigabitEthernet interfaces are simulated. Because no devices are attached to these LANs they will be in
down/down state. A routing protocol needs to be in place for other devices to be aware of those subnets. The
GigabitEthernet interfaces also need to be in an up/up state before a routing protocol can add the subnets to
the routing table. These interfaces will remain in a down/down state until a device is connected to the other
end of the Ethernet interface cable. The focus of this lab is on VLSM and configuring the interfaces.
Reflection
Can you think of a shortcut for calculating the network addresses of consecutive /30 subnets?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 7

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Page 7 of 7
Can you call me now?

Objectives
Calculate the necessary subnet mask to accommodate a given number of hosts.
Subnetting is hierarchical and can help deliver network traffic more easily if small groups of IP addresses
are designed to serve network needs.
Background/Scenario
Note: This activity may be completed individually or in small or large groups using Packet Tracer software.
You are setting up a dedicated, computer addressing scheme for patient rooms in a hospital. The
switch will be centrally located in the nurses station, as each of the five rooms will be wired so
that patients can just connect to an RJ45 port built into the wall of their room. Devise a physical
and logical topology for only one of the six floors using the following addressing scheme
requirements: There are six floors with five patient rooms on each floor for a total of 30
connections. Each room needs a network connection.
Subnetting must be incorporated into your scheme.
Use one router, one switch, and five host stations for addressing purposes.
Validate that all PCs can connect to the hospitals in-house services.
Keep a copy of your scheme to share later with the class or learning community. Be prepared to explain
how subnetting, unicasts, multicasts, and broadcasts would be incorporated, and where your addressing
scheme could be used.
Required Resources
Packet Tracer software
Reflection
1. How would you change your addressing scheme if you were going to add an additional network
connection to the hospital rooms with a total of 10 connections per floor or 2 ports per room?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 1
What would happen if

Objectives
Explain the operation of the application layer in providing support to end-user applications.
In this activity, you will envision what it would be like not to have network applications available to use in
the workplace. You may also estimate what it would cost to not be able to use networked applications for
a short period of time.
Background/Scenario
It is the beginning of your work week. Your employer has decided to have IP telephones installed in your
workplace resulting in the network being inoperable until next week. Your work, however, must continue.
You have emails to send and quotes to write for your managers approval. Because of possible security
issues, you are not allowed to use personal or external computer systems, equipment, or offsite
equipment and systems, to complete your corporate workload.
Your instructor may ask you to complete the questions from both scenarios below, or to choose one
scenario (A. Emails or B. Quote for Managers Approval). Answer the questions fully for the scenarios.
Be prepared to discuss your answers in class.
A. Emails
What methods can you use to send email communication?

_____________________________________________________________________________
How could you send the same email to multiple recipients?

_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
How would you get a large attachment to multiple recipients, if necessary?

_____________________________________________________________________________
Are these methods cost effective to your corporation? __________________________________
Do they violate any security policies of your corporation? ________________________________
B. Quote for Managers Approval
You have a desktop application software package installed on your computer. Will it be relatively
easy to produce the quote your manager needs for the new contract due by the end of the week?
What limitations will be experienced while trying to complete the quote?
_____________________________________________________________________________
How will you present the quote to your manager for approval? How do you think your manager
will send the quote to the client for approval?
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Are these methods cost effective to your corporation? Justify your answer.
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 2
What would happen if
Reflection
1. What steps did you identify as important to communicating without network applications available to you
for a week in your workplace? Which steps were not important? Justify your answer.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 2
Lab - Researching Peer-to-Peer File Sharing

Objectives
Part 1: Identify P2P Networks, File Sharing Protocols, and Applications
Part 2: Research P2P File Sharing Issues
Part 3: Research P2P Copyright Litigations
Peer-to-peer (P2P) computing is a powerful technology that has many uses. P2P networks can be used to
share and exchange music, movies, software, and other electronic materials.
The use of P2P networks to upload, download, or share copyrighted material, such as movies, music, and
software, can violate the rights of copyright owners. In the P2P file-sharing context, infringement may occur,
for example, when one person purchases an authorized copy and then uploads it to a P2P network to share
with others. Both the individual who makes the file available and those making copies may be found to have
infringed the rights of the copyright owners and may be violating copyright law.
Another problem with P2P file sharing is that very little protection is in place to ensure that the files exchanged
in these networks are not malicious. P2P networks are an ideal medium for spreading malware (computer
viruses, worms, Trojan horses, spyware, adware, and other malicious programs). In 2010, Cisco reported
increases in P2P activity, coupled with recent P2P malware developments, suggesting that P2P file shares
are becoming increasingly favored by users and malware attackers alike.
In this lab, you will research available P2P file sharing software and identify some issues that can arise from
the use of this technology.
Required Resources
Part 1: Identify P2P Networks, File Sharing Protocols, and Applications

In Part 1, you will research P2P networks and identify some popular P2P protocols and applications.
Step 1: Define P2P networking.

a. What is a P2P network?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. What are some advantages that P2P provides over client-server architecture?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 3

c.
What are some disadvantages of P2P networks?

____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Identify P2P file sharing protocols and applications.

a. Identify some P2P file sharing protocols used today.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. What are some popular P2P file sharing applications available today?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
What P2P file sharing protocol is attributed to producing the most P2P traffic on the Internet today?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Part 2: Research P2P File Sharing Issues

In Part 2, you will research P2P copyright infringement and identify other issues that can occur with P2P file
sharing.
Step 1: Research P2P copyright infringement.

a. What does the acronym DMCA stand for and what is it?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. Name two associations that actively pursue P2P copyright infringement?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
What are the penalties for copyright infringement?

____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
d. What are the file sharing copyright laws in your area? Are they more strict or less strict than those in other
areas of the world? How aggressively do enforcement agencies in your area pursue those who share
copyrighted material?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 3
Step 2: Research other P2P issues.

a. What types of malware can be transported through P2P file sharing?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. What is Torrent Poisoning?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
How could identity theft occur through the use of P2P file sharing?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Part 3: Research P2P Copyright Litigations

In Part 3, you will research and identify some historical legal actions that have occurred, as a result of P2P
copyright infringement.
a. What was the first well-known P2P application that specialized in MP3 file sharing and was shut down by
court order?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. What was one of the largest P2P file sharing lawsuits ever?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Reflection
1. How can you be sure that the files you are downloading from P2P networks are not copyrighted and are safe
from malware?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 3
Lab - Observing DNS Resolution

Objectives
Part 1: Observe the DNS Conversion of a URL to an IP Address
Part 2: Observe DNS Lookup Using the Nslookup Command on a Web Site
Part 3: Observe DNS Lookup Using the Nslookup Command on Mail Servers
The Domain Name System (DNS) is invoked when you type a Uniform Resource Locator (URL), such as
http://www.cisco.com, into a web browser. The first part of the URL describes which protocol is used.
Common protocols are Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket
Layer (HTTPS), and File Transfer Protocol (FTP).
DNS uses the second part of the URL, which in this example is www.cisco.com. DNS translates the domain
name (www.cisco.com) to an IP address to allow the source host to reach the destination host. In this lab, you
will observe DNS in action and use the nslookup (name server lookup) command to obtain additional DNS
information. Work with a partner to complete this lab.
Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with Internet and command prompt access)
Part 1: Observe the DNS Conversion of a URL to an IP Address

a. Click the Windows Start button, type cmd into the search field, and press Enter. The command prompt
window appears.
b. At the command prompt, ping the URL for the Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers
(ICANN) at www.icann.org. ICANN coordinates the DNS, IP addresses, top-level domain name system
management, and root server system management functions. The computer must translate
www.icann.org into an IP address to know where to send the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
packets.
c.
The first line of the output displays www.icann.org converted to an IP address by DNS. You should be
able to see the effect of DNS, even if your institution has a firewall that prevents pinging, or if the
destination server has prevented you from pinging its web server.
Record the IP address of www.icann.org. __________________________________

d. Type IP address from step c into a web browser, instead of the URL. Click Continue to this website
(not recommended). to proceed.
Page 1 of 5
e. Notice that the ICANN home web page is displayed.
Most humans find it easier to remember words, rather than numbers. If you tell someone to go to
www.icann.org, they can probably remember that. If you told them to go to 192.0.32.7, they would have
a difficult time remembering an IP address. Computers process in numbers. DNS is the process of
translating words into numbers. There is a second translation that takes place. Humans think in Base 10
numbers. Computers process in Base 2 numbers. The Base 10 IP address 192.0.32.7 in Base 2 numbers
is 11000000.00000000.00100000.00000111. What happens if you cut and paste these Base 2 numbers
into a browser?
Page 2 of 5

____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
f.
Now type ping www.cisco.com.
g. When you ping www.cisco.com, do you get the same IP address as the example, or a different IP
address, and why?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
h. Type the IP address that you obtained when you pinged www.cisco.com into a browser. Does the web
site dlsplay? Explain.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Part 2: Observe DNS Lookup Using the Nslookup Command on a Web Site
a. At the command prompt, type the nslookup command.
What is the default DNS server used? _________________________________________

Notice how the command prompt changed to a greater than (>) symbol. This is the nslookup prompt.
From this prompt, you can enter commands related to DNS.
At the prompt, type ? to see a list of all the available commands that you can use in nslookup mode.
b. At the nslookup prompt, type www.cisco.com.
Page 3 of 5
What is the translated IP address? ________________________________________________

Is it the same as the IP address shown with the ping command? _________________
Under addresses, in addition to the 23.1.144.170 IP address, there are the following numbers:
2600:1408:7:1:9300::90, 2600:1408:7:1:8000::90, 2600:1408:7:1:9800::90. What are these?
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
At the prompt, type the IP address of the Cisco web server that you just found. You can use nslookup to
get the domain name of an IP address if you do not know the URL.
You can use the nslookup tool to translate domain names into IP addresses. You can also use it to
translate IP addresses into domain names.
Using the nslookup tool, record the IP addresses associated with www.google.com.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 5
Part 3: Observe DNS Lookup Using the Nslookup Command on Mail

Servers
a. At the prompt, type set type=mx to use nslookup to identify mail servers.
b. At the prompt, type cisco.com.
A fundamental principle of network design is redundancy (more than one mail server is configured). In
this way, if one of the mail servers is unreachable, then the computer making the query tries the second
mail server. Email administrators determine which mail server is contacted first using MX preference (see
above image). The mail server with the lowest MX preference is contacted first. Based upon the output
above, which mail server will be contacted first when email is being sent to cisco.com?
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
At the nslookup prompt, type exit to return to the regular PC command prompt.
d. At the PC command prompt, type ipconfig /all.

e. Write the IP addresses of all the DNS servers that your school uses.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Reflection
What is the fundamental purpose of DNS?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 5
Lab - Exploring FTP

Objectives
Part 1: Use FTP from a Command Prompt
Part 2: Download an FTP File Using WS_FTP LE
Part 3: Use FTP in a Browser
The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is part of the TCP/IP suite. FTP is used to transfer files from one network
device to another network device. Windows includes an FTP client application that you can execute from the
command prompt. There are also free graphical user interface (GUI) versions of FTP that you can download.
The GUI versions are easier to use than typing from a command prompt. FTP is frequently used for the
transfer of files that may be too large for attachment with an email.
When using FTP, one computer is normally the server and the other computer is the client. When accessing
the server from the client, you need to provide a username and password. Some FTP servers have a user
named anonymous. You can access these types of sites by simply typing anonymous for the user, without
a password. Usually, the site administrator has files that can be copied but does not allow files to be posted
with the anonymous user.
In this lab, you will learn how to use anonymous FTP from the Windows command-line C:\> prompt. You will
also use the GUI-based FTP program, WS_FTP LE. Finally, you will use an anonymous FTP in a browser.
Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with access to the command prompt and Internet access and WS_FTP LE
installed)
Part 1: Use FTP from a Command Prompt

a. Click the Windows Start button, type cmd in the search field, and press Enter to open a command
window.
b. At the C:\> prompt type ftp ftp.cdc.gov. At the prompt that says User (ftp.cdc.gov:(none)): type
anonymous. For the password, do not type anything. Press Enter to be logged in as an anonymous user.
Notice that the C:\> prompt has been replaced with the ftp> prompt. Type ls to list the files and
directories. At the time that this lab was authored, there was a Readme file.
Page 1 of 9
Lab - Exploring FTP

c.
At the prompt, type get Readme. This downloads the file to your local computer from the anonymous FTP
server that the Center for Disease Control has setup. The file will be copied into the directory shown in
the C:\> prompt (C:\Users\User1 in this case).
d. Type quit to leave FTP and return to the C:\> prompt. Type more Readme to see the contents of the
document.
e. What is a drawback of using the FTP from the command line?

____________________________________________________________________________________
Part 2: Download an FTP File Using WS_FTP LE

In Part 2, you will download a file using WS_FTP LE (a free FTP transfer tool).
a. Start WS_FTP LE. If the Ipswitch WS_FTP LE window displays, click Next to continue and skip to step c.
Otherwise, click the Open a Remote Connection link.
Page 2 of 9
Lab - Exploring FTP

b. Click Create Site.
c.
In the Site Name field, type Center for Disease Control and click Next to continue.
Page 3 of 9
Lab - Exploring FTP

d. Click the Connection Type drop-down list, select FTP (the default connection type), and click Next.
e. In the Server Address field, type ftp.cdc.gov, and click Next.
Page 4 of 9
Lab - Exploring FTP

f.
In the User Name field, type anonymous, and leave the password field blank. Click Next.
g. Click Finish.
Page 5 of 9
Lab - Exploring FTP

h. When the Login Information Missing dialog box displays, click OK. Do not type a password in the
Password field.
i.
You are now anonymously connected to the Center for Disease Control FTP site.
j.
On the WS_FTP LE toolbar menu under My Computer, click New Folder to create a folder on your local
C:\ drive.
k.
In the Make Directory dialog box name the folder as CDC and click OK.
Note: If the folder already exists, you can use the same folder or create another folder with a different
name. If using the same CDC folder, you can replace the existing Readme file with the downloaded
Readme file.
Page 6 of 9
Lab - Exploring FTP
l.
After the directory is created, in the My Computer tab page, double-click the directory to open it.
m. Drag the file Readme from the right side of the application (the remote CDC FTP server) into the CDC
folder on to the local C:\ drive.
Page 7 of 9
Lab - Exploring FTP
n. Double-click the Readme file in the C:\CDC folder on your local C:\ drive. If prompted for an application to
open the document, choose any word processing software. You should see a message that looks
something like this:
o. Which was easier, using FTP from the cmd prompt, or using WS_FTP LE? ________________________
p. Click Disconnect to disconnect from the ftp.cdc.gov site when finished.
q. The remote site will be removed from the saved list of FTP sites. In the Ipswitch WS_FTP LE window,
click the Open a Remote Connection link. Select the Center for Disease Control site, and click Delete
to remove the FTP site. Click Yes to confirm the deletion. Click Close to exit the Site Manager.
r.
Remove the C:\CDC folder.
Part 3: Use FTP in a Browser

It is possible to use a browser as an anonymous FTP client.
a. In a browser, type ftp://ftp.cdc.gov/.
Page 8 of 9
Lab - Exploring FTP
b. Click the Readme file.
Reflection
1. Which FTP method was easiest to use?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Was there any advantage to using FTP from the command prompt or using WS_FTP LE?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 9 of 9
Make it happen!
Objectives
Explain the operation of the application layer in providing support to end-user applications.
In this activity, you will apply new knowledge of application layer protocols and methods of the TCP/IP
layer in streamlining data/network communication.
Background/Scenario
Refer to the modeling activity from the beginning of this chapter as the basis for this activity.
Your IP telephones were installed in a half day vs. the full week originally anticipated. Your network has
been restored to full capacity and network applications are available for your use. You have the same
emails to answer and quotes to write for your managers approval.
Use the same scenario you completed in the introduction modeling activity to answer the following
questions:
A. Emails
What methods can you use to send email correspondence now that the network is working?
________________________________________________________________________________
What format will your emails be sent over the network? ____________________________________
How can you now send the same message to multiple recipients?
________________________________________________________________________________
How can you send the large attachments to multiple recipients using network applications?
________________________________________________________________________________
Would using network applications prove to be a cost-effective communication method for your
corporation?
________________________________________________________________________________
B. Quote for Managers Approval
Because you have desktop application programs installed on your computer, will it be relatively easy
to produce the quote your manager needs for the new contract due by the end of the week? Explain
your answer.
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
When you finish writing the quote, how will you present it to your manager for approval? How will
your manager send the quote to the client for approval?
________________________________________________________________________________
Is using network applications a cost-effective way to complete business transactions? Justify your
answer.
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Save a hard copy or an electronic copy of your answers. Be prepared to discuss your answers in
class.
Page 1 of 2
Make it happen!
Reflection
1. Having network applications and services available to you may increase production, decrease costs, and
save time. Would this be true with the scenario you chose? Justify your answer.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 2
Did you notice?

Objectives
Explain how a small network of directly connected segments is created, configured and verified.
In this activity, you will note how networks differ, both in size and in function. You will identify how networks
provide different networking solutions based upon their cost, speed, ports, expandability, and manageability,
related to the needs of a small-to-medium-sized business.
Topology
Background/Scenario
Using the two networks in the topology diagram as reference, answer the following questions and record
your answers to share with the class.
Visually compare and contrast Network A and Network B. How are the two networks the same?
Make note of the devices used in each network design. Because the devices are labeled, you already
know what types of end and intermediary devices they are. How are the two networks different? Is
the number of devices present in one network the only differentiating factor? Justify your answer.
Which network you would select if you owned a small-to-medium-sized business. Justify your
selected network based on cost, speed, ports, expandability, and manageability.
Page 1 of 2
Did you notice?
Required Resources
Recording capabilities (paper, tablet, etc.) for reflective comments to be shared with the class.
Reflection
1. Reflect upon your comparisons of the two network scenarios. What are some things you noted as points
of interest?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Identify elements of the model that map to real-world content:
Cost, speed, ports, expandability, and manageability are all factors to consider when designing a small to
medium-sized network.
Page 2 of 2
Lab Researching Network Security Threats

Objectives
Part 1: Explore the SANS Website
Navigate to the SANS website and identify resources.
Part 2: Identify Recent Network Security Threats
Identify several recent network security threats using the SANS site.
Identify sites beyond SANS that provide network security threat information.
Part 3: Detail a Specific Network Security Threat
Select and detail a specific recent network threat.
Present information to the class.
To defend a network against attacks, an administrator must identify external threats that pose a danger to the
network. Security websites can be used to identify emerging threats and provide mitigation options for
defending a network.
One of the most popular and trusted sites for defending against computer and network security threats is
SysAdmin, Audit, Network, Security (SANS). The SANS site provides multiple resources, including a list of the
top 20 Critical Security Controls for Effective Cyber Defense and the weekly @Risk: The Consensus Security
Alert newsletter. This newsletter details new network attacks and vulnerabilities.
In this lab, you will navigate to and explore the SANS site, use the SANS site to identify recent network
security threats, research other websites that identify threats, and research and present the details about a
specific network attack.
Required Resources
Presentation computer with PowerPoint or other presentation software installed
Part 1: Exploring the SANS Website

In Part 1, navigate to the SANS website and explore the available resources.
Step 1: Locate SANS resources.

Using a web browser, navigate to www.SANS.org. From the home page, highlight the Resources menu.
List three available resources.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Locate the Top 20 Critical Controls.

The Twenty Critical Security Controls for Effective Cyber Defense listed on the SANS website are the
culmination of a public-private partnership involving the Department of Defense (DoD), National Security
Association, Center for Internet Security (CIS), and the SANS Institute. The list was developed to prioritize the
Page 1 of 3

cyber security controls and spending for DoD. It has become the centerpiece for effective security programs
for the United States government. From the Resources menu, select Top 20 Critical Controls.
Select one of the 20 Critical Controls and list three of the implementation suggestions for this control.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Step 3: Locate the Newsletters menu.

Highlight the Resources menu, select Newsletters. Briefly describe each of the three newsletters available.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Part 2: Identify Recent Network Security Threats

In Part 2, you will research recent network security threats using the SANS site and identify other sites
containing security threat information.
Step 1: Locate the @Risk: Consensus Security Alert Newsletter Archive.

From the Newsletters page, select Archive for the @RISK: The Consensus Security Alert. Scroll down to
Archives Volumes and select a recent weekly newsletter. Review the Notable Recent Security Issues and
Most Popular Malware Files sections.
List some recent attacks. Browse multiple recent newsletters, if necessary.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Step 2: Identify sites providing recent security threat information.

Besides the SANS site, identify some other websites that provide recent security threat information.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
List some of the recent security threats detailed on these websites.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 3
Part 3: Detail a Specific Network Security Attack

In Part 3, you will research a specific network attack that has occurred and create a presentation based on
your findings. Complete the form below based on your findings.
Step 1: Complete the following form for the selected network attack.
Name of attack:
Type of attack:
Dates of attacks:
Computers / Organizations affected:
How it works and what it did:
Mitigation options:
References and info links:
Step 2: Follow the instructors guidelines to complete the presentation.
Reflection
1. What steps can you take to protect your own computer?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. What are some important steps that organizations can take to protect their resources?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 3
Lab - Accessing Network Devices with SSH

Topology
Addressing Table
Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
R1
G0/1
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
192.168.1.11
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
Objectives
Part 1: Configure Basic Device Settings
Part 2: Configure the Router for SSH Access
Part 3: Examine a Telnet Session with Wireshark
Part 4: Examine a SSH Session with Wireshark
Part 5: Configure the Switch for SSH Access
Part 6: SSH from the CLI on the Switch
In the past, Telnet was the most common network protocol used to remotely configure network devices.
However, protocols such as Telnet do not authenticate or encrypt the information between the client and
server. This allows a network sniffer to intercept passwords and configuration information.
Secure Shell (SSH) is a network protocol that establishes a secure terminal emulation connection to a router
or other networking device. SSH encrypts all information that passes over the network link and provides
authentication of the remote computer. SSH is rapidly replacing Telnet as the remote login tool of choice for
network professionals. SSH is most often used to log in to a remote device and execute commands; however,
it can also transfer files using the associated Secure FTP (SFTP) or Secure Copy (SCP) protocols.
For SSH to function, the network devices communicating must be configured to support it. In this lab, you will
enable the SSH server on a router and then connect to that router using a PC with an SSH client installed. On
a local network, the connection is normally made using Ethernet and IP.
In this lab, you will configure a router to accept SSH connectivity, and use Wireshark to capture and view
Telnet and SSH sessions. This will demonstrate the importance of encryption with SSH. You will also be
challenged to configure a switch for SSH connectivity on your own.
Page 1 of 11

Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with terminal emulation program, such as Tera Term, and Wireshark
installed)

addresses, device access, and passwords on the router.

c.

f.
Assign cisco as the vty password and enable login.
g. Encrypt the plain text passwords.

h. Create a banner that will warn anyone accessing the device that unauthorized access is prohibited.
i.
Configure and activate the G0/1 interface on the router using the information contained in the Addressing
Table.
j.
Step 4: Configure PC-A.

a. Configure PC-A with an IP address and subnet mask.
b. Configure a default gateway for PC-A.
Step 5: Verify network connectivity.

Ping R1 from PC-A. If the ping fails, troubleshoot the connection.
Page 2 of 11
Part 2: Configure the Router for SSH Access

Using Telnet to connect to a network device is a security risk, because all information is transmitted in a clear
text format. SSH encrypts the session data and provides device authentication, which is why SSH is
recommended for remote connections. In Part 2, you will configure the router to accept SSH connections over
the VTY lines.
Step 1: Configure device authentication.

The device name and domain are used as part in the crypto key when it is generated. Therefore, these
names must be entered prior to issuing the crypto key command.
a. Configure device name.
b. Configure the domain for the device.
R1(config)# ip domain-name ccna-lab.com
Step 2: Configure the encryption key method.

R1(config)# crypto key generate rsa modulus 1024
The name for the keys will be: R1.ccna-lab.com
% The key modulus size is 1024 bits
% Generating 1024 bit RSA keys, keys will be non-exportable...
[OK] (elapsed time was 1 seconds)
R1(config)#
*Jan 28 21:09:29.867: %SSH-5-ENABLED: SSH 1.99 has been enabled
Step 3: Configure a local database username.

R1(config)# username admin privilege 15 secret adminpass
R1(config)#
*Feb 6 23:24:43.971: End->Password:QHjxdsVkjtoP7VxKIcPsLdTiMIvyLkyjT1HbmYxZigc
R1(config)#
Note: A privilege level of 15 gives the user administrator rights.
Step 4: Enable SSH on the VTY lines.

a. Enable Telnet and SSH on the inbound VTY lines using the transport input command.
R1(config)# line vty 0 4
R1(config-line)# transport input telnet ssh
b. Change the login method to use the local database for user verification.
R1(config-line)# login local
R1(config-line)# end
R1#
Step 5: Save the running configuration to the startup configuration file.

Destination filename [startup-config]?
Page 3 of 11

[OK]
R1#
Part 3: Examine a Telnet Session with Wireshark

In Part 3, you will use Wireshark to capture and view the transmitted data of a Telnet session on the router.
You will use Tera Term to telnet to R1, sign in, and then issue the show run command on the router.
Note: If a Telnet/SSH client software package is not installed on your PC, you must install one before
continuing. Two popular freeware Telnet/SSH packages are Tera Term (http://download.cnet.com/TeraTerm/3000-20432_4-75766675.html) and PuTTy (www.putty.org).
Note: Telnet is not available from the command prompt in Windows 7, by default. To enable Telnet for use in
the command prompt window, click Start > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features > Turn
Windows features on or off. Click the Telnet Client check box, and then click OK.
Step 1: Open Wireshark and start capturing data on the LAN interface.
Note: If you are unable to start the capture on the LAN interface, you may need to open Wireshark using the
Run as Administrator option.
Step 2: Start a Telnet session to the router.

a. Open Tera Term and select the Telnet Service radio button and in the Host field, enter 192.168.1.1.
What is the default TCP port for Telnet sessions? _________________

b. At the Username: prompt, enter admin and at the Password: prompt, enter adminpass. These prompts
are generated because you configured the VTY lines to use the local database with the login local
command.
Page 4 of 11
c.
Issue the show run command.

R1# show run
d. Enter exit to exit the Telnet session and out of Tera Term.
R1# exit
Step 4: Apply a Telnet filter on the Wireshark capture data.
Step 5: Use the Follow TCP Stream feature in Wireshark to view the Telnet session.
a. Right-click one of the Telnet lines in the Packet list section of Wireshark, and in the drop-down list, select
Follow TCP Stream.
Page 5 of 11

b. The Follow TCP Stream window displays the data for your Telnet session with the router. The entire
session is displayed in clear text, including your password. Notice that the username and show run
command that you entered are displayed with duplicate characters. This is caused by the echo setting in
Telnet to allow you to view the characters that you type on the screen.
c.
After you have finished reviewing your Telnet session in the Follow TCP Stream window, click Close.
Part 4: Examine an SSH session with Wireshark

In Part 4, you will use the Tera Term software to establish an SSH session with the router. Wireshark will be
used to capture and view the data of this SSH session.
Step 1: Open Wireshark and start capturing data on the LAN interface.
Step 2: Start an SSH session on the router.
a. Open Tera Term and enter the G0/1 interface IP address of R1 in the Host: field of the Tera Term: New
Connection window. Ensure that the SSH radio button is selected and then click OK to connect to the
router.
Page 6 of 11
What is the default TCP port used for SSH sessions? __________________
b. The first time you establish a SSH session to a device, a SECURITY WARNING is generated to let you
know that you have not connected to this device before. This message is part of the authentication
process. Read the security warning and then click Continue.
c.
In the SSH Authentication window, enter admin for the username and adminpass for the passphrase.
Click OK to sign into the router.
Page 7 of 11
d. You have established a SSH session on the router. The Tera Term software looks very similar to a
command window. At the command prompt, issue the show run command.
e. Exit the SSH session and out of Tera Term by issuing the exit command.
R1# exit
Step 4: Apply an SSH filter on the Wireshark Capture data.
Page 8 of 11
Step 5: Use the Follow TCP Stream feature in Wireshark to view the Telnet session.
a. Right-click one of the SSHv2 lines in the Packet list section of Wireshark, and in the drop-down list,
select the Follow TCP Stream option.
b. Examine the Follow TCP Stream window of your SSH session. The data has been encrypted and is
unreadable. Compare the data in your SSH session to the data of your Telnet session.
Why is SSH preferred over Telnet for remote connections?

____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
After examining your SSH session, click Close.
d. Close Wireshark.
Part 5: Configure the Switch for SSH Access

In Part 5, you are to configure the switch in the topology to accept SSH connections. Once the switch has
been configured, establish a SSH session on it using Tera Term.
Page 9 of 11
Step 1: Configure the basic settings on the switch.

Step 2: Configure the switch for SSH connectivity.
Use the same commands that you used to configure SSH on the router in Part 2 to configure SSH for the
switch.
Step 3: Establish a SSH connection to the switch.

Start Tera Term from PC-A, and then SSH to the SVI interface on the S1.
Step 4: Troubleshoot as necessary.

Are you able to establish a SSH session with the switch?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Part 6: SSH From the CLI on the Switch

The SSH client is built into the Cisco IOS and can be run from the CLI. In Part 6, you will SSH to the router
from the CLI on the switch.
Step 1: View the parameters available for the Cisco IOS SSH client.
Use the question mark (?) to display the parameter options available with the ssh command.
S1# ssh
-c
-l
-m
-o
-p
-v
-vrf
WORD
?
Select encryption algorithm
Log in using this user name
Select HMAC algorithm
Specify options
Connect to this port
Specify SSH Protocol Version
Specify vrf name
IP address or hostname of a remote system
Step 2: SSH to router R1 from S1.

a. You must use the l admin option when you SSH to R1. This allows you to log in as user admin. When
prompted, enter adminpass for the password.
S1# ssh -l admin 192.168.1.1
Password:
***********************************************
Warning: Unauthorized Access is Prohibited!
***********************************************
R1#
b. You can return to S1 without closing your SSH session to R1 by pressing Ctrl+Shift+6. Release the
Ctrl+Shift+6 keys and press x. You should see the switch privilege EXEC prompt display.
R1#
S1#
Page 10 of 11

c.
To return to the SSH session on R1, press Enter on a blank CLI line. You may need to press Enter a
second time to see the router CLI prompt.
S1#
[Resuming connection 1 to 192.168.1.1 ... ]
R1#
d. To end the SSH session on R1, type exit at the router prompt.
R1# exit
[Connection to 192.168.1.1 closed by foreign host]
S1#
What versions of SSH are supported from the CLI?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Reflection
How would you provide multiple users, each with their own username, access to a network device?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Page 11 of 11
Lab Securing Network Devices

Topology
Addressing Table
Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
R1
G0/1
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
192.168.1.11
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
Objectives
Part 2: Configure Basic Security Measures on the Router
Part 3: Configure Basic Security Measures on the Switch
It is recommended that all network devices be configured with, at least, a minimum set of best practice
security commands. This includes end user devices, servers, and network devices, such as routers and
switches.
In this lab, you will configure the network devices in the topology to accept SSH sessions for remote
management. You will also use the IOS CLI to configure common, basic best practice security measures. You
will then test the security measures to verify that they are properly implemented and working correctly.
Required Resources
Page 1 of 8


Attach the devices as shown in the topology and cable as necessary.

Please refer to the previous lab for help with the commands needed for SSH.
c.
Assign the name of the router as R1.
d. Disable DNS lookup.

f.

h. Encrypt the plain text passwords.
i.
j.
Table.
k.

a. Console into the switch and enable privileged EXEC mode.
c.
Assign the name of the switch as S1.
f.

h. Encrypt the plain text passwords.
i.
j.
Configure the default SVI with the IP address information contained in the Addressing Table.
k.
Page 2 of 8
Part 2: Configure Basic Security Measures on the Router

Step 1: Strengthen passwords.
An administrator should ensure that passwords meet the standard guidelines for strong passwords. These
guidelines could include mixing letters, numbers, and special characters in the password and setting a
minimum length.
Note: Best practice guidelines require the use of strong passwords, such as those shown here, in a
production environment. However, the other labs in this course use the cisco and class passwords for ease in
performing the labs.
a. Change the privileged EXEC encrypted password to meet guidelines.
R1(config)# enable secret Enablep@55
b. Require that a minimum of 10 characters be used for all passwords.
R1(config)# security passwords min-length 10
Step 2: Enable SSH connections.

a. Assign the domain name as CCNA-lab.com.
R1(config)# ip domain-name CCNA-lab.com
b. Create a local user database entry to use when connecting to the router via SSH. The password should
meet strong password standards, and the user should have administrator-level access.
R1(config)# username admin privilege 15 secret Admin15p@55
c.
Configure the transport input for the vty lines so that they accept SSH connections, but do not allow
Telnet connections.
R1(config-line)# transport input ssh
d. The vty lines should use the local user database for authentication.
e. Generate a RSA crypto key using a modulus of 1024 bits.
The name for the keys will be: R1.CCNA-lab.com
% The key modulus size is 1024 bits
% Generating 1024 bit RSA keys, keys will be non-exportable...
[OK] (elapsed time was 2 seconds)
R1(config)#
*Jan 31 17:54:16.127: %SSH-5-ENABLED: SSH 1.99 has been enabled
Step 3: Secure the console and VTY lines.

a. You can set the router to log out of a connection that has been idle for a specified time. If a network
administrator was logged into a networking device and was suddenly called away, this command
automatically logs the user out after the specified time. The following commands cause the line to log out
after five minutes of inactivity.
Page 3 of 8

R1(config)# line
R1(config-line)#
R1(config-line)#
R1(config-line)#
R1(config-line)#
R1(config)#
console 0
exec-timeout 5 0
line vty 0 4
exec-timeout 5 0
exit
b. The following command impedes brute force login attempts. The router blocks login attempts for 30
seconds if someone fails two attempts within 120 seconds. This timer is set especially low for the purpose
of this lab.
R1(config)# login block-for 30 attempts 2 within 120
What does the 2 within 120 mean in the above command?
____________________________________________________________________________________
What does the block-for 30 mean in the above command?
____________________________________________________________________________________
Step 4: Verify that all unused ports are disabled.

Router ports are disabled, by default, but it is always prudent to verify that all unused ports are in an
administratively down state. This can be quickly checked by issuing the show ip interface brief command.
Any unused ports that are not in an administratively down state should be disabled using the shutdown
command in interface configuration mode.
Interface
GigabitEthernet0/0
GigabitEthernet0/1
Serial0/0/0
Serial0/0/1
R1#
IP-Address
unassigned
unassigned
192.168.1.1
unassigned
unassigned
OK?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Method
NVRAM
NVRAM
manual
NVRAM
NVRAM
Status
administratively
administratively
up
administratively
administratively
Protocol
down down
down down
up
down down
down down
Step 5: Verify that your security measures have been implemented correctly.
a. Use Tera Term to telnet to R1.
Does R1 accept the Telnet connection? ___________________________
Why or why not?
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. Use Tera Term to SSH to R1.
Does R1 accept the SSH connection? __________
c.
Intentionally mistype the user and password information to see if login access is blocked after two
attempts.
What happened after you failed to login the second time?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 8

d. From your console session on the router, issue the show login command to view the login status. In the
example below, the show login command was issued within the 30 second login blocking period and
shows that the router is in Quiet-Mode. The router will not accept any login attempts for 14 more seconds.
R1# show login
A default login delay of 1 second is applied.
No Quiet-Mode access list has been configured.
Router enabled to watch for login Attacks.
If more than 2 login failures occur in 120 seconds or less,
logins will be disabled for 30 seconds.
Router presently in Quiet-Mode.
Will remain in Quiet-Mode for 14 seconds.
Denying logins from all sources.
R1#
e. After the 30 seconds has expired, SSH to R1 again and login using the admin username and
Admin15p@55 for the password.
After you successfully logged in, what was displayed? ________________________
f.
Enter privileged EXEC mode and use Enablep@55 for the password.
If you mistype this password, are you disconnected from your SSH session after two failed attempts
within 120 seconds? ______________
Why or why not?
____________________________________________________________________________________
g. Issue the show running-config command at the privileged EXEC prompt to view the security settings
you have applied.
Part 3: Configure Basic Security Measures on the Switch

Step 1: Strengthen Passwords on the switch.
Change the privileged EXEC encrypted password to meet strong password guidelines.
S1(config)# enable secret Enablep@55
Note: The security password min-length command is not available on the 2960 switch.
Step 2: Enable SSH Connections.

a. Assign the domain-name as CCNA-lab.com
S1(config)# ip domain-name CCNA-lab.com
b. Create a local user database entry for use when connecting to the router via SSH. The password should
meet strong password standards, and the user should have administrative level access.
S1(config)# username admin privilege 15 secret Admin15p@55
c.
Configure the transport input for the vty lines to allow SSH connections but not allow Telnet connections.
S1(config)# line vty 0 15
S1(config-line)# transport input ssh
Page 5 of 8

d. The vty lines should use the local user database for authentication.
S1(config-line)# login local
S1(config-line)# exit
e. Generate a RSA crypto key using a modulus of 1024 bits.
S1(config)# crypto key generate rsa modulus 1024
Step 3: Secure the console and VTY lines.

a. Have the switch log out a line that has been idle for 10 minutes.
S1(config)# line
S1(config-line)#
S1(config-line)#
S1(config-line)#
S1(config-line)#
S1(config)#
console 0
exec-timeout 10 0
line vty 0 15
exec-timeout 10 0
exit
b. To impede brute force login attempts, configure the switch to block login access for 30 seconds if there
are 2 failed attempts within 120 seconds. This timer is set especially low for the purpose of this lab.
S1(config)# login block-for 30 attempts 2 within 120
S1(config)# end
Step 4: Verify that all unused ports are disabled.

Switch ports are enabled, by default. Shut down all ports that are not in use on the switch.
a. You can verify the switch port status using the show ip interface brief command.
Interface
Vlan1
FastEthernet0/1
FastEthernet0/2
FastEthernet0/3
FastEthernet0/4
FastEthernet0/5
FastEthernet0/6
FastEthernet0/7
FastEthernet0/8
FastEthernet0/9
FastEthernet0/10
FastEthernet0/11
FastEthernet0/12
FastEthernet0/13
FastEthernet0/14
FastEthernet0/15
FastEthernet0/16
FastEthernet0/17
FastEthernet0/18
FastEthernet0/19
FastEthernet0/20
IP-Address
192.168.1.11
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
OK?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Method
manual
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
Status
up
down
down
down
down
up
up
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
Protocol
up
down
down
down
down
up
up
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
Page 6 of 8

FastEthernet0/21
FastEthernet0/22
FastEthernet0/23
FastEthernet0/24
GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/2
S1#
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
b. Use the interface range command to shut down multiple interfaces at a time.
S1(config)# interface range f0/14 , f0/7-24 , g0/1-2
S1(config-if-range)# shutdown
S1(config-if-range)# end
S1#
c.
Verify that all inactive interfaces have been administratively shut down.
Interface
Vlan1
FastEthernet0/1
FastEthernet0/2
FastEthernet0/3
FastEthernet0/4
FastEthernet0/5
FastEthernet0/6
FastEthernet0/7
FastEthernet0/8
FastEthernet0/9
FastEthernet0/10
FastEthernet0/11
FastEthernet0/12
FastEthernet0/13
FastEthernet0/14
FastEthernet0/15
FastEthernet0/16
FastEthernet0/17
FastEthernet0/18
FastEthernet0/19
FastEthernet0/20
FastEthernet0/21
FastEthernet0/22
FastEthernet0/23
FastEthernet0/24
GigabitEthernet0/1
GigabitEthernet0/2
S1#
IP-Address
192.168.1.11
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
OK?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Method
manual
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
unset
Status
up
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
up
up
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
Protocol
up
down
down
down
down
up
up
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
down
Step 5: Verify that your security measures have been implemented correctly.
a. Verify that Telnet has been disabled on the switch.
Page 7 of 8

b. SSH to the switch and intentionally mistype the user and password information to see if login access is
blocked.
c.
After the 30 seconds has expired, SSH to S1 again and log in using the admin username and
Admin15p@55 for the password.
Did the banner appear after you successfully logged in? __________
d. Enter privileged EXEC mode using Enablep@55 as the password.

e. Issue the show running-config command at the privileged EXEC prompt to view the security settings
you have applied.
Reflection
1. The password cisco command was entered for the console and vty lines in your basic configuration in Part
1. When is this password used after the best practice security measures have been applied?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Are preconfigured passwords, shorter than 10 characters, affected by the security passwords min-length
10 command?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Page 8 of 8
Lab - Testing Network Latency with Ping and Traceroute

Topology
Objectives
Part 1: Use Ping to Document Network Latency
Part 2: Use Traceroute to Document Network Latency
To obtain realistic network latency statistics, this activity must be performed on a live network. Be sure to
check with your instructor for any local security restrictions against using the ping command on the network.
The purpose of this lab is to measure and evaluate network latency over time, and during different periods of
the day to capture a representative sample of typical network activity. This will be accomplished by analyzing
the return delay from a distant computer with the ping command. Return delay times, measured in
milliseconds, will be summarized by computing the average latency (mean) and the range (maximum and
minimum) of the delay times.
Required Resources
Part 1: Use Ping to Document Network Latency

In Part 1, you will examine network latency to several websites in different parts of the globe. This process
can be used in an enterprise production network to create a performance baseline.
Step 1: Verify connectivity.

Ping the following Regional Internet Registry (RIR) websites to verify connectivity:
C:\Users\User1>
C:\Users\User1>
C:\Users\User1>
C:\Users\User1>
ping
ping
ping
ping
www.arin.net
www.lacnic.net
www.afrinic.net
www.apnic.net
Note: Because www.ripe.net does not reply to ICMP requests, it cannot be used for this lab.
Page 1 of 5
Step 2: Collect network data.

You will collect a sufficient amount of data to compute statistics on the ping output by sending out 25 echo
requests to each address listed in Step 1. Record the results for each website to text files.
a. At the command prompt, type ping to list the available options.
C:\Users\User1> ping
Usage: ping [-t] [-a] [-n count] [-l size] [-f] [-i TTL] [-v TOS]
[-r count] [-s count] [[-j host-list] | [-k host-list]]
[-w timeout] [-R] [-S srcaddr] [-4] [-6] target_name
Options:
-t
-a
-n count
-l size
-f
-i TTL
-v TOS
<output omitted>
Ping the specified host until stopped.

To see statistics and continue - type Control-Break;
To stop - type Control-C.
Resolve addresses to hostnames.
Number of echo requests to send.
Send buffer size.
Set Don't Fragment flag in packet (IPv4-only).
Time To Live.
Type Of Service (IPv4-only. This setting has been deprecated
b. Using the ping command with the count option, you can send 25 echo requests to the destination as
illustrated below. Furthermore, it will create a text file with filename of arin.txt in the current directory. This
text file will contain the results of the echo requests.
C:\Users\User1> ping n 25 www.arin.net > arin.txt
Note: The terminal remains blank until the command has finished, because the output has been redirected to
a text file, arin.txt, in this example. The > symbol is used to redirect the screen output to the file and overwrite
the file if it already exists. If appending more results to the file is desired, replace > with >> in the command.
c.
Repeat the ping command for the other websites.

C:\Users\User1> ping n 25 www.afrinic.net > afrinic.txt
C:\Users\User1> ping n 25 www.apnic.net > apnic.txt
C:\Users\User1> ping n 25 www.lacnic.net > lacnic.txt
Page 2 of 5
Step 3: Verify data collection.

To see the results in the file created, use the more command at the command prompt.
C:\Users\User1> more arin.txt
Pinging www.arin.net [192.149.252.76] with 32 bytes of data:
<output omitted>
Note: Press the Spacebar to display the rest of the file or press q to exit.
To verify that the files have been created, use the dir command to list the files in the directory. Also the
wildcard * can be used to filter only the text files.
C:\Users\User1> dir *.txt
Volume in drive C is OS
Volume Serial Number is 0A97-D265
Directory of C:\Users\User1
02/07/2013
02/07/2013
02/07/2013
02/07/2013
12:59 PM
1,642 afrinic.txt
01:00 PM
1,615 apnic.txt
12:40 PM
1,641 arin.txt
12:58 PM
1,589 lacnic.txt
4 File(s)
6,487 bytes
0 Dir(s) 34,391,453,696 bytes free
Record your results in the following table.

Minimum
Maximum
Average
www.afrinic.net
www.apnic.net
www.arin.net
www.lacnic.net
Compare the delay results. How is delay affected by geographical location?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 5
Part 2: Use Traceroute to Document Network Latency

The routes traced may go through many hops and a number of different ISPs depending on the size of the
ISPs and the location of the source and destination hosts. The traceroute commands can also be used to
observe network latency. In Part 2, the tracert command is used to trace the path to the same destinations in
Part 1.
The tracert command uses ICMP TTL Exceed packets and ICMP echo replies to trace the path.
Step 1: Use the tracert command and record the output to text files.
Copy the following commands to create the traceroute files:
C:\Users\User1>
C:\Users\User1>
C:\Users\User1>
C:\Users\User1>
tracert
tracert
tracert
tracert
www.arin.net > traceroute_arin.txt

www.lacnic.net > traceroute_lacnic.txt
www.afrinic.net > traceroute_afrinic.txt
www.apnic.net > traceroute_apnic.txt
Step 2: Use the more command to examine the traced path.

a. Use the more command to access the content of these files:
C:\Users\User1> more traceroute_arin.txt
Tracing route to www.arin.net [192.149.252.75]
over a maximum of 30 hops:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
<1
11
10
19
13
72
72
74
75
74
71
73
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
<1
12
15
10
10
71
71
83
71
75
71
71
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
<1
11
11
11
11
70
72
73
73
73
71
71
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
192.168.1.1
10.39.0.1
172.21.0.116
70.169.73.90
chnddsrj01-ae2.0.rd.ph.cox.net [70.169.76.229]
mrfddsrj02-ae0.0.rd.dc.cox.net [68.1.1.7]
68.100.0.146
172.22.66.29
172.22.66.29
wsip-98-172-152-14.dc.dc.cox.net [98.172.152.14]
host-252-131.arin.net [192.149.252.131]
www.arin.net [192.149.252.75]
Trace complete.
In this example, it took less than 1 ms to receive a reply from the default gateway (192.168.1.1). In hop
count 6, the round trip to 68.1.1.7 took an average of 71 ms. For the round trip to the final destination at
www.arin.net took an average of 72 ms.
Between lines 5 and 6, there is more network delay as indicated by the round trip time increase from an
average of 11 ms to 71 ms
b. Perform the same analysis with the rest of the tracert results.
What can you conclude regarding the relationship between the roundtrip time and geographical location?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 5
Reflection
1. The tracert and ping results can provide important network latency information. What do you need to do if
you want an accurate baseline picture regarding network latency for your network?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. How can you use the baseline information?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 5
Lab Using the CLI to Gather Network Device Information

Topology
Addressing Table
Device
R1
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
G0/1
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
Lo0
209.165.200.225
255.255.255.224
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
192.168.1.11
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
Objectives
Part 1: Set Up Topology and Initialize Devices
Initialize and reload the router and switch.
Assign a static IP address to PC-A NIC.
Configure basic settings on R1.
Configure basic settings on S1.
Part 3: Gather Network Device Information
Gather information on R1 using IOS CLI commands.
Gather information on S1 using IOS CLI commands.
Gather information on PC-A using the command prompt CLI.
Documenting a working network is one of the most important tasks a network professional can perform.
Having proper documentation of IP addresses, model numbers, IOS versions, ports used, and testing
security, can go a long way in helping to troubleshoot a network.
In this lab, you will build a small network, configure the devices, add some basic security, and then document
the configurations by issuing various commands on the router, switch and PC to gather your information.
Page 1 of 11

Required Resources

In Part 1, you will set up the network topology, clear any configurations if necessary, and configure basic
settings on the router and switch.
Step 1:
Cable the network as shown in the topology.
a. Attach the devices as shown in the topology and cable as necessary.

b. Power on all devices in the topology.
Step 2:
Initialize and reload the router and the switch.

In Part 2, you will set up the network topology and configure basic settings on the router and switch. Refer to
the topology and Addressing Table at the beginning of this lab for device names and address information.
prior to referencing this appendix.
Step 1:
Configure the IPv4 address for the PC.
Configure the IPv4 address, subnet mask, and default gateway address for PC-A based on the Addressing
Table.
Step 2:
Configure the router.
If you need assistance for Step 2, refer to Appendix A for help.

a. Console into the router and enter privileged EXEC mode.
b. Set the correct time on the router.
c.
Enter global configuration mode.

1) Assign a device name to the router based on the topology and Addressing Table.
2) Disable DNS lookup.
Page 2 of 11

3) Create a MOTD banner that warns anyone accessing the device that unauthorized access is
prohibited.
4) Assign class as the privileged EXEC encrypted password.
5) Assign cisco as the console password and enable console login access.
6) Encrypt clear text passwords.
7) Create a domain name of cisco.com for SSH access.
8) Create a user named admin with a secret password of cisco for SSH access.
9) Generate a RSA modulus key. Use 1024 for the number of bits.
d. Configure vty line access.
1) Use the local database for authentication for SSH.
2) Enable SSH only for login access.
e. Return to global configuration mode.
1) Create the Loopback 0 interface and assign the IP address based on the Addressing Table.
2) Configure and activate interface G0/1 on the router.
3) Configure interface descriptions for G0/1 and L0.
4) Save the running configuration file to the startup configuration file.
Step 3:
Configure the switch.
If you need assistance for Step 3, refer to Appendix A for help.

a. Console into the switch and enter privileged EXEC mode.
b. Set the correct time on the switch.
c.

1) Assign a device name on the switch based on the topology and Addressing Table.
prohibited.
5) Encrypt the clear text passwords.
8) Generate an RSA modulus key. Use 1024 for the number of bits.
9) Create and activate an IP address on the switch based on the topology and Addressing Table.
10) Set the default gateway on the switch.

1) Use local database for authentication for SSH.
3) Enter proper mode to configure interface descriptions for F0/5 and F0/6.
Page 3 of 11

Step 4:
a. From a command prompt on PC-A, ping the S1 VLAN 1 IP address. Troubleshoot your physical and
logical configurations if the pings were not successful.
b. From the PC-A command prompt, ping your default gateway IP address on R1. Troubleshoot your
physical and logical configurations if the pings were not successful.
c.
From the PC-A command prompt, ping the loopback interface on R1. Troubleshoot your physical and
logical configurations if the pings were not successful.
d. Console back into the switch and ping the G0/1 IP address on R1. Troubleshoot your physical and logical
configurations if the pings were not successful.
Part 3: Gather Network Device Information

In Part 3, you will use a variety of commands to gather information about the devices on your network, as well
as some performance characteristics. Network documentation is a very important component of managing
your network. Documentation of both physical and logical topologies is important, as is verifying platform
models and IOS versions of your network devices. Having knowledge of the proper commands to gather this
information is essential for a network professional.
Step 1:
Gather information on R1 using IOS commands.
One of the most basic steps is to gather information on the physical device, as well as information on the
operating system.
a. Issue the appropriate command to discover the following information:
Router Model:
__________________________________
IOS Version:
__________________________________
Total RAM:
__________________________________
Total NVRAM:
__________________________________
Total Flash Memory:
__________________________________
IOS Image File:
__________________________________
Configuration Register: __________________________________

Technology Package:
__________________________________
What command did you issue to gather the information?

_____________________________________________________________
b. Issue the appropriate command to display a summary of important information about the router
interfaces. Write down the command and record your results below.
Note: Only record interfaces that have IP addresses.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 11

c.
Issue the appropriate command to display the routing table. Write down the command and record your
results below.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
d. What command would you use to display the Layer 2 to Layer 3 mapping of addresses on the router?
Write down the command and record your results below.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
e. What command would you use to see detailed information about all the interfaces on the router or about a
specific interface? Write down the command below.
____________________________________________________________________________________
f.
Cisco has a very powerful protocol that operates at Layer 2 of the OSI model. This protocol can help you
map out how Cisco devices are connected physically, as well as determining model numbers and even
IOS versions and IP addressing. What command or commands would you use on router R1 to find out
information about switch S1 to help you complete the table below?
Device ID
Local
Interface
Capability
Model #
Remote
Port ID
IP Address
IOS Version
g. A very elementary test of your network devices is to see if you can telnet into them. Remember, Telnet is
not a secure protocol. It should not be enabled in most cases. Using a Telnet client, such as Tera Term or
PuTTY, try to telnet to R1 using the default gateway IP address. Record your results below.
___________________________________________________________________________________
h. From PC-A, test to ensure that SSH is working properly. Using an SSH client, such as Tera Term or
PuTTY, SSH into R1 from PC-A. If you get a warning message regarding a different key, click Continue.
Log in with the appropriate username and password you created in Part 2. Were you successful?
___________________________________________________________________________________
The various passwords configured on your router should be as strong and protected as possible.
Note: The passwords used for our lab (cisco and class) do not follow the best practices needed for
strong passwords. These passwords are used merely for the convenience of performing the labs. By
default, the console password and any vty passwords configured would display in clear text in your
configuration file.
Page 5 of 11

i.
Verify that all of your passwords in the configuration file are encrypted. Write down the command and
record your results below.
Command: ________________________________________________
Is the console password encrypted? __________________________
Is the SSH password encrypted? _____________________________
Step 2:
Gather information on S1 using IOS commands.
Many of the commands that you used on R1 can also be used with the switch. However, there are some
differences with some of the commands.
a. Issue the appropriate command to discover the following information:
Switch Model: __________________________________
IOS Version:
__________________________________
Total NVRAM: __________________________________

IOS Image File: __________________________________
What command did you issue to gather the information?
_____________________________________________________________
b. Issue the appropriate command to display a summary of key information about the switch interfaces.
Write down the command and record your results below.
Note: Only record active interfaces.
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
Issue the appropriate command to display the switch MAC address table. Record the dynamic type MAC
addresses only in the space below.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
d. Verify that Telnet VTY access is disabled on S1. Using a Telnet client, such as Tera Term or PuTTY, try
to telnet to S1 using the 192.168.1.11 address. Record your results below.
___________________________________________________________________________________
e. From PC-A, test to ensure that SSH is working properly. Using an SSH client, such as Tera Term or
PuTTY, SSH into S1 from PC-A. If you get a warning message regarding a different key, click Continue.
Log in with an appropriate username and password. Were you successful?
___________________________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 11

f.
Complete the table below with information about router R1 using the appropriate command or commands
necessary on S1.
Device Id
Local
Interface
Capability
Model #
Remote
Port ID
IP Address
IOS Version
g. Verify that all of your passwords in the configuration file are encrypted. Write down the command and
record your results below.
Command: ________________________________________________
Is the console password encrypted? __________________________
Step 3:
Gather information on PC-A.
Using various Windows utility commands, you will gather information on PC-A.
a. From the PC-A command prompt, issue the ipconfig /all command and record your answers below.
What is the PC-A IP address?
____________________________________________________________________________________
What is the PC-A subnet mask?
____________________________________________________________________________________
What is the PC-A default gateway address?
____________________________________________________________________________________
What is the PC-A MAC address?
____________________________________________________________________________________
b. Issue the appropriate command to test the TCP/IP protocol stack with the NIC. What command did you
use?
____________________________________________________________________________________
c.
Ping the loopback interface of R1 from the PC-A command prompt. Was the ping successful?
____________________________________________________________________________________
d. Issue the appropriate command on PC-A to trace the list of router hops for packets originating from PC-A
to the loopback interface on R1. Record the command and output below. What command did you use?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
e. Issue the appropriate command on PC-A to find the Layer 2 to Layer 3 address mappings held on your
NIC. Record your answers below. Only record answers for the 192.168.1.0/24 network. What command
did you use?
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 7 of 11
Reflection
Why is it important to document your network devices?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)

Step 1: Configure the IPv4 address for the PC.
Configure the IPv4 address, subnet mask, and default gateway address for PC-A based on the Addressing
Table at the beginning of this lab.
Page 8 of 11

a. Console into the router and enter privileged EXEC mode.
Router> enable
Router#
b. Set the correct time on the router.
Router# clock set 10:40:30 6 February 2013
Router#
c.

Router# config t
Router(config)#
1) Assign a hostname to the router. Use the topology and Addressing Table as guidelines.
R1(config)#
prohibited.
R1(config)# banner motd #Warning! Unauthorized Access is prohibited.#
R1(config)# enable secret class
R1(config)# line con 0
R1(config-line)# password cisco
R1(config-line)# login
6) Encrypt clear text passwords.
R1(config)# service password-encryption
Page 9 of 11

R1(config)# ip domain-name cisco.com
R1(config)# username admin secret cisco
1) Use the local database for authentication for SSH.
R1(config-line)# transport input ssh
e. Return to global configuration mode.
1) Create the Loopback 0 interface and assign the IP address based on the Address Table.
R1(config)# interface loopback 0
2) Configure and activate interface G0/1 on the router.
R1(config-if)# int g0/1
3) Configure interface descriptions for G0/1 and L0.
R1(config-if)# description Connected to LAN
R1(config-if)# int lo0
R1(config-if)# description Emulate ISP Connection
R1(config-if)# end
R1# copy run start

a. Console into the switch and enter privileged EXEC mode.
Switch> enable
Switch#
b. Set the correct time on the switch.

Switch# clock set 10:52:30 6 February 2013
c.

Switch# config t
1) Assign a hostname on the switch based on the topology and Addressing Table.
Page 10 of 11

prohibited.
S1(config)# banner motd #Warning! Unauthorized access is prohibited.#
5) Encrypt the clear text passwords.
S1(config)# service password-encryption
S1(config)# ip domain-name cisco.com
S1(config)# username admin secret cisco
S1(config)# crypto key generate rsa modulus 1024
9) Create and activate an IP address on the switch based on the topology and Addressing Table.
S1(config)# interface vlan 1
10) Set the default gateway on the switch.
S1(config)# ip default-gateway 192.168.1.1
S1(config-if)# line con 0
1) Use local database for authentication for SSH.
S1(config-line)# line vty 0 15
S1(config-line)# login local
S1(config-line)# transport input ssh
3) Enter the appropriate configuration mode to configure interface descriptions for F0/5 and F0/6.
S1(config-line)# int f0/5
S1(config-if)# description Connected to R1
S1(config-if)# int f0/6
S1(config-if)# description Connected to PC-A
S1(config-if)# end
S1# copy run start
Page 11 of 11
Lab Managing Router Configuration Files with Terminal

Emulation Software
Topology
Addressing Table
Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
R1
G0/1
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
192.168.1.11
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
Objectives
Part 2: Use Terminal Emulation Software to Create a Backup Configuration File
Part 3: Use a Backup Configuration File to Restore a Router
It is a recommended best practice to maintain backup configuration files for routers and switches in the event
that they need to be restored to a previous configuration. Terminal emulation software can be used to easily
back up or restore a router or switch configuration file.
In this lab, you will use Tera Term to back up a router running configuration file, erase the router startup
configuration file, reload the router, and then restore the missing router configuration from the backup
configuration file.
Required Resources
Page 1 of 6
Lab Managing Router Configuration Files with Terminal Emulation Software


Attach the devices as shown in the topology and cable as necessary.
Step 2: Configure the PC-A network settings according to the Addressing Table.
a. Console into the router and enter global configuration mode.
b. Set the router name to R1.
c.
Disable DNS lookup.

f.

i.
Table.
j.

a. Console into the switch and enter into global configuration mode.
b. Set the switch name to S1.
c.
Disable DNS lookup.

f.

i.
Configure the default SVI management interface with the IP address information contained in the
Addressing Table.
j.
Configure the switch default gateway.
k.
Page 2 of 6
Part 2: Use Terminal Emulation Software to Create a Backup Configuration

File
Step 1: Establish a Tera Term console session to the router.
Launch the Tera Term Program, and in the New Connection window, select the Serial radio button and the
appropriate communications port for your PC (i.e., COM1).
Note: If Tera Term is not installed, you can download the latest version from a number of Internet sites.
Simply search for a Tera Term download.
a. In Tera Term, press Enter to connect to the router.
b. From the File menu, choose Log, and save the teraterm.log file to the Desktop. Ensure that the
Append and Plain text check boxes are enabled (checked).
c.
The Tera Term log file will create a record of every command issued and every output displayed.
Note: You can use this feature to capture the output from several commands in sequence and use it for
network documentation purposes. For example, you could issue the show version, show ip interface
brief, and show running-config commands to capture information about the router.
Step 2: Display the router running-configuration.

a. Use the console password to log in to the router.
b. Enter privileged EXEC mode.
c.
Enter the show running-config command.
d. Continue pressing the space bar when --More-- is displayed until you see the router R1# prompt return.
e. Click the Tera Term: Log icon on the Task bar. Click Close to end log session.
Page 3 of 6
Note: You can also copy and paste the text from the Tera Term window directly into a text editor.
Part 3: Use a Backup Configuration File to Restore a Router

Step 1: Erase the router startup-configuration and reload.
a. From privileged EXEC mode erase the startup configuration.
R1# erase startup-config
[OK]
b. Reload the router.

R1# reload
c.
At the System Configuration Dialog prompt, type no; a router prompt displays, indicating an unconfigured
router.
--- System Configuration Dialog --Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes/no]:
Press RETURN to get started!
<output omitted>
Router>
d. Enter privileged EXEC mode and enter a show running-config command to verify that all of the previous
configurations were erased.
Step 2: Edit the saved configuration backup file to prepare it for restoring the router
configuration.
To restore the router configuration from a saved running configuration backup file, you must edit the text.
a. Open the teraterm.log text file.
b. Remove each instance of --More-- in the text file.
Note: The --More-- was generated by pressing the Spacebar when displaying the running configuration.
Page 4 of 6

c.
Delete the initial lines of the backup configuration file, so that the first line starts with the first configuration
command as shown below.
service password-encryption
d. Replace the encrypted secret password.

Change to:
enable secret class
e. In the lines for interface GigabitEthernet0/1, insert a new line to enable the interface.
ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
duplex auto
speed auto
Change to:
ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
duplex auto
speed auto
no shutdown
f.
Change the message-of-the-day (MOTD) banner configuration to insert the delimiting characters as if you
were entering the command at the command line.
banner motd ^C Unauthorized Access is Prohibited! ^C
Change to:
banner motd Unauthorized Access is Prohibited!
g. In line con 0 and vty 0 4 sections, replace the encrypted password.

line con 0
password 7 104D000A0618
line vty 0 4
password 7 104D000A0618
Change to:
line con 0
password cisco
line vty 0 4
password cisco
h. After you have made all of the edits to the backup configuration file, save your changes to filename, R1config-backup.
Note: When saving the file, an extension, such as .txt, may be added to the filename automatically.
Page 5 of 6
Step 3: Restore the router configuration.

You can restore the edited running configuration directly to the console terminal in router global configuration
mode, and the configurations are entered as if they were commands entered individually at the command
prompt.
a. From the Tera Term console connection to the router, enter global configuration mode.
b. From the File menu, select Send file.
c.
Locate R1-config-backup and select Open.
d. Save the running configuration to the startup configuration file.

e. Verify the new running configuration.
Step 4: Back up and restore the switch.

Go back to the beginning of Part 2 and follow the same steps to backup and restore the switch configuration.
Reflection
Why do you think it is important to use a text editor instead of a word processor to copy and save your
command configurations?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Page 6 of 6
Lab Managing Device Configuration Files Using TFTP, Flash,

and USB
Topology
Addressing Table
Device
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
R1
G0/1
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
N/A
S1
VLAN 1
192.168.1.11
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
PC-A
NIC
192.168.1.3
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
Objectives
Part 1: Build the Network and Configure Basic Device Settings
Part 2: (Optional) Download TFTP Server Software
Part 3: Use TFTP to Back Up and Restore the Switch Running Configuration
Part 4: Use TFTP to Back Up and Restore the Router Running Configuration
Part 5: Back Up and Restore Running Configurations Using Router Flash Memory
Part 6: (Optional) Use a USB Drive to Back Up and Restore the Running Configuration
Cisco networking devices are often upgraded or swapped out for a number of reasons. It is important to
maintain backups of the latest device configurations, as well as a history of configuration changes. A TFTP
server is often used to backup configuration files and IOS images in production networks. A TFTP server is a
centralized and secure method used to store the backup copies of the files and restore them as necessary.
Using a centralized TFTP server, you can back up files from many different Cisco devices.
In addition to a TFTP server, most of the current Cisco routers can back up and restore files locally from
CompactFlash (CF) memory or a USB flash drive. The CF is a removable memory module that has replaced
the limited internal flash memory of earlier router models. The IOS image for the router resides in the CF
memory, and the router uses this IOS Image for the boot process. With the larger size of the CF memory,
additional files can be stored for backup purposes. A removable USB flash drive can also be used for backup
purposes.
In this lab, you will use TFTP server software to back up the Cisco device running configuration to the TFTP
server or flash memory. You can edit the file using a text editor and copy the new configuration back to a
Cisco device.
Page 1 of 14
Lab Managing Device Configuration Files Using TFTP, Flash and USB
Required Resources
1 PC (Windows 7, Vista, or XP with terminal emulation program, such as Tera Term, and a TFTP server)
USB flash drive (Optional)
Part 1: Build the Network and Configure Basic Device Settings

addresses for router R1, switch S1 and PC-A.

Attach the devices as shown in the topology diagram, and cable as necessary.

Step 3: Configure basic settings for each device.
a. Configure basic device parameters as shown in the Addressing Table.
b. To prevent the router and switch from attempting to translate incorrectly entered commands as though
they were host names, disable DNS lookup.
c.
Assign class as the privileged EXEC encrypted password.
d. Configure the passwords and allow login for console and vty lines using the cisco as the password.
e. Configure the default gateway for the switch.
f.
Encrypt the clear text passwords.
g. Configure the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for PC-A.
Step 4: Verify connectivity from PC-A.

a. Ping from PC-A to S1.
b. Ping from PC-A to R1.
If the pings are not successful, troubleshoot the basic device configurations before continuing.
Page 2 of 14
Part 2: (Optional) Download TFTP Server Software

A number of free TFTP servers are available on the Internet for download. The Tftpd32 server is used with
this lab.
Note: Downloading a TFTP server from a website requires Internet access.
Step 1: Verify availability of a TFTP server on PC-A.

a. Click the Start menu and select All Programs.
b. Search for a TFTP server on PC-A.
c.
If a TFTP server is not found, a TFTP server can be downloaded from the Internet.
Step 2: Download a TFTP server.

a. Tftpd32 is used in this lab. This server can be downloaded from the following link:
http://tftpd32.jounin.net/tftpd32_download.html
b. Choose the appropriate version for your system and install the server.
Part 3: Use TFTP to Back Up and Restore the Switch Running

Configuration
Step 1: Verify connectivity to switch S1 from PC-A.
The TFTP application uses the UDP Layer 4 transport protocol, which is encapsulated in an IP packet. For
TFTP file transfers to function, there must be Layer 1 and 2 (Ethernet, in this case) and Layer 3 (IP)
connectivity between the TFTP client and the TFTP server. The LAN topology in this lab uses only Ethernet at
Layers 1 and 2. However, TFTP transfers can also be accomplished over WAN links that use other Layer 1
physical links and Layer 2 protocols. As long as there is IP connectivity between the client and server, as
demonstrated by ping, the TFTP transfer can take place. If the pings are not successful, troubleshoot the
basic device configurations before continuing.
Note: A common misconception is that you can TFTP a file over the console connection. This is not the case
because the console connection does not use IP. The TFTP transfer can be initiated from the client device
(router or switch) using the console connection, but there must be IP connectivity between the client and
server for the file transfer to take place.
Step 2: Start the TFTP server.

a. Click the Start menu and select All Programs.
b. Find and select Tftpd32 or Tftpd64. The following window displays that the TFTP server is ready.
Page 3 of 14
c.
Click Browse to choose a directory where you have write permission, such as C:\Users\User1, or the
Desktop.
Step 3: Explore the copy command on a Cisco device.

a. Console into switch S1 and, from the privileged EXEC mode prompt, enter copy ? to display the options
for source or from location and other available copy options. You can specify flash: or flash0: as the
source, however, if you simply provide a filename as the source, flash0: is assumed and is the default.
Note that running-config is also an option for the source location.
S1# copy ?
/erase
/error
/noverify
/verify
archive:
cns:
flash0:
flash1:
flash:
ftp:
http:
https:
null:
nvram:
rcp:
running-config
scp:
startup-config
system:
tar:
Erase destination file system.

Allow to copy error file.
Don't verify image signature before reload.
Verify image signature before reload.
Copy from archive: file system
Copy from cns: file system
Copy from flash0: file system
Copy from flash1: file system
Copy from flash: file system
Copy from ftp: file system
Copy from http: file system
Copy from https: file system
Copy from null: file system
Copy from nvram: file system
Copy from rcp: file system
Copy from current system configuration
Copy from scp: file system
Copy from startup configuration
Copy from system: file system
Copy from tar: file system
Page 4 of 14
tftp:
tmpsys:
xmodem:
ymodem:
Copy
Copy
Copy
Copy
from
from
from
from
tftp: file system

tmpsys: file system
xmodem: file system
ymodem: file system
b. Use the ? to display the destination options after a source file location is chosen. The flash: file system
for S1 is the source file system in this example.
S1# copy flash: ?
archive:
flash0:
flash1:
flash:
ftp:
http:
https:
idconf
null:
nvram:
rcp:
running-config
scp:
startup-config
syslog:
system:
tftp:
tmpsys:
xmodem:
ymodem:
Copy to archive: file system

Copy to flash0: file system
Copy to flash1: file system
Copy to flash: file system
Copy to ftp: file system
Copy to http: file system
Copy to https: file system
Load an IDConf configuration file
Copy to null: file system
Copy to nvram: file system
Copy to rcp: file system
Update (merge with) current system configuration
Copy to scp: file system
Copy to startup configuration
Copy to syslog: file system
Copy to system: file system
Copy to tftp: file system
Copy to tmpsys: file system
Copy to xmodem: file system
Copy to ymodem: file system
Step 4: Transfer the running-config file from switch S1 to TFTP server on PC-A.
a. From the privileged EXEC mode on the switch, enter the copy running-config tftp: command. Provide
the remote host address of the TFTP server (PC-A), 192.168.1.3. Press Enter to accept default
destination filename (s1-confg) or provide your own filename. The exclamation marks (!!) indicate the
transfer process is in progress and is successful.
S1# copy running-config tftp:
!!
S1#
The TFTP server also displays the progress during the transfer.
Page 5 of 14
Note: If you do not have permission to write to the current directory that is used by the TFTP server, the
following error message displays:
S1# copy running-config tftp:
%Error opening tftp://192.168.1.3/s1-confg (Permission denied)
You can change the current directory in TFTP server by clicking Browse and choosing a different folder.
Note: Other issues, such as a firewall blocking TFTP traffic, can prevent the TFTP transfer. Please check
with your instructor for further assistance.
b. In the Tftpd32 server window, click Show Dir to verify that the s1-confg file has been transferred to your
current directory. Click Close when finished.
Page 6 of 14
Step 5: Create a modified switch running configuration file.

The saved running configuration file, s1-confg, can also be restored to the switch by using the copy
command from the switch. The original or a modified version of the file can be copied to the flash file system
of the switch.
a. Navigate to the TFTP directory on PC-A by using the file system of PC-A, and then locate the s1-confg
file. Open this file using a text editor program, such as WordPad.
b. With the file open, locate the hostname S1 line. Replace S1 with Switch1. Delete all the self-generated
crypto keys, as necessary. A sample of the keys is displayed below. These keys are not exportable and
can cause errors while updating the running configuration.
crypto pki trustpoint TP-self-signed-1566151040
enrollment selfsigned
subject-name cn=IOS-Self-Signed-Certificate-1566151040
revocation-check none
rsakeypair TP-self-signed-1566151040
!
!
crypto pki certificate chain TP-self-signed-1566151040
certificate self-signed 01
3082022B 30820194 A0030201 02020101 300D0609 2A864886
31312F30 2D060355 04031326 494F532D 53656C66 2D536967
<output omitted>
E99574A6 D945014F B6FE22F3 642EE29A 767EABF7 403930CA
02F9C933 B3296D9E 095EBDAF 343D17F6 AF2831C7 6DA6DFE3
40D96970 A0D12080 07A1C169 30B9D889 A6E2189C 75B988B9
CCFA6B29 729C1E0B 9DADACD0 3D7381
quit
c.
F70D0101 05050030
6E65642D 43657274
D2C59E23 102EC12E
35B38D90 E6F07CD4
0AF27EDC 6D6FA0E5
Save this file as a plain text file with a new filename, Switch1-confg.txt, in this example.
Note: When saving the file, an extension, such as .txt, may be added to the filename automatically.
d. In the Tftpd32 server window, click Show Dir to verify that the Switch1-confg.txt file is located in the
current directory.
Step 6: Upload running configuration file from TFTP server to switch S1.
a. From the privileged EXEC mode on the switch, enter the copy tftp running-config command. Provide
the remote host address of the TFTP server, 192.168.1.3. Enter the new filename, Switch1-confg.txt.
The exclamation mark (!) indicates the transfer process is in progress and is successful.
S1# copy tftp: running-config
Source filename []? Switch1-confg.txt
Destination filename [running-config]?
Accessing tftp://192.168.1.3/Switch1-confg.txt...
Loading Switch1-confg.txt from 192.168.1.3 (via Vlan1): !
[OK - 1580 bytes]
[OK]
*Mar 1 00:21:16.242: %PKI-4-NOAUTOSAVE: Configuration was modified.
memory" to save new certificate
Issue "write
Page 7 of 14
*Mar 1 00:21:16.251: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from tftp://192.168.1.3/Switch1confg.txt by console
Switch1#
After the transfer has completed, the prompt has changed from S1 to Switch1, because the running
configuration is updated with the hostname Switch1 command in the modified running configuration.
b. Enter the show running-config command to examine running configuration file.
Switch1# show running-config
!
!
version 15.0
no service pad
!
hostname Switch1
!
boot-start-marker
boot-end-marker
<output omitted>
Note: This procedure merges the running-config from the TFTP server with the current running-config in
the switch or router. If changes were made to the current running-config, the commands in the TFTP copy
are added. Alternatively, if the same command is issued, it updates the corresponding command in the
switch or router current running-config.
If you want to completely replace the current running-config with the one from the TFTP server, you must
erase the switch startup-config and reload the device. You will then need to configure the VLAN 1
management address, so there is IP connectivity between the TFTP server and the switch.
Part 4: Use TFTP to Back Up and Restore the Router Running

Configuration
The backup and restore procedure from Part 3 can also be performed with a router. In Part 4, the running
configuration file will be backed up and restored using a TFTP server.
Step 1: Verify connectivity to router R1 from PC-A.

If the pings are not successful, troubleshoot the basic device configurations before continuing.
Step 2: Transfer the running configuration from router R1 to TFTP server on PC-A.
a. From the privileged EXEC mode on R1, enter the copy running-config tftp command. Provide the
remote host address of the TFTP server, 192.168.1.3, and accept the default filename.
b. Verify that the file has been transferred to the TFTP server.
Page 8 of 14
Step 3: Restore the running configuration file to the router.

a. Erase the startup-config file on the router.
b. Reload the router.
c.
Configure the G0/1 interface on the router with an IP address 192.168.1.1.
d. Verify connectivity between the router and PC-A.

e. Use the copy command to transfer the running-config file from the TFTP server to the router. Use
running-config as the destination.
f.
Verify the router has updated the running-config.
Part 5: Back Up and Restore Configurations Using Router Flash Memory

For the 1941 and other newer Cisco routers, there is no internal flash memory. The flash memory for these
routers uses CompactFlash (CF) memory. The use of CF memory allows for more available flash memory
and easier upgrades without the need to open the router case. Besides storing the necessary files, such as
IOS images, the CF memory can store other files, such as a copy of the running configuration. In Part 5, you
will create a backup copy of the running configuration file and save it on the CF memory on the router.
Note: If the router does not use CF, the router may not have enough flash memory for storing the backup
copy of running configuration file. You should still read through the instructions and become familiar with the
commands.
Step 1: Display the router file systems.

The show file systems command displays the available file systems on the router. The flash0: file system is
the default file system on this router as indicated by the asterisk (*) symbol (at the beginning of the line). The
hash (#) sign (at the end of the highlighted line) indicates that it is a bootable disk. The flash0: file system can
also be referenced using the name flash:. The total size of the flash0: is 256 MB with 62 MB available.
Currently the flash1: slot is empty as indicated by the under the headings, Size (b) and Free (b). Currently
flash0: and nvram: are the only available file systems.
R1# show file systems
File Systems:
Size(b)
260153344
262136
-
Free(b)
64499712
242776
-
Type
opaque
opaque
opaque
opaque
network
disk
disk
nvram
opaque
opaque
opaque
network
network
network
network
opaque
Flags
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
wo
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
ro
Prefixes
archive:
system:
tmpsys:
null:
tftp:
flash0: flash:#
flash1:
nvram:
syslog:
xmodem:
ymodem:
rcp:
http:
ftp:
scp:
tar:
Page 9 of 14
-
network
opaque
rw
ro
https:
cns:
Where is the startup-config file located? ___________________________________________________

Note: Verify there is at least 1 MB (1,048,576 bytes) of free space. If there is not enough space in the
flash memory, please contact your instructor for further instructions. You can determine the size of flash
memory and space available using the show flash or dir flash: command at the privileged EXEC
prompt.
Step 2: Copy the router running configuration to flash.

A file can be copied to flash by using the copy command at the privileged EXEC prompt. In this example, the
file is copied into flash0:, because there is only one flash drive available as displayed in the previous step,
and it is also the default file system. The R1-running-config-backup file is used as the filename for the
backup running configuration file.
Note: Remember that filenames are case-sensitive in the IOS file system.
a. Copy the running configuration to flash memory.
R1# copy running-config flash:
Destination filename [running-config]? R1-running-config-backup
b. Use dir command to verify the running-config has been copied to flash.
R1# dir flash:
Directory of flash0:/
1 drw0
<output omitted>
20 -rw67998028
4.M3.bin
22 -rw2169
24 -rw5865
25 -rw6458
Nov 15 2011 14:59:04 +00:00

Aug 7 2012 17:39:16 +00:00
Feb 4 2013 23:57:54 +00:00
Jul 10 2012 14:46:22 +00:00
Jul 17 2012 00:12:40 +00:00
ipsdir
c1900-universalk9-mz.SPA.152R1-running-config-backup
lpnat
lpIPSec
c.
Use the more command to view the running-config file in flash memory. Examine the file output and scroll
to the Interface section. Notice the no shutdown command is not included with the GigabitEthernet0/1.
The interface is shut down when this file is used to update the running configuration on the router.
R1# more flash:R1-running-config-backup
<output omitted>
ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
duplex auto
speed auto
<output omitted>
Step 3: Erase the startup configuration and reload the router.

Step 4: Restore the running configuration from flash.
a. Verify the router has the default initial configuration.
Page 10 of 14
b. Copy the saved running-config file from flash to update the running-config.
Router# copy flash:R1-running-config-backup running-config
c.
Use the show ip interface brief command to view the status of the interfaces. The interface
GigabitEthernet0/1 was not enabled when the running configuration was updated, because it is
administratively down.
Interface
GigabitEthernet0/0
GigabitEthernet0/1
Serial0/0/0
Serial0/0/1
IP-Address
unassigned
unassigned
192.168.1.1
unassigned
unassigned
OK?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Method
unset
unset
TFTP
unset
unset
Status
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
administratively
down
down
down
down
down
Protocol
down
down
down
down
down
The interface can be enabled using the no shutdown command in the interface configuration mode on
the router.
Another option is to add the no shutdown command for the GigabitEthernet0/1 interface to the saved file
before updating the router running configuration file. This will be done in Part 6 using a saved file on a
USB flash drive.
Note: Because the IP address was configured by using a file transfer, TFTP is listed under the Method
heading in the show ip interface brief output.
Part 6: (Optional) Use a USB Drive to Back Up and Restore the Running
Configuration
A USB flash drive can be used to backup and restore files on a router with an available USB port. Two USB
ports are available on the 1941 routers.
Note: USB ports are not available on all routers, but you should still become familiar with the commands.
Note: Because some ISR G1 routers (1841, 2801, or 2811) use File Allocation Table (FAT) file systems, there
is a maximum size limit for the USB flash drives that can be used in this part of the lab. The recommended
maximum size for an ISR G1 is 4 GB. If you receive the following message, the file system on the USB flash
drive may be incompatible with the router or the capacity of the USB flash drive may have exceed maximum
size of the FAT file system on the router.
*Feb 8 13:51:34.831: %USBFLASH-4-FORMAT: usbflash0 contains unexpected values in
partition table or boot sector. Device needs formatting before use!
Step 1: Insert a USB flash drive into a USB port on the router.
Notice the message on the terminal when inserting the USB flash drive.
R1#
* *Feb
5 20:38:04.678: %USBFLASH-5-CHANGE: usbflash0 has been inserted!
Step 2: Verify that the USB flash file system is available.

R1# show file systems
File Systems:
Size(b)
-
Free(b)
-
Type
opaque
opaque
opaque
Flags
rw
rw
rw
Prefixes
archive:
system:
tmpsys:
Page 11 of 14
260153344
262136
7728881664
64512000
244676
7703973888
opaque
network
disk
disk
nvram
opaque
opaque
opaque
network
network
network
network
opaque
network
opaque
usbflash
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
wo
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
ro
rw
ro
rw
null:
tftp:
flash0: flash:#
flash1:
nvram:
syslog:
xmodem:
ymodem:
rcp:
http:
ftp:
scp:
tar:
https:
cns:
usbflash0:
Step 3: Copy the running configuration file to the USB flash drive.
Use the copy command to copy the running configuration file to the USB flash drive.
R1# copy running-config usbflash0:
Destination filename [running-config]? R1-running-config-backup.txt
Step 4: List the file on the USB flash drive.

Use the dir command (or show command) on the router to list the files on the USB flash drive. In this sample,
a flash drive was inserted into USB port 0 on the router.
R1# dir usbflash0:
Directory of usbflash0:/
1
2
3
4
5
6
-rw-rw-rw-rw-rw-rw-
16216
2462
24810439
71
65327
2198
Nov 15
May 26
Apr 16
Jun 4
Mar 11
Feb 5
2006
2006
2010
2010
2008
2013
09:34:04
21:33:40
10:28:00
11:23:06
10:54:26
21:36:40
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
ConditionsFR.txt
Nlm.ico
Twice.exe
AUTORUN.INF
ConditionsEN.txt
R1-running-config-backup.txt
Step 5: Erase the startup-config and reload the router.

Step 6: Modify the saved file.
a. Remove the USB drive from the router.
Router#
*Feb
5 21:41:51.134: %USBFLASH-5-CHANGE: usbflash0 has been removed!
b. Insert the USB drive into the USB port of a PC.
Page 12 of 14
c.
Modify the file using a text editor. The no shutdown command is added to the GigabitEthernet0/1
interface. Save the file as a plain text file on to the USB flash drive.
!
ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
no shutdown
duplex auto
speed auto
!
d. Remove the USB flash drive from the PC safely.
Step 7: Restore the running configuration file to the router.

a. Insert the USB flash drive into a USB port on the router. Notice the port number where the USB drive has
been inserted if there is more than one USB port available on the router.
*Feb
5 21:52:00.214: %USBFLASH-5-CHANGE: usbflash1 has been inserted!
b. List the files on the USB flash drive.

Router# dir usbflash1:
Directory of usbflash1:/
1
2
3
4
5
6
-rw-rw-rw-rw-rw-rw-
16216
2462
24810439
71
65327
2344
Nov 15
May 26
Apr 16
Jun 4
Mar 11
Feb 6
2006
2006
2010
2010
2008
2013
09:34:04
21:33:40
10:28:00
11:23:06
10:54:26
14:42:30
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
+00:00
ConditionsFR.txt
Nlm.ico
Twice.exe
AUTORUN.INF
ConditionsEN.txt
R1-running-config-backup.txt
c.
Copy the running configuration file to the router.

Router# copy usbflash1:R1-running-config-backup.txt running-config
Destination filename [running-config]?
R1#
d. Verify that the GigabitEthernet0/1 interface is enabled.

Interface
GigabitEthernet0/0
GigabitEthernet0/1
Serial0/0/0
Serial0/0/1
IP-Address
unassigned
unassigned
192.168.1.1
unassigned
unassigned
OK?
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Method
unset
unset
TFTP
unset
unset
Status
administratively
administratively
up
administratively
administratively
Protocol
down down
down down
up
down down
down down
The G0/1 interface is enabled because the modified running configuration included the no shutdown
command.
Page 13 of 14
Reflection
1. What command do you use to copy a file from the flash to a USB drive?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2. What command do you use to copy a file from the USB flash drive to a TFTP server?
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Router Model
Serial Interface #1
Serial Interface #2
1800
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
1900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2801
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/1/0 (S0/1/0)
Serial 0/1/1 (S0/1/1)
2811
Fast Ethernet 0/0

(F0/0)
Fast Ethernet 0/1

(F0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
2900

(G0/0)

(G0/1)
Serial 0/0/0 (S0/0/0)
Serial 0/0/1 (S0/0/1)
Page 14 of 14
Lab Researching Password Recovery Procedures

Objectives
Part 1: Research the Configuration Register
Identify the purpose of the configuration register.
Describe router behavior for different configuration register values.
Part 2: Document the Password Recovery Procedure for a Specific Cisco Router
Research and record the process for password recovery on a specific Cisco router.
Answer questions based on the researched procedure.
The purpose of this lab is to research the procedure for recovering or resetting the enable password on a
specific Cisco router. The enable password protects access to privileged EXEC and configuration mode on
Cisco devices. The enable password can be recovered, but the enable secret password is encrypted and
would need to be replaced with a new password.
In order to bypass a password, a user must be familiar with the ROM monitor (ROMMON) mode, as well as
the configuration register setting for Cisco routers. ROMMON is basic CLI software stored in ROM that can be
used to troubleshoot boot errors and recover a router when an IOS is not found.
In this lab, you will begin by researching the purpose and settings of the configuration register for Cisco
devices. You will then research and detail the exact procedure for password recovery for a specific Cisco
router.
Required Resources
Part 1: Research the Configuration Register

To recover or reset an enable password, a user will utilize the ROMMON interface to instruct the router to
ignore the startup configuration when booting. When booted, the user will access privilege EXEC mode,
overwrite the running configuration with the saved startup configuration, recover or reset the password, and
restore the routers boot process to include the startup configuration.
The routers configuration register plays a vital role in the process of password recovery. In the first part of this
lab, you will research the purpose of a routers configuration register and the meaning of certain configuration
register values.
Step 1: Describe the purpose of the configuration register.

What is the purpose of the configuration register?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
What command changes the configuration register in configuration mode? ____________________________
What command changes the configuration register in the ROMMON interface? ________________________
Page 1 of 3
Step 2: Determine configuration register values and their meanings.

Research and list the router behavior for the following configuration register values.
0x2102 ________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
0x2142 ________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
What is the difference between these two configuration register values?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Part 2: Document the Password Recovery Procedure for a Specific Cisco

Router
For Part 2, you will describe the exact procedure for recovering or resetting a password from a specific Cisco
router and answer questions based on your research. Your instructor will provide you with the exact router
model to research.
Step 1: Detail the process to recover a password on a specific Cisco router.

Research and list the steps and commands that you need to recover or reset the enable or enable secret
password from your Cisco router. Summarize the steps in your own words.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 3
Step 2: Answer questions about the password recovery procedure.

Using the process for password recovery, answer the following questions.
Describe how to find the current setting for your configuration register.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Describe the process for entering ROMMON.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
What commands do you need to enter the ROMMON interface?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
What message would you expect to see when the router boots?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Why is it important to load the startup configuration into the running configuration?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Why is it important to change the configuration register back to the original value after recovering password?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Reflection
1. Why is it of critical importance that a router be physically secured to prevent unauthorized access?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 3
Design and Build a Small Business Network (Capstone Project)

Objectives
Explain how a small network of directly connected segments is created, configured, and verified.
In this activity, you will demonstrate that you know how to design, configure, verify, and secure a very small
network. Documentation and presentation are also vital parts of this Capstone Project.
Background/Scenario
Design and build a network from scratch.
Your design must include a minimum of one router, one switch, and one PC.
Fully configure the network and use IPv4 or IPv6 (subnetting must be included as a part of your
addressing scheme).
Verify the network using at least five show commands.
Secure the network using SSH, secure passwords, and console passwords (minimum).
Create a rubric to use for informal peer grading. Alternatively, your instructor may choose to use the rubric
provided with this activity.
Present your Capstone Project to the class and be able to answer questions from your peers and Instructor.
Required Resources
Packet Tracer
Student/group-created rubric for assessment of the assignment
Reflection
1. What was the most difficult portion of this activity?
2. Why do you think network documentation is so important to this activity and in the real world?
Page 1 of 1

CCNA1-ITN, SLM, Student Lab Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CCNA1-ITN, SLM, Student Lab Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CCNA1-ITN, SLM, Student Lab Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lab - Initializing and Reloading a Router and Switch

Set Up Devices in the Network as Shown in the Topology

Step 1: Cable the network as shown in the topology.

Step 2: Power on all the devices in the topology.

Initializing and Reloading a Router and Switch

Initialize the Router and Reload

Step 1: Connect to the router.

Step 2: Erase the startup configuration file from NVRAM.

Step 3: Reload the router.

Step 4: Bypass the initial configuration dialog.

Step 5: Terminate the autoinstall program.

Initialize the Switch and Reload

Step 1: Connect to the switch.

Initializing and Reloading a Router and Switch

32514048 bytes total (20886528 bytes free)

Step 3: Delete the VLAN file.

Step 4: Erase the startup configuration file.

Step 5: Reload the switch.

Initializing and Reloading a Router and Switch

Step 6: Bypass the initial configuration dialog.

Lab - Installing the IPv6 Protocol and Assigning Host Addresses

Install the IPv6 protocol.

Examine IPv6 address information.

Part 2: Use the Network Shell (netsh) Utility

Work inside the netsh utility.

Configure a static IPv6 address on the local-area network (LAN) interface.

Exit the netsh utility.

Display IPv6 address information using netsh.

Issue netsh instructions from the command prompt.

Part 1: Install the IPv6 Protocol on a Windows XP PC

Step 1: Install the IPv6 protocol.

Step 2: Examine IPv6 Address Information.

Part 2: Use the Network Shell (netsh) Utility

Step 1: Work inside the Network Shell utility.

Step 2: Configure a static IPv6 address on the LAN interface.

Step 3: Display IPv6 address information using the netsh utility.

Step 4: Exit the netsh utility.

Step 5: Issue netsh instructions from the command prompt.

Draw Your Concept of the Internet

Link addresses or names

Sources and destinations

Internet service providers

Lab - Researching Network Collaboration Tools

Identify current awareness of collaboration tools.

Identify key reasons for using collaboration tools.

Part 2: Share Documents with Google Drive

Part 1: Use Collaboration Tools

Step 2: List some reasons for using collaboration tools.

Part 2: Share Documents with Google Drive

Step 1: Create a Google account.

Lab - Researching Network Collaboration Tools

Lab - Researching Network Collaboration Tools

Lab - Researching Network Collaboration Tools

Step 2: Create a new document.

Lab - Researching Network Collaboration Tools

Step 3: Share a Google document.

b. Name your new document, then click the Save button.

Lab - Researching Network Collaboration Tools

Lab - Researching Network Collaboration Tools